IBM® Sterling Gentran Gz OS66_Gentran_Basic_User_Guide OS66 Basic User Guide
User Manual: GzOS66_Gentran_Basic_User_Guide user guide pdf - FTP File Search (14/20)
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1118
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS User Guide Release 6.6 2204-650-USER01-0002 This edition applies to the 6.6 Version of IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions. Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page N-1. Licensed Materials - Property of IBM IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® © Copyright IBM Corp. 1988, 2011. All Rights Reserved. US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp. . Chapter Table of Contents Partner Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM005......... 2-10 Partner Directory.................................................................... EDIM010......... 2-13 Partner Selection Menu............................................................ EDIM007......... 2-17 Header Information Screen...................................................... EDIM026......... 2-22 Interchange Directory Screen................................................... EDIM027......... 2-27 Control Information Screen 1.................................................... EDIM015......... 2-31 Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options............................... EDIM016......... 2-37 Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options............................... EDIM018......... 2-43 Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options....................EDIM017......... 2-48 Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options..............................EDIM012 ........ 2-52 Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options..............................EDIM019......... 2-57 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM021......... 2-62 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM022......... 2-67 Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options.............................. EDIM013......... 2-71 Control Information Screen 2—STX Options.............................. EDIM014......... 2-76 Group Directory........................................................................... EDIM020......... 2-81 Group Information Screen EDIM030......... 2-86 Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031......... 2-93 Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032......... 2-98 Group Information Screen—GS Options ................................... EDIM033....... 2-103 Transaction Directory.............................................................. EDIM025....... 2-108 Transaction Information Screen................................................ EDIM040....... 2-113 Transaction Information Screen—ST Options ........................... EDIM043....... 2-120 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 .................................................................................... EDIM042....... 2-124 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2..................................................................................... EDIM046....... 2-128 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3..................................................................................... EDIM047....... 2-132 Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options........................ EDIM041....... 2-136 Name and Address Screen........................................................ EDIM035....... 2-140 Name and Address Part 2 Screen............................................... EDIM036....... 2-144 User Defined Screen ................................................................ EDIM045....... 2-148 Data Separation Screen............................................................. EDIM050....... 2-152 Error Rejection Screen................................................................ EDIM055....... 2-158 Copy All Records Screen.......................................................... EDIM060....... 2-162 Partner Cross Reference Menu.................................................. EDIM009....... 2-166 Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen............................. EDIM008....... 2-168 Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen............................ EDIM006....... 2-172 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide -i Trading Partner Relationship Menu............................................. EDIM009....... 2-175 Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen.......................... EDIM023....... 2-177 Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen.......................... EDIM024....... 2-182 Standards Maintenance Menu.................................................... EDIM100........... 3-8 Version Directory..................................................................... EDIM111......... 3-11 Version Screen............................................................................ EDIM110......... 3-14 Version/Transaction Directory................................................... EDIM113......... 3-17 Transaction Directory....................................................... EDIM121/EDIM122 3-21 Transaction Screen.................................................................. EDIM120......... 3-27 Segments Screen........................................................................... EDIM130......... 3-33 Segment Element Screen........................................................... EDIM140......... 3-38 Segment Element.......................................................................... EDIM141......... 3-44 Segment Element Activity Screen................................................ EDIM150......... 3-49 Data Element Definition Screen....................................................EDIM160......... 3-54 Standard Code Menu................................................................. EDIM170......... 3-58 Standard Code Directory........................................................... EDIM171......... 3-60 Standard Code Maintenance Screen............................................ EDIM172......... 3-63 Code Maintenance List Options Screen....................................... EDIM173......... 3-66 Transaction in Use Screen......................................................... EDIM180......... 3-68 Standard Association Screen...................................................... EDIM105......... 3-72 Databank Maintenance Menu.................................................... EDIM250......... 4-24 Interchange Directory Screen................................................... EDIM254......... 4-27 Group Directory...................................................................... EDIM255......... 4-31 Group Directory – Date........................................................... EDIM25A ........ 4-36 Interchange Status Screen............................................................. EDIM251 ........ 4-41 Group Status Screen................................................................ EDIM252......... 4-48 Transaction Status Screen........................................................ EDIM253......... 4-55 Document Directory................................................................ EDIM262......... 4-62 Document Status Screen.......................................................... EDIM263......... 4-66 Change Audit Directory............................................................ EDIM268......... 4-72 Change Audit Status Screen...................................................... EDIM269......... 4-76 Online Log Display Screen...........................................................EDIMOLD ....... 4-81 Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen............................... EDIM240......... 4-86 Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen.................................... EDIM241......... 4-91 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM271......... 4-96 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................ EDIM271....... 4-101 Interchange Display Screen.......................................................... EDIM256....... 4-105 Group Display Screen............................................................... EDIM257....... 4-110 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound...............................EDIM258....... 4-115 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................. EDIM258....... 4-120 Transaction Display Screen...........................................................EDIM259....... 4-125 Segment Display Screen............................................................ EDIM260....... 4-129 Data Element Display Screen...................................................... EDIM261....... 4-133 Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound.................................EDIM265....... 4-137 Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound....................................EDIM265 ...... 4-142 Document Display Screen............................................................ EDIM264....... 4-147 Record Display Screen.............................................................. EDIM266....... 4-151 Field Display Screen.................................................................. EDIM267....... 4-154 Change Audit Status Detail Screen.............................................. EDIM270....... 4-157 Administrative Main Menu........................................................... EDIM210........... 5-7 - ii IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide Security Maintenance Menu..........................................................EDIM200......... 5-10 User ID Directory..................................................................... EDIM203......... 5-12 User ID Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM201......... 5-15 User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products.........................EDIM202......... 5-23 Message Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM211......... 5-25 Message Directory...................................................................... EDIM212......... 5-27 Message Maintenance Screen....................................................... EDIM213......... 5-30 Error Rejection Maintenance Screen........................................... EDIM214......... 5-35 Configuration Directory............................................................ EDIM230......... 5-38 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-40 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-43 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-47 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-50 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-53 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-55 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-58 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-61 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-64 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-66 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-69 Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-72 Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen....................................... EDIM220/EDIM22A 5-74 Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen....................................... EDIM221/EDIM22B 5-78 Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen............................................... EDIM222......... 5-83 Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen....................................... EDIM223/EDIM22D 5-86 Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen....................................... EDIM224/EDIM22E 5-90 Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen....................................... EDIM225/EDIM22F 5-95 Partner Migration Menu............................................................. EDIY100 ......... 5-99 User Selection Screen................................................................ EDIY200 ....... 5-102 User Maintenance Screen............................................................ EDIY500 ....... 5-104 Partner Selection Screen............................................................ EDIY300 ....... 5-107 Relationship Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIY400 ....... 5-110 Data Translation Table Directory Screen..................................... EDIY600 ....... 5-113 Data Table Migration Selection Screen........................................ EDIY610 ....... 5-116 Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen................................... EDIY620 ....... 5-118 Upload Process Maintenance...................................................... EDIM235....... 5-121 Separator Main Menu................................................................ EDIM934....... 5-124 Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen.......................... EDIM935....... 5-126 Priority Options Directory Screen............................................... EDIM936....... 5-133 Priority Options Maintenance Screen.......................................... EDIM937....... 5-136 Change Audit Main Menu.......................................................... EDIM209....... 5-141 Partner Change Audit Directory.................................................. EDIM070....... 5-144 Partner Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM071....... 5-147 Partner Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM072....... 5-152 XREF Change Audit Directory................................................... EDIM074....... 5-156 XREF Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM075....... 5-158 XREF Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM076....... 5-161 PARTREL Change Audit Directory............................................. EDIM077....... 5-163 PARTREL Change Audit Status.................................................. EDIM078....... 5-165 PARTREL Change Audit Detail................................................... EDIM079....... 5-168 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide - iii Standards Change Audit Directory................................................EDIM181 ...... 5-171 Standards Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM182....... 5-173 Standards Change Audit Detail..................................................... EDIM183....... 5-177 Application Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM560....... 5-180 Application Change Audit Status................................................. EDIM561....... 5-183 Application Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM562....... 5-186 Transaction Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM520....... 5-189 Transaction Change Audit Status................................................ EDIM521....... 5-192 Transaction Change Audit Detail................................................. EDIM522....... 5-195 Code Table Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM587....... 5-198 Code Table Change Audit Status................................................. EDIM588....... 5-201 Code Table Change Audit Detail.................................................. EDIM589....... 5-204 Security Change Audit Directory................................................ EDIM204....... 5-207 Security Change Audit Status....................................................... EDIM205....... 5-209 Security Change Audit Detail EDIM206....... 5-212 Error Message Change Audit Directory........................................EDIM215....... 5-214 Error Message Change Audit Status............................................. EDIM216....... 5-216 Error Message Change Audit Detail............................................ EDIM217....... 5-219 Configuration Change Audit Directory........................................ EDIM232....... 5-222 Configuration Change Audit Status............................................. EDIM233....... 5-224 Configuration Change Audit Detail.............................................. EDIM234....... 5-227 Global Parameter Change Audit Directory................................... EDIM226....... 5-229 Global Parameter Change Audit Status........................................ EDIM227....... 5-231 Global Parameter Change Audit Detail.........................................EDIM228....... 5-234 Separator Change Audit Directory............................................... EDIM938....... 5-236 Separator Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM939....... 5-239 Separator Change Audit Detail.................................................... EDIM940....... 5-243 Message Center Job Summary................................................... EDIM245....... 5-246 Message Center Job Detail........................................................... EDIM246....... 5-250 Message Center Report Display.................................................. EDIM247....... 5-253 Mapping Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM599......... 6-14 Application Definition Menu........................................................ EDIM550......... 6-16 Application Directory....................................................................EDIM551......... 6-19 Application Data ID Screen......................................................... EDIM552......... 6-23 Copy Application Definition Screen............................................. EDIM557......... 6-28 Application Records Screen......................................................... EDIM553......... 6-31 Application Fields Screen............................................................ EDIM554......... 6-37 Application Partner Reference Screen.......................................... EDIM555......... 6-43 Application Envelope Definition Screen.......................................EDIM558......... 6-47 Transaction Mapping Menu.......................................................... EDIM500......... 6-52 Transaction Mapping Directory.................................................. EDIM512......... 6-55 Transaction Maintenance Screen................................................. EDIM503......... 6-58 Copy Transaction Screen............................................................. EDIM501......... 6-63 Copy Segments From Standard Screen....................................... EDIM502......... 6-66 Segments Screen......................................................................... EDIM504......... 6-70 Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................................EDIM514......... 6-76 Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................................. EDIM511......... 6-83 Extended Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................EDIM513......... 6-89 Extended Element Mapping Outbound Screen..............................EDIM508 ...... 6-100 Build Repeating Data Elements Screen.........................................EDIM517 ...... 6-110 - iv IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide Element Information Screen....................................................... EDIM515....... Select Codes Screen................................................................. EDIM509....... Select Application Data Screen.....................................................EDIM510....... Copy Segments From Transaction Screen.................................... EDIM505....... Subfield Screen............................................................................. EDIM507....... Code and Data Translation Menu................................................. EDIM580....... Table Directory............................................................................. EDIM586....... Define Translation Table Screen...................................................EDIM581....... Copy Code or Data Screen......................................................... EDIM582....... Code Translation Screen................................................................EDIM583 ...... Data Translation By Partner Screen.............................................. EDIM584....... Data Validation Screen............................................................... EDIM585....... Chapter 1 6-115 6-119 6-122 6-125 6-129 6-134 6-136 6-139 6-144 6-148 6-152 6-157 Getting Started Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic ........................................................................ 1-3 How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic ........................................................... 1-4 What is EDI? ............................................................................................................ 1-5 EDI Terms ................................................................................................................ 1-6 System Overview...................................................................................................... 1-7 Databank Maintenance ........................................................................................... 1-12 Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic .......................................................... 1-13 Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics ...................................... 1-15 Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options.................................................................... 1-18 Using Action Codes................................................................................................ 1-24 Getting Help .......................................................................................................... 1-25 Function Keys......................................................................................................... 1-27 Common Keyboard Conventions ........................................................................... 1-28 Basic File Maintenance Procedures........................................................................ 1-29 Jump Codes ............................................................................................................ 1-30 Chapter 2 The Partner Subsystem Overview .................................................................................................................. 2-1 Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 2-3 Partner Maintenance Menu.......................................................... EDIM005......... 2-10 Partner Directory........................................................................ EDIM010......... 2-13 Partner Selection Menu........................................ .................... EDIM007......... 2-17 Header Information Screen........................................................... EDIM026......... 2-22 Interchange Directory Screen....................................................... EDIM027......... 2-27 Control Information Screen 1........................................................EDIM015......... 2-31 Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options................................EDIM016......... 2-37 Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options................................EDIM018......... 2-43 Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options....................EDIM017......... 2-48 Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options............................. EDIM012......... 2-52 Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options............................. EDIM019......... 2-57 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM021......... 2-62 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4............................................................. EDIM022......... 2-67 Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options.............................. EDIM013......... 2-71 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide -v Control Information Screen 2—STX Options.............................. EDIM014......... 2-76 Group Directory....................................................................... EDIM020......... 2-81 Group Information Screen......................................................... EDIM030......... 2-86 Group Information Screen—BAT Options .................................. EDIM031......... 2-93 Group Information Screen—UNG Options ................................. EDIM032......... 2-98 Group Information Screen—GS Options..................................... EDIM033....... 2-103 Transaction Directory................................................................ EDIM025....... 2-108 Transaction Information Screen................................................... EDIM043....... 2-120 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1............................................................................................ EDIM042....... 2-124 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2........................................................................................... EDIM046....... 2-128 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3..............................................................................................EDIM047 ...... 2-132 Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options .........................EDIM041 ...... 2-136 Name and Address Screen.............................................................EDIM035....... 2-140 Name and Address Part 2 Screen.................................................. EDIM036....... 2-144 User Defined Screen ................................................................ EDIM045....... 2-148 Data Separation Screen............................................................. EDIM050....... 2-152 Error Rejection Screen.............................................................. EDIM055....... 2-158 Copy All Records Screen........................................................... EDIM060....... 2-162 Partner Cross Reference Menu......................................................EDIM009....... 2-166 Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen.............................. EDIM008....... 2-168 Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen.............................EDIM006....... 2-172 Trading Partner Relationship Menu.............................................. EDIM009....... 2-175 Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen...........................EDIM023 ...... 2-177 Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen...........................EDIM024 ...... 2-182 Chapter 3 The Standards Subsystem Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1 Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 3-2 Standards Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM100........... 3-8 Version Directory...................................................................... EDIM111......... 3-11 Version Screen.............................................................................. EDIM110......... 3-14 Version/Transaction Directory......................................................EDIM113......... 3-17 Transaction Directory....................................................... EDIM121/EDIM122 3-21 Transaction Screen........................................................................ EDIM120......... 3-27 Segments Screen........................................................................... EDIM140......... 3-38 Segment Element.......................................................................... EDIM141......... 3-44 Segment Element Activity Screen.................................................EDIM150......... 3-49 Data Element Definition Screen................................................... EDIM160......... 3-54 Standard Code Menu.....................................................................EDIM170......... 3-58 Standard Code Directory............................................................ EDIM171......... 3-60 Standard Code Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM172......... 3-63 Code Maintenance List Options Screen........................................ EDIM173......... 3-66 Transaction in Use Screen.......................................................... EDIM180......... 3-68 Standard Association Screen...................................................... EDIM105......... 3-72 - vi IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 4 The Databank Subsystem Overview .................................................................................................................. 4-1 Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 4-3 Databank Screens and Functions............................................................................ 4-10 How to Use the Maintenance Functions................................................................. 4-14 Databank Maintenance Menu..................................................... EDIM250......... 4-24 Interchange Directory Screen...................................................... EDIM254......... 4-27 Group Directory....................................................................... EDIM255......... 4-31 Group Directory – Date............................................................... EDIM25A ........ 4-36 Interchange Status Screen............................................................. EDIM251 ........ 4-41 Group Status Screen...................................................................... EDIM252......... 4-48 Transaction Status Screen......................................................... EDIM253......... 4-55 Document Directory.................................................................. EDIM262......... 4-62 Document Status Screen.............................................................. EDIM263......... 4-66 Change Audit Directory............................................................. EDIM268......... 4-72 Change Audit Status Screen...................................................... EDIM269......... 4-76 Online Log Display Screen....................................................... EDIMOLD ....... 4-81 Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen.............................. EDIM240......... 4-86 Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen.................................... EDIM241......... 4-91 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM271......... 4-96 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................ EDIM271....... 4-101 Interchange Display Screen...................................................... EDIM256....... 4-105 Group Display Screen.............................................................. EDIM257....... 4-110 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM258....... 4-115 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound ............................... EDIM258....... 4-120 Transaction Display Screen....................................................... EDIM259....... 4-125 Segment Display Screen........................................................... EDIM260....... 4-129 Data Element Display Screen...................................................... EDIM261....... 4-133 Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound.................................EDIM265....... 4-137 Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................... EDIM265....... 4-142 Document Display Screen........................................................... EDIM264....... 4-147 Record Display Screen................................................................ EDIM266....... 4-151 Field Display Screen.................................................................. EDIM267....... 4-154 Change Audit Status Detail Screen.............................................. EDIM270....... 4-157 Chapter 5 The Administration Subsystem Overview .................................................................................................................. 5-1 Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 5-4 Administrative Main Menu.......................................................... EDIM210........... 5-7 Security Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM200......... 5-10 User ID Directory..........................................................................EDIM203......... 5-12 User ID Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM201......... 5-15 User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products.........................EDIM202......... 5-23 Message Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM211......... 5-25 Message Directory..................................................................... EDIM212......... 5-27 Message Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM213......... 5-30 Error Rejection Maintenance Screen.............................................EDIM214......... 5-35 Configuration Directory............................................................... EDIM230......... 5-38 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-40 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide - vii Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-43 Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-47 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-50 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-53 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-55 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-58 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-61 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-64 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-66 Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-69 Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-72 Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen....................................... EDIM220/EDIM22A 5-74 Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen ....................................... EDIM221/EDIM22B 5-78 Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen................................................ EDIM222......... 5-83 Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen........................................ EDIM223/EDIM22D 5-86 Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen.................... ................... EDIM224/EDIM22E 5-90 Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen.........................................EDIM225/EDIM22F 5-95 Partner Migration Menu............................................................ EDIY100 ......... 5-99 User Selection Screen............................................................... EDIY200 ....... 5-102 User Maintenance Screen.......................................................... EDIY500 ....... 5-104 Partner Selection Screen............................................................ EDIY300 ....... 5-107 Relationship Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIY400 ....... 5-110 Data Translation Table Directory Screen..................................... EDIY600 ....... 5-113 Data Table Migration Selection Screen........................................ EDIY610 ....... 5-116 Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen................................... EDIY620 ....... 5-118 Upload Process Maintenance...................................................... EDIM235....... 5-121 Separator Main Menu................................................................ EDIM934....... 5-124 Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen.......................... EDIM935....... 5-126 Priority Options Directory Screen............................................... EDIM936....... 5-133 Priority Options Maintenance Screen........................................... EDIM937....... 5-136 Change Audit Main Menu........................................................... EDIM209....... 5-141 Partner Change Audit Directory....................................................EDIM070....... 5-144 Partner Change Audit Status....................................................... EDIM071....... 5-147 Partner Change Audit Detail....................................................... EDIM072....... 5-152 XREF Change Audit Directory..................................................... EDIM074....... 5-156 XREF Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM075....... 5-158 XREF Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM076....... 5-161 PARTREL Change Audit Directory............................................. EDIM077....... 5-163 PARTREL Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM078....... 5-165 PARTREL Change Audit Detail................................................... EDIM079....... 5-168 Standards Change Audit Directory............................................... EDIM181....... 5-171 Standards Change Audit Status..................................................... EDIM182....... 5-173 Standards Change Audit Detail.................................................... EDIM183....... 5-177 Application Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM560....... 5-180 Application Change Audit Status..................................................EDIM561....... 5-183 Application Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM562....... 5-186 Transaction Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM520....... 5-189 Transaction Change Audit Status..................................................EDIM521....... 5-192 Transaction Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM522....... 5-195 Code Table Change Audit Directory.............................................EDIM587....... 5-198 - viii IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide Code Table Change Audit Status................................................ EDIM588....... Code Table Change Audit Detail................................................. EDIM589....... Security Change Audit Directory................................................ EDIM204....... Security Change Audit Status..................................................... EDIM205....... Security Change Audit Detail....................................................... EDIM206....... Error Message Change Audit Directory........................................EDIM215....... Error Message Change Audit Status..............................................EDIM216 ...... Error Message Change Audit Detail..............................................EDIM217 ...... Configuration Change Audit Directory.........................................EDIM232....... Configuration Change Audit Status.............................................. EDIM233....... Configuration Change Audit Detail.............................................. EDIM234....... Global Parameter Change Audit Directory................................... EDIM226....... Global Parameter Change Audit Status.........................................EDIM227....... Global Parameter Change Audit Detail.........................................EDIM228....... Separator Change Audit Directory.............................................. EDIM938....... Separator Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM939....... Separator Change Audit Detail..................................................... EDIM940....... Message Center Job Summary.................................................... EDIM245....... Message Center Job Detail........................................................... EDIM246....... Message Center Report Display.................................................. EDIM247....... Chapter 6 5-201 5-204 5-207 5-209 5-212 5-214 5-216 5-219 5-222 5-224 5-227 5-229 5-231 5-234 5-236 5-239 5-243 5-246 5-250 5-253 The Mapping Subsystem Overview .................................................................................................................. 6-1 Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 6-2 Mapping Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM599......... 6-14 Application Definition Menu....................................................... EDIM550......... 6-16 Application Directory....................................................................EDIM551......... 6-19 Application Data ID Screen.......................................................... EDIM552......... 6-23 Copy Application Definition Screen............................................. EDIM557......... 6-28 Application Records Screen.......................................................... EDIM553......... 6-31 Application Fields Screen............................................................. EDIM554......... 6-37 Application Partner Reference Screen.......................................... EDIM555......... 6-43 Application Envelope Definition Screen.......................................EDIM558......... 6-47 Transaction Mapping Menu......................................................... EDIM500......... 6-52 Transaction Mapping Directory.................................................. EDIM512......... 6-55 Transaction Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIM503......... 6-58 Copy Transaction Screen.............................................................. EDIM501......... 6-63 Copy Segments From Standard Screen........................................ EDIM502......... 6-66 Segments Screen....................................................................... EDIM504......... 6-70 Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................................EDIM514......... 6-76 Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................................. EDIM511......... 6-83 Extended Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................EDIM513......... 6-89 Extended Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................. EDIM508....... 6-100 Build Repeating Data Elements Screen........................................ EDIM517....... 6-110 Element Information Screen...................................................... EDIM515....... 6-115 Select Codes Screen................................................................. EDIM509....... 6-119 Select Application Data Screen.................................................... EDIM510....... 6-122 Copy Segments From Transaction Screen.................................... EDIM505....... 6-125 Subfield Screen......................................................................... EDIM507....... 6-129 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide - ix Code and Data Translation Menu..................................................EDIM580....... Table Directory......................................................................... EDIM586....... Define Translation Table Screen................................................. EDIM581....... Copy Code or Data Screen............................................................ EDIM582....... Code Translation Screen............................................................ EDIM583....... Data Translation By Partner Screen.............................................. EDIM584....... Data Validation Screen..................................................................EDIM585....... Chapter 7 6-134 6-136 6-139 6-144 6-148 6-152 6-157 System Features: Tips and Techniques Overview .................................................................................................................. 7-1 Associated Data – ASC X12 102 Transactions........................................................ 7-4 Associated Data – EDIFACT Packages ................................................................. 7-11 Batch Separator ...................................................................................................... 7-25 Binary Data – X12 ................................................................................................. 7-36 Change Audit in Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................ 7-44 Configuring JCL Submission and User Security.................................................... 7-85 Inbound Application Constant Records.................................................................. 7-90 Interchange Version................................................................................................ 7-94 Multiple Envelope IDs ......................................................................................... 7-100 Repeating Data Elements ..................................................................................... 7-107 Element Mapping Inbound screen example: ........................................................ 7-115 Standards Updates ................................................................................................ 7-116 Underscore Substitution Characters ..................................................................... 7-137 Unload/Upload Facility ........................................................................................ 7-159 Using the User Security Facility........................................................................... 7-171 Appendix A Jump Codes Jump Codes By Subsystem ..................................................................................... A-1 Jump Codes By Screen Name ............................................................................... A-10 Notices Trademarks .............................................................................................................. N-3 Glossary Definition of Terms ................................................................................................. G-1 Reserved Word Constants ..................................................................................... G-11 Application Data Types......................................................................................... G-17 EDI Data Types ..................................................................................................... G-20 Index -x IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started This chapter introduces IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 and provides descriptions of the system features and benefits, system architecture, and operation. This chapter contains the following topics: Topic Page Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................................... 1-3 How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic .................................................................... 1-4 What is EDI?......................................................................................................................... 1-5 Manual Data Exchange.............................................................................................. 1-5 Electronic Data Interchange ...................................................................................... 1-6 EDI Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1-6 System Overview................................................................................................................... 1-7 Inbound Processing ................................................................................................... 1-8 Outbound Processing............................................................................................... 1-10 Databank Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-12 Why Use Databanking?........................................................................................... 1-12 Functions of Databanking........................................................................................ 1-12 Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................... 1-13 Where Sterling Gentran:Basic Fits Into Your Computer Environment................... 1-13 Files Used by Sterling Gentran:Basic...................................................................... 1-14 Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics ............................................... 1-15 Logging on to Sterling Gentran:Basic ..................................................................... 1-15 Changing Your Password ........................................................................................ 1-17 Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options ............................................................................. 1-18 Sterling Gentran:Basic Menus................................................................................. 1-21 Sterling Gentran:Basic Screens ............................................................................... 1-21 Screen Component Descriptions ............................................................................. 1-22 Using Action Codes............................................................................................................. 1-24 Getting Help ........................................................................................................................ 1-25 Accessing Online Field-Level Help ........................................................................ 1-25 Accessing Online Screen-Level Help...................................................................... 1-26 Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 1-27 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-1 Getting Started Common Keyboard Conventions ...................................................................................... 1-28 Basic File Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................. 1-29 Add .......................................................................................................................... 1-29 Update...................................................................................................................... 1-29 Delete....................................................................................................................... 1-29 Jump Codes ......................................................................................................................... 1-30 How to Jump Between Screens ............................................................................... 1-30 Types of Jump Codes............................................................................................... 1-31 User-defined Jump Code Table ............................................................................... 1-32 Jump Code Guidelines............................................................................................. 1-32 1-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic Getting Started Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 provides the flexibility, efficiency, and thoroughness required to meet the most demanding EDI requirements. Sterling Gentran:Basic facilitates EDI in several ways, including: • Translates data between your application and the standard format required (such as, ASC X12, UCS, WINS, EDIA (TDCC), EDIFACT, and ANA TRADACOMS). • Compliance checks data by table-driven syntax-checking programs. • Allows you to set a multitude of options based on your trading partner. • Delivers an easily-managed system. • Provides control for audit trails, security, and error reporting. • Provides a powerful tool for mapping via the Mapping Maintenance subsystem. Specifically, Sterling Gentran:Basic offers the following features: All EDI Transactions Handled — Tables that define all EDI transactions, segments, and elements. These include ASC X12 transactions as well as the Air, Ocean, Motor, and Rail standards of EDIA (TDCC), UCS, WINS, TRADACOMS, and EDIFACT. Multiple Standards Versions — For meeting the requirements of trading partners, enables the use of multiple standards versions. Standards Translated to Readily-used Formats — Transactions received by your computer in ASC X12 or other standard formats are variable-length, variable-position logical segments. Sterling Gentran:Basic produces fixed-length output that is easy to use. Partner-specific Decisions — A large number of decisions may vary by partner. For example, the transactions and functional groups sent may be controlled by partner. Databanking Functions — Sterling Gentran:Basic provides auditing capabilities on all incoming and outgoing transactions, groups, and interchanges. Suspended Data is Easily Reprocessed — Data that cannot be initially interpreted is put into a Suspense file for later user action. Envelope Segment Generation — Specify the partner envelope information one time. Use this information to subsequently generate envelopes. Sterling Gentran:Basic automatically generates the appropriate interchange, functional group, and transaction envelope segments. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-3 Getting Started How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic This chapter provides instruction to assist you in the operation of the online portion of Sterling Gentran:Basic. Use the Sterling Gentran:Basic Reference Library, provided with your purchase of Sterling Gentran:Basic, to perform the following tasks: • Create and maintain trading partner records • Perform databanking of translations • Map application data to standard formats for inbound and outbound data • View and maintain standards formats • Maintain Sterling Gentran:Basic system security • View and maintain system configuration, error messages, and global parameters This guide, the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide, provides reference information related to the online portion of the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, which is organized as follows: • This chapter provides a high-level overview of the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. You will learn about the flow of documents in and out of the system, how they are translated, and how they are managed. • This chapter also provides detailed information about the operation of the online system in general: the basics of how to use the Sterling Gentran:Basic online system. • The following chapters in this guide correspond to each online subsystem of Sterling Gentran:Basic and introduce you to the specific tasks you can perform with each particular feature. A complete description of all Sterling Gentran:Basic screens, including the screen fields, are detailed in the appropriate chapters. • Finally, the appendix of this guide contains an updated reference listing of jump codes. You will learn more about jump codes later in this chapter. In addition to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide, the Sterling Gentran:Basic documentation set contains the following guides: 1-4 • IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide Use the Installation Guide to help you install the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. • IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide Use this guide as a reference of system messages you might encounter while using the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. • IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide Use this guide to obtain specific technical and program operational information about inbound and outbound processing, programs, files, and more. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide What is EDI? Getting Started What is EDI? EDI is electronic data interchange. Simply, EDI is a method for communicating data at high rates of speed – from computer to computer. The following descriptions explain the basic requirements to accomplish communication. • Standards Standards are extremely detailed formats for communicating specific types of information. Standards are created and agreed upon by various industries and countries. Standards are not a language. They are a specification for how data is to be arranged. By using public standards, individual companies can use any computer system and application and still communicate without confusion. • Translation Translation is the process of taking data that is prepared by your application programs and placing the data into a public standard, or the reverse process. You set up translations between application file formats and public standards by a process called mapping. Sterling Gentran:Basic is the software program that translates the data to and from standards. • Trading Partners Trading partners are the parties with whom you agree to exchange data, such as your vendors or suppliers. To explain how EDI works, we first describe how data is exchanged manually. Then, we describe how the same data can be electronically exchanged. Manual Data Exchange The following example shows how data might be manually exchanged. Notice how many steps it can take to complete the exchange for purchasing only one pocket protector. 1. The buyer begins preparing a purchase order (P.O.) form for the pocket protector. 2. The buyer researches to determine how the manufacturer requires submission of P.O.s for pocket protectors. 3. After gathering the data, the buyer translates the order to meet the manufacturer's requirements. 4. The buyer incorporates the translated data into the P.O. Then, the buyer mails the P.O. form to the manufacturer. 5. After progressing through a mail-sorting process, the P.O. is delivered to the manufacturer. 6. The manufacturer routes the P.O. for the pocket protector to the proper department(s) for processing (such as billing, picking, and shipping). The entire process repeats in reverse when the manufacturer responds with an invoice. With all conditions being ideal and no errors occurring, the entire exchange can take up to eight business days. If there are any problems, corrections, or incorrect translations, the process may stretch into weeks. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-5 Getting Started EDI Terms Electronic Data Interchange The following example shows how data might be electronically exchanged. Most of the steps necessary to purchase one pocket protector automatically occur; thus, reducing processing time and data-entry errors. 1. 2. The buyer enters the order for one pocket protector into a computer terminal and an in-house purchasing system. After initiating the order, the following tasks occur behindthe-scenes: a. The in-house application passes the P.O. to Sterling Gentran:Basic. b. Sterling Gentran:Basic maps the in-house application format to the appropriate public standards format. c. The standard is verified and transmission envelopes are generated. d. An audit trail is created for tracking the document and acknowledgments. e. Sterling Gentran:Basic passes the standardized document to the buyer’s communications system and the document is transmitted to the manufacturer. The manufacturer receives the document and transmits an acknowledgment of its receipt, and then processes it. Even in a reverse situation when the manufacturer sends the buyer an invoice and the buyer responds with an acknowledgment, a reduction in processing time occurs. In addition, a number of verifications, confirmations, and detailed records result for both the buyer and the manufacturer. EDI Terms The following list provides definitions for basic EDI terms used frequently throughout this guide. 1-6 Application An in-house program that processes data. Your application file format is the way your business prefers to view and process data. Document One complete piece of data. For example, one purchase order. Transaction Set When you translate from your application file format to a public standard, you are translating your document to a transaction set. Envelope An electronic transmission header and trailer that can surround one or more transaction sets and/or types. For example, one envelope could contain three purchase orders, four invoices, and six acknowledgments. Segment A single line of a transaction set; for example, the Bill To segment. Data Element The individual parts of a segment; for example, Bill To City or Bill To Postal Code). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Overview Getting Started System Overview Sterling Gentran:Basic is a data translation and management system. It allows you to easily communicate with your trading partners (those with whom you do business) through electronic data interchange — EDI. To accomplish this action, you need to provide, through communications, all your documents in a public standard, and likewise be prepared to interpret documents sent to you in a defined public standard. This process might be relatively simple if you deal with only one standard and one trading partner. However, each industry has specific requirements that must be met, and every trading partner has different requirements for doing business. These requirements mean that you must be able to communicate in the appropriate standard, as well as the appropriate version of the standards, for each trading partner. The task is further complicated by the need to acknowledge the receipt of documents and monitor data for errors. The normal operation of Sterling Gentran:Basic can be divided into two types of processing: inbound processing and outbound processing. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-7 Getting Started System Overview Inbound Processing When your trading partner sends you EDI documents, they are in the format of a public standard. When your computer system receives an EDI document, Sterling Gentran:Basic goes to work. Figure 1.1, on the next page, illustrates a high-level view of inbound processing. EDI Input File Inbound Editor Intermediate File Data Split Inbound Mapper Application File User Application Figure 1.1 Inbound Translation Processing 1-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Overview Getting Started The following steps outline inbound processing from the receipt of transaction sets from a trading partner to your application file format: 1. Your trading partner sends you documents in a public standard that you have mutually agreed upon. You will probably receive these files via telecommunications. 2. The documents are stored in an EDI input file. 3. The EDI input file is passed to the inbound Editor. The Editor also uses the following files: File Contents of File Table File Public standards Error Message File Sterling Gentran:Basic error messages Databanking File Records of inbound and outbound activity Global Parameters File Overall system operating rules Partner Profile Partner-specific operating rules If the documents are wrapped, they are unwrapped at this point. Unwrapping means each new segment is aligned to the start of a new record. The inbound Editor uses the partner profile information for this trading partner to know what to do (e.g., data separation and error rejection) and how to respond to the inbound documents (e.g., acknowledgments generated). The Editor checks the EDI data to ensure that it complies with the standard. If it doesn’t, the Editor creates an error report, and possibly marks the data, or part of it, for rejection. 4. The edited data is passed to an Intermediate file. The Databanking file is updated to record receipt of documents and acknowledgements of previous documents that you transmitted. 5. The Intermediate file is passed to the Inbound Split program. This program separates the inbound data according to your criteria and rejects data that does not comply with standards (as previously marked by the inbound Editor). 6. The separated data is translated to your application file format, using the maps you have created in the online Mapping subsystem. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1-9 Getting Started System Overview Outbound Processing Outbound processing prepares your application output data for transmission to your trading partners. Like inbound processing, outbound processing translates your application data to the chosen standard and checks all data to ensure compliance with the selected public standard. Figure 1.2 illustrates a high-level view of outbound processing. User Application Application File Outbound Mapper EDI Intermediate File Envelope Generator (Optional) Outbound Editor Data Split Figure 1.2 Outbound Translation Processing 1 - 10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide System Overview Getting Started These steps outline outbound processing from your application file format to transaction sets for your trading partner. 1. The system takes the data from your application output file. Using the maps you created, Sterling Gentran:Basic translates this data to a public standard. 2. The system generates the control envelopes necessary for transmitting the data. 3. The Intermediate file is passed to the outbound Editor. The Editor also uses the following files: File Contents of File Table File Public standards Error Message File Sterling Gentran:Basic error messages Databanking File Records of inbound and outbound activity Global Parameters File Overall system operating rules Partner Profile Partner-specific operating rules Along with this intermediate file, functional acknowledgments created by the inbound Editor are input for compliance checking and audit updating. The outbound Editor uses the partner profile information for this trading partner as instructions (such as, standards, data separation, or error rejection). The Editor ensures that the document complies to the standard. If it does not comply, the Editor creates an error report and may mark the data for rejection. 4. The Databanking file is updated to record transmission of functional acknowledgments and outbound documents. After the outbound data has been translated to standard format, it must continue on toward transmission to the trading partner. 5. The standard format file is passed to the Outbound Split program. This program divides the outbound data according to your criteria and rejects data that does not comply with standards (as previously marked by the outbound Editor). 6. The separated data is now ready for transmission to your trading partner. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 11 Getting Started Databank Maintenance Databank Maintenance Databank Maintenance provides the online ability to directly control and view application data and EDI data processed by Sterling Gentran:Basic. Change Audit functions provide complete details of all online changes made by users to databank data. The Online Log display is also available within the Databank subsystem for viewing system status and exceptions. Why Use Databanking? Benefits derived from using databanking include: • Improved data control • Reduced number of re-transmissions • Improved response to trading partners requirements Functions of Databanking Databanking functions fall into four general categories: • EDI data-related control and inquiry functions • Application document-related control and inquiry functions • Change Audit-related inquiry functions • Online Log display from which you can monitor system status and exceptions The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank facility takes advantage of the proven functions already in the Sterling Gentran:Basic family of products, while adding functionality that provides flexible control of documents as they pass through the system. The Databank Facility option, if implemented, is an integral part of your Sterling Gentran:Basic system. Note: Using the Databank facility is optional. 1 - 12 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic Getting Started Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic As you are getting ready to install Sterling Gentran:Basic, put together a project team that understands all the components of the system and how it works in your operation. You will install Sterling Gentran:Basic and ensure that it is running according to design. We can provide consultants to train your staff in the use of the parameters to manage the activities of the system. See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for specific details on arranging the Sterling Gentran:Basic libraries. Your responsibilities for installing Sterling Gentran:Basic include the following tasks: • Initial loading and testing of the system • Daily operation/running of the system, including job control language (JCL) • Understanding and setting up a few system parameters • Getting data to and from other EDI partners (This action is usually accomplished with data communications.) • Creating and maintaining the maps that translate data from your application file format to the public standards used in communicating with your trading partners, and the reverse • Defining where the system files reside in your environment Where Sterling Gentran:Basic Fits Into Your Computer Environment Sterling Gentran:Basic is designed to be the user interface between your application systems and your EDI trading partners. The system takes the application files you have defined and translates them to standard formats, validates them, and prepares them for transmission. The system expects incoming data from your trading partner to be in a specified public standard that it verifies and translates to your application file format. To complete this process, Sterling Gentran:Basic expects incoming data files to have been created from another source and deposited on your computer. The typical method used to perform this task is data communication, such as standard RJE (remote job entry), using any acceptable data communication protocol. However, RJE is not a requirement. Tape transfer of data between machines (or any other mechanism) for depositing the incoming data on your computer is acceptable. Sterling Gentran:Basic is not sensitive to the way data is deposited on your computer. Getting the data to the computer is the responsibility of you and your EDI partners. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 13 Getting Started Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic Files Used by Sterling Gentran:Basic As with any computer system, there are certain types of files required for system operation. Sterling Gentran:Basic supplies the programs and job control/command language to run the programs in the suggested processing order. You may tailor the job control/command language to fit your company’s standards of operation. These files are included: File Description Partner Profile Contains detailed information about your trading partner. Databanking File (optional) Provides tracking of Sterling Gentran:Basic processing actions by storing directory data for outbound application, outbound EDI, inbound EDI, and/or inbound application processes. Tables File Contains all the standards for data translation. Mapping File Contains definitions of your application file formats, the transaction tables, and the transaction maps necessary to translate your data to and from public standards. Security File Contains Sterling Gentran:Basic system security information in which all User IDs and passwords are encrypted. Configuration File Contains system level information that applies to all functions of processing. Sterling Gentran:Basic also supplies an Error Message file that stores a list of possible error messages. IBM® Sterling Gentran® enables you to customize these error messages to make them more specific to the needs of your environment. Caution: Changes to the actual error message numbers could result in generating misleading information as data passes through the Editors. Global parameters enable you to direct the operation of the system when you want to take advantage of the available Sterling Gentran features. To run the default mode for all variable features, no global parameters are necessary. You can modify the global parameters online or through the job control/command language. The other files Sterling Gentran uses are either the EDI input file it expects or the EDI output files it creates. 1 - 14 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics This section defines the basics of operating the Sterling Gentran:Basic online system. The design of the online system allows easy access and maintenance of the required information for smooth communication using EDI. Although there are several system features that have specific commands and uses, the majority of the system can be operated using a few basic commands. Logging on to Sterling Gentran:Basic Sterling Gentran:Basic uses a security system that limits access through the use of User IDs and passwords. Sterling Gentran:Basic security controls who can use the online system and what features they may access. See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for specific information about security. 1. See your system administrator to receive a Logon ID and password to start the online Sterling Gentran:Basic system. You also need information on how to access CICS. The Sterling Gentran:Basic User ID is an identifier, most likely your initials or name. This ID enables the system to recognize you, determines which features you have access to, and tracks file changes. The password is a word, including letters and numbers, that prevents others from logging on to the system using your ID (only you and the system administrator should know your password). If someone else uses your User ID and password, any changes that a user makes in a Sterling Gentran:Basic file are attributed to you. The system administrator informs you about how to use your company’s specific terminal hardware and operating system. The administrator also shows you how to start Sterling Gentran:Basic. Typically, you start Sterling Gentran:Basic from a menu, but you can also start Sterling Gentran:Basic by entering a specific command. 2. Sign on to CICS. 3. Start Sterling Gentran:Basic as instructed by your system administrator. The Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen is displayed with the proprietary trade/secret notice. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 15 Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics EDIM000 06/01/2011 12:00:00 IBM® Sterling Gentran® for z/OS® System Image: EDI Databank Config: FFFF Sterling Gentran:Control 6.6.00 Sterling Gentran:Plus 6.6.00 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-Trck 6.6.00 User ID: Program Image: EDI Sterling Gentran:Realtime Sterling Gentran:Basic Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-Excp Sterling Gentran:Structure 6.6.00 6.6.00 6.6.00 6.6.00 Password: New Password: Licensed Materials - Property of IBM © Copyright IBM Corp. (1988, 2011) All Rights Reserved IBM and the IBM logo are Trademarks of International Business Machines Enter PF3=Exit The information on the Logon screen indicates the Sterling Gentran:Basic system configuration and the product versions that have been installed. The following three fields are standard for all users: • SYSTEM IMAGE: SIM Where SIM is the user-defined system image associated with the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. The system image is determined by the CICS Transaction ID entered to access Sterling Gentran:Basic. • PROGRAM IMAGE: PIM Where PIM is the user-defined program image associated with the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. The program image is retrieved from Record Type 0 of the Configuration file (EDICFG). See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for more information about online configuration. • DBK CONFIG: cccc Each c in the field represents one of the four Databank types. Databank valid values include F for Full, D for Directory, and N for No Databank. The order of representation is: • • • • 1 - 16 Outbound Application Databank Outbound EDI Databank Inbound EDI Databank Inbound Application Databank IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics Getting Started For example, if the value in this field is DDFN, your Sterling Gentran:Basic Databanking system has been configured as the following: • • • • Outbound Application Databank= Directory Outbound EDI Databank = Directory Inbound EDI Databank = Full Inbound Application Databank = None Dbk Config is retrieved from Record Type 2 of the Configuration file (EDICFG). 4. Type your assigned ID in the User ID field and press Tab to move the insertion point to the Password field. Note: If you do not remember your password, see your system administrator. 5. Type your password. Notice that the password that you are typing does not appear on the screen. Press Enter to display the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. Note: We recommend that you keep your password stored in a secure location to ensure that unauthorized users do not access the system. Changing Your Password For security purposes, you should change your password periodically. Perform the following steps to change your password. 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen, type your existing User ID and password. Then, press Tab instead of Enter to move the insertion point to the New Password field. Note: The minimum length for the new password is based on your installation configuration. 2. Because characters do not appear on the screen as you are typing, cautiously type a new password and press Enter. The screen displays a confirmation message: TO UPDATE PASSWORD PRESS ENTER OR F12 TO CANCEL 3. Press Enter to update the system with your new password. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 17 Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options The Sterling Gentran Main Menu (shown below) provides direct access to the primary functions of the Sterling Gentran:Basic product. Your ability to access a menu option depends on whether your logon ID has been granted access. If you are not authorized to use a feature, its corresponding menu option appears dimmed, and (N/A) displays to the right of the option. EDIM001 0.0_______ EDI/EDI GENTRAN MAIN MENU XXX XXXXXXXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. __ Enter PF1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Partner Maintenance Menu Standards Maintenance Menu Databank Maintenance Menu Administrative Maintenance Mapping Maintenance Menu 6. 7. 8. 9. Sterling Sterling Sterling Sterling Gentran:Plus Main Menu Gentran:Control Main Menu Gentran:Realtime Main Menu Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu (N/A) (N/A) (N/A) (N/A) PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff 1 - 18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options Getting Started The following list contains short descriptions of the options available from the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. Option Description Partner Maintenance Menu Enables you to easily enter or change information about each of your trading partners. Standards Maintenance Menu Enables you to view and maintain EDI Standards files. Databank Maintenance Menu Enables you to directly control and view application data and EDI data that is processed by Sterling Gentran:Basic. Administrative Maintenance Menu Enables you to directly control and view security, configuration, message handling, and global (system) settings. Mapping Maintenance Menu Enables you to translate your internal application formats for EDI standard formats for the documents you want to send (outbound mapping) and to translate the EDI standard format to application formats for documents that you receive (inbound mapping). Sterling Gentran:Plus Manages your communications data through automated inbound and outbound communications processes. Sterling Gentran:Control Enables you to integrate your applications and communications with Sterling Gentran:Basic functions in an event-driven EDI system. Sterling Gentran:Realtime Enables you to manage processing online in a real-time environment. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Enables you to monitor, control, and manage your EDI environment. Note: IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS®, IBM® Sterling Gentran:Control® for z/OS®, IBM® Sterling Gentran:Realtime® for z/OS®, and IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® are optional add-on products to Sterling Gentran:Basic. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 19 Partner Maintenance 1 - 20 Security Maintenance Standards Maintenance Databank Maintenance Message Maintenance Administrative Administrative Maintenance Maintenance Mapping Maintenance Configuration Maintenance Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Partner Conversion (optional) Global Parameter Maintenance Sterling Gentran:Realtime Sterling Gentran:Control Sterling Gentran:Plus Sterling Gentran Main Menu Upload Process Maintenance Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options The Sterling Gentran:Basic high-level navigation, as shown in Figure 1.3, is outlined on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. Figure 1.3 Sterling Gentran:Basic High-Level Navigation IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Menus After you have logged on to the system, the Sterling Gentran Main Menu is displayed. EDIM001 0.0_______ EDI/EDI GENTRAN MAIN MENU XXX XXXXXXXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. __ 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Partner Maintenance Menu Standards Maintenance Menu Databank Maintenance Menu Administrative Maintenance Mapping Maintenance Menu 6. 7. 8. 9. Sterling Sterling Sterling Sterling Enter PF1=Help Gentran:Plus Main Menu Gentran:Control Main Menu Gentran:Realtime Main Menu Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu (N/A) (N/A) (N/A) (N/A) PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff All Sterling Gentran:Basic menus have the same characteristics and operate in the same manner. The menu displays a list of numbered options. The option can be either another menu or a screen that enables you to perform a system task. To select an option, type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to choose and press Enter. Sterling Gentran:Basic Screens All Sterling Gentran:Basic screens include the following features: • • • • • • • • • Screen name Jump code Screen title User initials Date and time Screen fields Message line Function key(s) Online help IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 21 Getting Started Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options Some screens, called multi-record screens, also contain an action bar and an Action Code field (abbreviated to “the A field”). The following screen is an example of a multi-record screen; thus, it contains the action bar and the A field. Screen Name Jump Code Action Bar Screen Title Screen Fields Date and Time User Initials Add Delete Update Select EDIM553 5.1.3_____ APPLICATION RECORDS XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Application Data ID..: __________ Send or Receive..: _ Description..........: Start Rec Type.......: __________ Area....: _ Seq: ___ A Seq Rec Area Lp Max Rec Mn Wr Description HL User No Type ID Use Len Cd Fl Level Exit _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ _ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Action Code Field PF3=Exit PF4=Data Id Function Key PF5=Fields Message Line Screen Component Descriptions Screen Name This is the technical name for the screen. Each screen begins with the prefix EDIM, followed by a three-digit identifier. Jump Code The jump code is located in the upper left corner of each screen, to the right of the screen name. The jump code is displayed automatically for each new menu or screen that is displayed. You can press Home to move the insertion point to the Jump Code field, type the jump code of another screen you want to display, and then press Enter to jump to that screen. See “Jump Codes” later in this chapter for further information on how to use jump codes. Screen Title This is the textual identifier of the screen, centered at the top of each screen. 1 - 22 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options Getting Started User Initials This displays the user’s initials. Date and Time This shows the date and time the screen is displayed. Screen Fields These fields contain data specific to each screen. Some fields require you to enter information; others are display-only. Screen fields are located between the screen title and the message line. Message Line This line displays Sterling Gentran messages. These messages inform you that an error has occurred, verify that a function was performed, or supply you with additional information. The message line is located above the function keys. Function Keys Function keys include both standard commands that are common throughout the Sterling Gentran system, as well as commands that are specific to the current screen. The function key line varies from screen to screen; only the function keys that are valid for the current screen are displayed. You will see only function keys for commands that you are allowed to perform. This is maintained under the Security Maintenance Menu. Each valid program function key and the function it executes are displayed at the bottom of each screen. Where function keys are located on your keyboard depends on your keyboard model. In addition, some keyboards do not have dedicated function keys, and instead require you to press a combination of keys to perform a function key function. See your system administrator for information about your hardware configuration and function key usage. Action Bar The action bar is the top line of multi-record screens, such as directory screens. The action bar displays available actions that you can perform for the current screen. Single-record screens typically use PF keys to perform desired functions. Action Code Field The Action Code field (abbreviated to the A field) is the left-most column of each line item on multi-record screens. An action code is the first letter of any action listed in the action bar. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 23 Getting Started Using Action Codes Using Action Codes Use the following procedure to perform an action: 1. In the A field next to the item for which you want to perform an action, type the first letter of an action specified on the Action Bar. For example, type S for Select. 2. Press Enter or the appropriate PF key. You can perform more than one action at a time for file maintenance tasks, such as adding, updating, and deleting. To perform more than one action, type an action code in the A fields of each item for which you want to perform an action and press Enter. The system performs the actions that you have designated for the selected items, starting at the top of the screen and proceeding downward. File maintenance actions are recognized and performed before other actions. See the topic “Basic File Maintenance Procedures” for more information about file maintenance tasks. Actions codes, such as Select and Copy are single item actions. This means that you can perform the action for only one item at a time. Common Action Codes Action Code Description Add A Adds a new record. Update U Updates an existing record. Delete D Deletes the selected record. Select S Displays the selected record. Copy C Copies the selected record. Note: Action Code options can vary from screen to screen. 1 - 24 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Getting Help Getting Started Getting Help Sterling Gentran:Basic provides the ability to obtain specific information about whatever part of the program you are using at any particular moment. Sterling Gentran uses context-sensitive Help from within the program. The online help system is designed to allow you to access either specific information about a field or general information about the entire screen. This section defines how to use the online help feature in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Accessing Online Field-Level Help To access online help for a field, move the insertion point anywhere in the field. Press the PF1=Help key and a pop-up help window appears on top of the current screen so the field is still visible. When further information is available about a field, More displays in the lower right corner of the pop-up box. Press PF7=Bkwd or PF8=Fwd to scroll through the entire definition. When you have reached the top or the bottom of the help information, Top or Bottom displays respectively in the lower right corner of the pop-up box. To exit the pop-up box, press the PF12=Cancel key. Field-Level Help Select EDIM010 1.1_______ PARTNER DIRECTORY Starting Partner Id: ___________________________________ 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Definition Location U A Partner Qual Name A _ !!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1 *** NAME NOT ON FILE *** N _ !!!GENTRAN-RU1 !!!GENTRAN-RP1 *** NAME NOT ON FILE *** N _ ABLANK ACRAIG *** NAME NOT ON FILE *** N .............................................................................. : STARTING PARTNER ID: : : : : A 35-POSITION ALPHANUMERIC FIELD USED TO SPECIFY A PARTNER ID FROM WHICH : : VIEWING BEGINS. ENTER THE DESIRED PARTNER ID. YOU MAY KEY A PARTIAL : : PARTNER ID INTO THIS FIELD AND THE SYSTEM DISPLAYS UP TO 13 PARTNER IDS : : STARTING WITH THE CLOSEST PARTNER ID MATCH. : : : : NOTE: THIS DIRECTORY LISTS PARTNER IDS ONLY AS THEY ARE DISPLAYED : : More... : : : : F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel : :............................................................................: Function Keys in Help IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 25 Getting Started Getting Help Accessing Online Screen-Level Help To display online Help for the entire screen, move the insertion point anywhere outside a field and press PF1=Help. The Help provides an overview that describes the purpose of the screen. Screen-Level Help Select EDIM010 1.1_______ PARTNER DIRECTORY 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Starti ................................................................ : Help : : : A Pa : THE PARTNER DIRECTORY SCREEN DISPLAYS A LISTING OF ALL : _ !! : PARTNER IDS CURRENTLY ON FILE. THIS LISTING INCLUDES ONLY : _ !! : THE PARTNER ID'S THAT EXIST ON YOUR PARTNER CONTROL RECORDS. : _ AB : : _ AB : YOU CAN ONLY VIEW A LISTING OF THOSE TRADING PARTNERS THAT : _ AC : HAVE THE SAME SECURITY DIVISION AS DEFINED FOR YOUR LOGON OR : _ AP : THOSE DEFINED WITH DIVISION CODE OF SPACES. LOGON IDS : _ AP : DEFINED WITH A DIVISION OF '000' MAY VIEW ALL TRADING : _ AP : PARTNER RECORDS. : _ BE : : _ DA : Bottom : _ DA : : _ DA : F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel : _ DA :..............................................................: INVALID FUNCTION KEY PRESSED Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Maint PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Function Keys in Help 1 - 26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Function Keys Getting Started Function Keys The Sterling Gentran:Basic system has a number of standard function keys. The standard function key commands always use the same function key number and are displayed in the same relative screen position. However, not all standard function keys necessarily are displayed on all the screens; rather, only the function keys that are required for a particular screen are displayed on that screen. Standard function keys are defined below and are not defined in the subsequent subsystem chapters for each screen definition. Only function keys that are unique to a particular screen are defined for that screen. Function Key Function Description PF1 Help Displays field-level and/or screen-level help text. PF3 Exit Exits to the next higher level (the previous menu). No actions are performed, even if there is a value in the A field. PF7 Bwd Scrolls backward to data that occurred earlier in the current screen or record (for multi-line screens only). PF8 Fwd Scrolls forward to data that occurred later in the current screen or record (for multi-line screens only). PF9 Add Adds the item selected. PF10 Updt Updates the item selected. PF11 Del Deletes the item selected. The Sterling Gentran:Basic system prompts you to confirm the deletion by pressing PF11 again. PF12 Cancel Cancels the current function when the Sterling Gentran:Basic system prompts you for a confirmation (such as Delete). PF14 Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line to indicate when the information on this screen was created or last changed. PF15 Logoff Logs off the Sterling Gentran:Basic system and displays the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen. Logoff is available only on menus. See the “Function Key Descriptions” topics in the appropriate chapters of this guide for descriptions of the function keys that apply to each particular screen or menu. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 27 Getting Started Common Keyboard Conventions Common Keyboard Conventions Keyboard conventions that are common throughout Sterling Gentran:Basic are described below: Key Description Enter Instructs Sterling Gentran to process the current function selected. You must press Enter to initiate the processing of most commands in Sterling Gentran, with the exception of the PF5=Select command. When specified on a screen, use PF5 to process the desired function. Note: On your keyboard, the Enter key might be labeled Return or CR, or with an arrow pointing down and then to the left. Erase EOF Clears all data in the available screen field to the right of the insertion point (including the character the insertion point is currently on). Sometimes this key is labeled End on the keyboard. Backspace Moves the insertion point left and deletes data in enterable screen fields. Arrow keys Moves the insertion point right or left within the line but does not alter the contents of the line. Insert Sets the keyboard to the insert mode. In the insert mode, any characters entered are inserted at the insertion point position and all the characters to the right of the insertion point position shift to the right. Delete Deletes the character where the insertion point is currently positioned. To delete more than one character, select all the characters in the field and press Delete. The insertion point returns to the first position in the field. Home Moves the insertion point to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen. Each menu contains a selection field in which you type the number of a task selection as listed on the menu. After you type the task selection number and press Enter, the system displays the appropriate screen. 1 - 28 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Basic File Maintenance Procedures Getting Started Basic File Maintenance Procedures Online file maintenance procedures are the same for all Sterling Gentran:Basic features. File maintenance consists of these three tasks: • Add • Update • Delete The following sections describe these tasks in more detail. Add The Add command creates a record that did not previously exist. Type the data in the appropriate screen fields, and press PF9 to process the Add command. The system displays a message informing you that the record was added. If the system was unable to add a record, or if there are missing required field data or errors, a warning is displayed. If you exit the screen before you press PF9 to add the record, the data you entered on the screen is not saved. Update When you change an existing record, update the record to apply the changes. The system displays a message telling you that the record has been updated, or a warning if there were any errors. If you exit the screen before you press PF10 for Update, the information you entered on the screen is not saved. To update the file, press PF10 before you exit the screen. Delete When you want to delete an existing record from the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, use the Delete command. You cannot recover a deleted record. See your system administrator for more information on data recovery. To delete a file or record, first display the correct record and then press PF11 to delete the file or record. The system displays a message requesting you to verify that the item you selected is the item you want to delete by pressing PF11 again. The system displays a message telling you that the record has been deleted. If you decide not to delete the record, press PF12 for Cancel key. The cancel feature does not work if you have already confirmed the deletion. Note: The Databanking feature uses the term delete in a slightly different manner from the file maintenance delete. In the online Databank Maintenance, you mark a record for deletion but it is not physically removed from the file until the batch Databank Maintenance is run against the databank file. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 29 Getting Started Jump Codes Jump Codes A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible via a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump code values associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not have jump code values associated with them. How to Jump Between Screens You can jump between screens without having to navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: 1. Press Home. The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the right of the screen name. 2. Type the jump code and press Enter. See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens. Following are some terms and definitions used in this discussion: 1 - 30 Term Meaning Subsystem A set of functionally-related screens that are directly accessible from the Sterling Gentran Main Menu (Partner Maintenance, Standards Maintenance, Databank Maintenance, Administrative Maintenance, Mapping Maintenance) Navigation The movement from screen to screen by entering data then pressing function keys (such as PF1, PF2) or by selecting options on menus and pressing Enter Position The location within a subsystem file (or group of files) that displays the data (either one record or multiple records) on the screen IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Jump Codes Getting Started Types of Jump Codes There are three types of jump codes, which are listed below. These types of jump codes are described more fully in the paragraphs that follow. • Numeric • Alphabetic • Special character Numeric Jump Codes Numeric jump codes consist of numbers separated by periods (.). The numbers in the jump code correspond to the numbers selected on menus, in the order in which they are selected. Example To display the Application Data ID screen, you could navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus by performing the following steps: 1. Type 5 on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu and press Enter. 2. Type 1 on the Mapping Maintenance Menu and press Enter. 3. Type 2 on the Application Definition Menu and press Enter. ... OR you could jump directly to the Application Data ID screen by performing these steps: 1. Press Home. 2. Type 5.1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens. Alphabetic Jump Codes Alphabetic jump codes consist of alphabetic characters separated by periods (.). The alphabetic code is an abbreviated reference to the screen name or function. For example, to display the Application Data ID screen using the alphabetic jump code, type APP.DEF or APP.ID in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens. Special Character Jump Codes Special character jump codes enable you to perform standard or generic functions with jump codes. The two special character jump codes are SWAP and EXIT. • SWAP enables you to jump between Sterling Gentran:Basic online subsystems (not within subsystems). When you use jump code SWAP, you jump to the last screen you jumped from (but not navigated from), from another subsystem. When you jump from a different subsystem, you reset the SWAP positioning to the screen you are jumping from. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 31 Getting Started Jump Codes Example Let’s say you have the Group Information screen in the Partner subsystem displayed, and then you display the Transaction Information screen (also in the Partner subsystem). From here, you jump to the Name and Address screen (again, in the Partner subsystem). Next, you jump to the Transaction screen in the Standards subsystem. After you view the information on the Transaction screen, you type SWAP in the Jump Code field to return to your previous location in the Partner subsystem. As you expect, SWAP returns you to the Name and Address screen in the Partner subsystem, because this is the screen from which you jumped to the Standards subsystem. • EXIT (or X) enables you to jump to the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logoff screen. This feature provides a quick and easy way to exit the Sterling Gentran:Basic system from any screen. User-defined Jump Code Table The User-Defined Jump Code table is a user customization facility that enables you to define your own jump code values. This facility requires a table that consists of the 10-character user code and the 10-character Sterling Gentran:Basic jump code. It must be coded in an Assembler table and the name of the table must be entered on the Configuration file (Record Type 0). An entry for the table name must be added to your CICS resource definitions. When you type a jump code, the system verifies that the jump code you entered is valid by first checking the User-Defined Jump Code table. If you have not defined a User-Defined Jump Code table, or if the jump code you entered is not in that table, then the system checks the default jump code table. For help using the User-Defined Jump Code Table, see member EDIJUMP in the GENTRAN.V6X6.UTILITY SOURCE LIBRARY. Jump Code Guidelines The Sterling Gentran:Basic system keeps independent position information for each subsystem (Partner, Standards, Databank, Administrative, Mapping), as well as for Sterling Gentran:Basic add-on products (Plus, Control, Realtime, Viewpoint). The independence of these subsystems enables you to jump or navigate from subsystem to subsystem without having to re-enter a key for that screen. The general rules for using jump codes are the following: 1 - 32 • You can jump to only screens that are directly accessible through selecting menu options. • You can jump from any screen. • Navigating or jumping to the Sterling Gentran:Basic Copyright/Signon screen, or exiting the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, clears the positions for all subsystems. • After you jump from one subsystem to another subsystem, you can return directly to the screen you jumped from by typing SWAP in the Jump Code field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Jump Codes Getting Started • You cannot use SWAP to jump between screens within the same subsystem. • Typing SWAP is the only method by which you can jump to a screen that has no jump code associated with it, as long as SWAP positioning has been established by jumping from one subsystem screen to a different subsystem screen. • An invalid jump code causes the system to return to the jumped from screen and display the message Invalid jump code entered. • You cannot jump to subsystems that are not installed or for which you do not have security access. The message Invalid jump — user lacks authority is displayed on the screen. How To Get Help The IBM® Sterling Customer Center provides a wealth of online resources that are available around the clock to enrich your business experience with IBM® Sterling Gentran®. By using Sterling Customer Center, you gain access to many self-support tools, including a KnowledgeBase, Documentation, Education, and Case Management. Access Sterling Customer Center at http://customer.sterlingcommerce.com. Once logged in, select Support Center from the top navigation menu, and then locate Sterling Gentran product-specific support information from the left navigation menu. Additionally, our Customer Support Reference Guide outlines our support hours, contact information, and key information that will enhance your support experience with us. For detailed information about Customer Support, please refer to the Customer Support Reference Guide accessible from the login page. (http://customer.sterlingcommerce.com) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 1 - 33 Getting Started 1 - 34 Jump Codes IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 2 The Partner Subsystem Overview This chapter contains the following topics related to the Partner subsystem. Topic Page Before You Begin .................................................................................................................. 2-3 Partner Maintenance Menu.............................................................EDIM005 .................... 2-10 Partner Directory ............................................................................EDIM010 .................... 2-10 Partner Selection Menu ..................................................................EDIM007 .................... 2-17 Header Information Screen ............................................................EDIM026 .................... 2-22 Interchange Directory Screen .........................................................EDIM027 .................... 2-27 Control Information Screen 1 .........................................................EDIM015 .................... 2-31 Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options.................................EDIM016 .................... 2-37 Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options .................................EDIM018 .................... 2-43 Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options.....................EDIM017 .................... 2-48 Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options...............................EDIM012 .................... 2-52 Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options...............................EDIM019 .................... 2-57 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 ................................................................EDIM021 .................... 2-62 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 ................................................................EDIM022 .................... 2-67 Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options................................EDIM013 .................... 2-71 Control Information Screen 2—STX Options................................EDIM014 .................... 2-76 Group Directory..............................................................................EDIM020 .................... 2-81 Group Information Screen ..............................................................EDIM030 .................... 2-86 Group Information Screen—BAT Options ....................................EDIM031 .................... 2-93 Group Information Screen—UNG Options ...................................EDIM032 .................... 2-98 Group Information Screen—GS Options ......................................EDIM033 .................. 2-103 Transaction Directory .....................................................................EDIM025 .................. 2-108 Transaction Information Screen .....................................................EDIM040 .................. 2-113 Transaction Information Screen—ST Options ..............................EDIM043 .................. 2-120 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-1 The Partner Subsystem Overview Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 ..............................................................................................EDIM042 .................. 2-124 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2...............................................................................................EDIM046 .................. 2-128 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3...............................................................................................EDIM047 .................. 2-132 Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options .........................EDIM041 .................. 2-136 Name and Address Screen..............................................................EDIM035 .................. 2-140 Name and Address Part 2 Screen ...................................................EDIM036 .................. 2-144 User Defined Screen ......................................................................EDIM045 .................. 2-148 Data Separation Screen...................................................................EDIM050 .................. 2-152 Error Rejection Screen....................................................................EDIM055 .................. 2-158 Copy All Records Screen ...............................................................EDIM060 .................. 2-162 Partner Cross Reference Menu .......................................................EDIM009 .................. 2-166 Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen................................EDIM008 .................. 2-168 Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen ..............................EDIM006 .................. 2-172 Trading Partner Relationship Menu................................................EDIM009 .................. 2-175 Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen ...........................EDIM023 .................. 2-177 Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen............................EDIM024 .................. 2-182 2-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Partner Subsystem Before You Begin What is a Partner Profile? To successfully facilitate electronic commerce, Sterling Gentran requires specific information about each trading partner. Whether intra-company or inter-company in nature, all trading partner relationships are defined and maintained in Sterling Gentran, on the Partner Maintenance subsystem. You can choose from two processing methodologies when defining the partner profile: Partner/ Qualifier mode and Relationship mode. The Partner/Qualifier method defines your organization and each trading partner as separate and distinct entities on the partner profile. This method permits each trading partner to be used in multiple relationships. With the Relationship method, you first identify the inter- or intra- business relationships. Then, you define each identified relationship separately and distinctly on the partner profile. This method is ideal for defining multiple entities within your organization with shared (common) trading partners. In addition, the Relationship method provides uniqueness for identification purposes that would not be possible if the trading partner were defined using the Partner/Qualifier method. Both processing modes can be selected and maintained through the Configuration subsystem. The Partner/Qualifier mode creates a loosely coupled relationship between trading partners. One Partner ID and Qualifier is defined for each trading partner and for each entity within an organization involved with e-commerce. With the Partner/Qualifier method, relationships are defined externally to the partner profile during processing. The Relationship mode creates a closely coupled relationship between trading partners. Each relationship is uniquely defined on the partner profile in a user/partner format where the User side always represents your organization and the Partner side always represents your trading partner. To bridge the transition from EDI Sender ID, EDI Sender ID Qualifier, EDI Receiver ID, and EDI Receiver ID Qualifier found on your EDI documents to a user/partner key on the partner profile, Sterling Gentran uses a partner Relationship file. This file is built and maintained online through CICS. Note: For the existing Sterling Gentran user who used Relationship mode in Release 6.0 and who does not want to expand that usage to the partner profile, a Mixed mode is available in Release 6.6. In Mixed mode, the partner profile is configured in Partner/Qualifier mode, and the databank is set up in Relationship mode. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-3 The Partner Subsystem Before You Begin What is in this Chapter? This chapter explains the menus and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic partner profile, which is accessed through the Partner subsystem. In addition, this chapter describes how to perform the following functions: • Add a new trading partner using either Partner/Qualifier or Relationship mode • Copy and rename an existing trading partner • Add name, address, and contact information for a trading partner • Set up error rejection criteria by trading partner • Set up data separation by trading partner • Add notes or special instructions to a user defined record by trading partner • Define an alias Partner ID and Qualifiers through a partner cross-reference file • Define user/partner relationships for a trading partner • Define and maintain multiple interchange, group, and transaction sets under a common trading partner • Maintain interchange header, functional groups, and transaction set information for inbound and outbound processing by trading partner How to Access the Partner Subsystem The screen flow is determined by the partner processing mode, Partner/Qualifier or Relationship mode, selected from Configuration Maintenance. Note: In the Configuration Maintenance, the On-Line Options – Record Type 0 (Panel 2 of 3) screen enables you to define the partner processing mode for the trading partner profile. See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for more information about Configuration Maintenance. You can display all the screens in the Partner subsystem from the Partner Maintenance Menu. Perform either of these two actions to display the Partner Maintenance Menu: 2-4 • From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 1 to select the Partner Maintenance Menu subsystem. • Type 1.0 in the Jump Code field on any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Partner Subsystem Each menu contains a selection field allowing you to type the number of a task selection as listed on the menu. After typing the task number and pressing Enter, Sterling Gentran displays the appropriate screen. When you make a menu selection, the system displays screens that prompt you through the processes available in the Partner Profile Maintenance feature. There are 39 screens available in the Partner Profile Maintenance feature. Some screens allow you to perform a subtask and are only accessible from another screen (e.g., Control Information screens). Subtask screens are not listed on the menus. When performing partner profile maintenance, consider the following: 1. There are eight record types that comprise a single trading partner definition on the partner profile. All screens point to one or more of these records. The order of the record key is defined by you and consists of the Partner ID and Qualifier (Partner/Qualifier mode) or user/partner (Relationship) mode. Adding or selecting a particular trading partner can only be accomplished through the Partner Selection Menu screen. The record key entered on this screen is used to read (or write) all other record types that make up a trading partner on the partner profile. 2. For any hexadecimal conversion fields (e.g., element separators), the system evaluates the single position alphanumeric field first, then the two position hexadecimal field. Therefore, any time data is entered in both fields, the system overlays the value entered in the hexadecimal field with the hexadecimal value of the first alphanumeric field. 3. Users with Level 1 security have unrestricted file maintenance rights. If you have Level 2 security, you may be allowed to perform additions, updates, and deletions to the trading partner profile records. The system displays the PF9=Add, PF10=Updt, and PF11=Del function keys. If you have Level 3 security, you are not able to add, update, or delete trading partner profile records, and the function keys are not displayed. When adding a new record, the default value is Y for the Update Flag. 4. You can view and maintain records only for those trading partners having the same division code as your own. The system displays all trading partners when the division code equals 000. Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record, and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for more information on Division access. Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 illustrate how to navigate through the Partner subsystem for the Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. The labeled boxes represent screens in the subsystem. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-5 The Partner Subsystem Before You Begin Partner/Qualifier Mode Partner Maintenance Menu Partner Cross Reference Partner Directory Partner Selection Menu Partner Cross Ref by X–Ref ID Header Partner Cross Ref by Partner ID Control Group Transaction Name User Data Error Copy All Directory Directory Directory and Address Defined Separation Rejection Records Control Group Transaction Information Information Information Figure 2.1 Partner Subsystem Screen Flow 2-6 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode Partner Maintenance Menu Partner Trading Relationship Menu Partner Directory Partner Selection Menu Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID Header Trading Partner Relationship by User/Part ID Control Group Transaction User Data Error Copy All Directory Directory Directory Defined Separation Rejection Records Control Group Transaction Information Information Information Name and Address (User) Name and Address (Part) Figure 2.2 Relationship Screen Flow Note: The screen flow is determined by the partner profile processing mode selected on the Configuration file to define a trading partner, Partner/Qualifier or Relationship (user/partner). Partner Jump Codes A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another, within a subsystem, while bypassing menu screens. All screens that are accessible through a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-7 The Partner Subsystem Before You Begin You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: Step 1: Press Home. The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the right of the screen number. Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter. Note: If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab to return to the next entry field on the screen. The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Partner subsystem menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Screen Title Sterling Gentran Main Menu Partner Maintenance Menu Screen Number EDIM001 EDIM005 Numeric 0.0 Jump Codes Alphabetic BSC 0 MAIN 1.0 PART 1 Partner Directory EDIM010 1.1 PART.DIR Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 1.2 PART.MENU Header Information EDIM026 1.2.1 PART.HDR Interchange Directory EDIM027 1.2.2 PART.INTD Control Information EDIM015 1.2.2.1 PART.CNTL PART.CTL Group Directory EDIM020 1.2.3 PART.GRPD Group Information EDIM030 1.2.3.1 PART.GRP EDIM033 Transaction Directory EDIM025 1.2.4 PART.TRND Transaction Information EDIM040 1.2.4.1 PART.TRN EDIM043 Name and Address EDIM035 1.2.5 PART.NAME User Defined EDIM045 1.2.6 PART.USER Data Separation EDIM050 1.2.7 PART.DSEP PART.SEP Error Rejection EDIM055 1.2.8 PART.ERR Copy All Records EDIM060 1.2.9 PART.CPY PART.COPY 2-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Partner Subsystem Screen Number Screen Title Numeric Jump Codes Alphabetic Partner/Qualifier Mode Partner Cross-Reference Menu EDIM009 1.3 PART.XREF Partner Cross Reference by X-Ref ID EDIM008 1.3.1 PART.XREFX Partner Cross Reference by Partner ID EDIM006 1.3.2 PART.XREFP Relationship (User/Partner) Mode Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009 1.3 PART.REL Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID EDIM023 1.3.1 PART.RELE Trading Partner Relationship by User/Partner EDIM024 1.3.2 PART.RELP Note: You can jump to the Partner screens at the 1.2.# level only if the partner position has already been established (e.g., a Partner ID has already been selected and is present in the Position work area). In instances in which multiple screens comprise a logical operation, only the first screen is assigned a jump code. To display subsequent screens in this scenario, jump to the first screen, and then press PF5 to display the next screen. See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2-9 The Partner Subsystem Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005 Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005 Purpose The Partner Maintenance Menu contains three menu options for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes that you can use to perform partner profile maintenance. The three maintenance screens allow you to display, add, and maintain Partner profiles. How to Access Access the Partner Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways: • From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 1 to select the Partner Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Examples The following examples illustrate the Partner Maintenance Menu for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM005 1.0_______ PARTNER MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Partner Directory 2. Partner Maintenance 3. Partner Cross-Reference Menu Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff 2 - 10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM005 1.0_______ PARTNER MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Partner Directory 2. Partner Maintenance 3. Trading Partner Relationship Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff Menu Options The following table describes the three menu options on the Partner Maintenance Menu for both, Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Menu Options Description 1. Partner Directory Lists all currently defined partner control records. 2. Partner Maintenance Enables you to add, display, and maintain trading partner record definitions for each of your trading partners. 3. Partner Cross-Reference Menu Enables you to perform a search by Cross Reference ID or Partner ID to display and maintain a particular trading partner crossreference. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 11 The Partner Subsystem Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005 Relationship (User/Partner) Mode Menu Option Description 1. Partner Directory Lists all currently defined partner control records. 2. Partner Maintenance Enables you to add, display, and maintain trading partner record definitions for each of your trading partners. 3. Trading Partner Relationship Enables you to perform a search by EDI ID or User/Partner ID to display and maintain a particular trading partner relationship. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code automatically is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home; type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press Enter to perform the selected function. 2 - 12 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Directory EDIM010 The Partner Subsystem Partner Directory EDIM010 Purpose The Partner Directory displays a list of all Partner IDs currently on file. This list includes only the Partner IDs that exist on your trading partner header records. You can only view a list of those trading partners that have the same security division as defined for your logon or those defined with a division code of spaces. Logon IDs defined with a division of ‘000’ may view all trading partner records. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for more information on division access. How to Access Access the Partner Directory in either of the following ways: • Type 1 to select the Partner Directory option from the Partner Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Partner Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM010 1.1_______ PARTNER DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Starting Partner Id: ___________________________________ U A Partner Qual Name A _ !!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1 GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER Y _ BG-PARTNER EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER Y _ ICS-PARTNER EXAMPLE OF AN ICS PARTNER Y _ ISA-PARTNER EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Y _ STX-PARTNER EXAMPLE OF AN STX PARTNER Y _ UNA-PARTNER EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER Y _ VENDOR-1 TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Y _ VENDOR-2 TUTORIAL - BULK PAPER COMPANY Y _ VENDOR-3 TUTORIAL - TWO WAY COMMUNICATIONS Y _ VENDOR-4 TUTORIAL - RANDOM OFFICE SUPPLY Y _ VENDOR-5 TUTORIAL - OVERSEAS MINING COMPAN Y _ VENDOR-6 TUTORIAL - SOFTWARE HOUSE PLC Y _ END OF PARTNERS Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Maint PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 13 The Partner Subsystem Partner Directory EDIM010 Relationship Mode Select EDIM010 1.1_______ PARTNER DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Starting User .....: ___________________________________ Partner ..: _______________ A User Partner User Name Partner Name _ YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 YOUR COMPANY NAME VENDOR-1 NAME _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE PARTNER AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE KEY Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Maint PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd U A Y Screen Actions In the Partner Directory, Sterling Gentran displays a list of all Partner IDs on file. Note: You can advance to the trading partner you want to access by using the Starting Partner Id field for Partner/ Qualifier mode, or the Starting User and Starting Partner fields for Relationship mode. See the following “Field Descriptions” sub-topic for more information. The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Partner Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action... Retrieve the Partner Selection Menu screen for a trading partner selected on the Partner Directory 2 - 14 Associated with this Do this... screen action... Select To select a Partner ID to view or maintain, type S in the A field next to the Partner ID you want to view on the Partner Directory. Then, press PF5. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Directory EDIM010 The Partner Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Maint Displays the Partner Selection Menu with the Partner ID you have selected. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Starting A 35-position alphanumeric field Partner Id used to specify a Partner ID from which viewing begins. Type the Partner ID you want to access. If you type a partial Partner ID in this field, the system displays up to 13 Partner IDs starting with the nearest Partner ID match. Field Starting User IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Relationship Mode Description A 15-position alphanumeric field used to specify the User portion of a User/ Partner ID from which viewing begins. Type the desired User ID. You can type a partial User ID in this field and the system displays up to 13 User/ Partner IDs starting with the nearest User ID match. 2 - 15 The Partner Subsystem Partner Directory EDIM010 Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Partner Displays the Partner ID. (protected) Field Starting Partner Relationship Mode Description A 15-position alphanumeric field used to specify the Partner portion of a User/Partner ID from which viewing begins. Type the desired Partner ID. You can type a partial Partner ID in this field and the system displays up to 13 User/Partner IDs starting with the closest User/Partner ID match. Note: This directory lists Partner IDs only as they are displayed on their header records. Also, remember that you can only view a listing of those Partner IDs having the same security division as defined for your logon. Division 000 displays ALL Partner IDs. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the trading partner, if applicable. User (protected) Displays the User portion of the User/ Partner Profile ID. Name (protected) Displays the trading partner name describing the Partner ID, if it exists on file. Partner (protected) Displays the Partner portion of the User/Partner Profile ID. User Name (protected) Displays the trading partner name defining the User ID, if it exists on file. Partner Name (protected) Displays the trading partner name describing the Partner ID, if it exists on file. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) and press PF5 to display the Partner Selection Menu. UA (Update Allowed) (protected) Displays the current value for the Update Allowed flag that controls whether this trading partner may be updated. Valid values are: 2 - 16 N = No, user cannot make updates to the current parameters. The value N is set for a user maintaining Level 1 Security (typically a system administrator) to lock the established parameters set for Partner IDs that are currently in production. Y = Yes, allow a user with Level 2 or Level 1 Security to change the parameters for the specified trading partner. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 The Partner Subsystem Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 Purpose The Partner Selection Menu displays a list of menu selections from which to choose to view, add, or maintain Partner Profile IDs. From the Partner Selection Menu, you can select a record type to display information for an existing Partner Profile ID by typing the selection number of the record type in the selection field. Information for each of the eight record types listed on the Partner Selection Menu is entered on a separate screen. The Control Information, Group, and Transaction records have multiple screens. This section discusses each partner maintenance screen and the Copy All feature. How to Access Access the Partner Selection Menu in either of the following ways: • Type 2 to select Partner Maintenance from the Partner Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Examples The following examples illustrate the Partner Selection Menu for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM007 1.2_______ Part ID: Copy ID: PARTNER SELECTION MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual: _______________ ___________________________________ Qual: _______________ Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Header Information 2. Interchange Directory 3. Group Directory 4. Transaction Directory 5. Name and Address 6. User Defined 7. Data Separation 8. Error Rejection 9. Copy All Records Job Name: _______ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Rpt PF3=Exit PF4=Dir IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 17 The Partner Subsystem Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 Relationship Mode EDIM007 1.2_______ User: Copy User: PARTNER SELECTION MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY YOUR_COMPANY_______________________ Partner: VENDOR-1_______ ___________________________________ Partner: _______________ Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Header Information 2. Interchange Directory 3. Group Directory 4. Transaction Directory 5. Name and Address 6. User Defined 7. Data Separation 8. Error Rejection 9. Copy All Records Job Name: _______ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Rpt PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=Ref Menu Options There are nine selections on the Partner Selection Menu. There are eight partner maintenance record options and one menu function available (i.e., Copy All Records feature). Note: The Partner Selection Menu provides the same menu options for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. The following table provides the eight options and their descriptions. 2 - 18 Menu Option Description 1. Header Information Enables you to add, change, or delete partner profile information 2. Interchange Directory Enables you to add, change, or delete interchange control records for partner profile information 3. Group Directory Enables you to add or maintain separate processing rules for various groups 4. Transaction Directory Enables you to add or maintain separate processing rules for various transactions 5. Name and Address Enables you to add or maintain each trading partner's name, address, and telephone number IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 (Continued) Menu Option The Partner Subsystem Description 6. User Defined Enables you to maintain additional reference information that you want to define for any trading partner 7. Data Separation Enables you to establish inbound split files based upon group or transaction type or outbound split files based upon trading partner 8. Error Rejection Enables you to designate those errors that you decide are not acceptable, allowing you to reject the data at the partner (interchange), group, or transaction level 9. Copy All Records Enables you to duplicate all of an existing trading partner's records using one step to create a new partner record Menu Functions Copy All Feature Sterling Gentran:Basic helps prevent you from duplicating and overwriting user records that may already exist. The Copy All Records feature provides you with the ability to efficiently copy records from an existing trading partner to a newly added trading partner. From the Partner Selection Menu, you can add a new Partner Profile ID and copy to it all of the records from an existing Partner Profile ID. See the topic “Copy All Records Screen” for more information about the Copy All feature. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To display a record type for an existing Partner Profile ID, or to begin to create a record type for a new Partner ID, type the Partner ID and associated Qualifier code for Partner/Qualifier mode or User and Partner for Relationship mode. Use the Tab key to move the insertion point to the selection field, type the selection number of the desired record type and press Enter. The system then displays the selected record type entry screen. PF4=Dir Returns to the Partner Directory where you can view a listing of Partner Profile IDs. If a complete or partial Partner ID exists in the Partner ID field, the system displays the directory starting with the selected Partner ID (or nearest match) at the top. PF7=Rpt Allows you to submit the batch Partner Print report for the Profile ID displayed at the top of the screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 19 The Partner Subsystem Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9) and press Enter to access to the selected menu. Job Name An 8-position alphanumeric field used to designate a user-specified jobname when printing a report using the PF7 key. Valid values are any valid jobname. To select reports for printing, type the user-specified jobname in the Job Name field and press PF7. If you do not type a value in the Job Name field, the system uses a default value, which is user-specified during installation customization of the JCL (EDIRJCL) file. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description (Partner A 35-position Name alphanumeric field used protected) to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to help to further identify the Partner ID. Part ID 2 - 20 A 35-position alphabetic field used to select a Partner ID for which you are displaying, creating, modifying, or deleting records. Field (User – protected) (Partner – protected) Relationship Mode Description Displays up to a 15-position User ID, if it exists on file for Relationship mode. Displays up to a 15-position alphabetic Partner ID, if it exists on file for Relationship mode. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Selection Menu EDIM007 Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Copy ID Qual A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID of an existing trading partner from which you are copying all records. This field (on this screen) is used only with the COPY ALL feature. The COPY ALL feature is discussed in detail under the Menu Functions header above. The Partner Subsystem Field User/ Partner (required) Copy User/ Partner Relationship Mode Description Two 15-position alphanumeric fields used to select a User ID and Partner ID for the Relationship for which want to display, create, modify, or delete records. Two 15-position alphanumeric fields used to enter the User/ Partner ID of an existing trading relationship from which you are copying all records. The Copy User/Partner ID field is used only with the Copy All feature. See the topics “Menu Functions” and “Menu Options” previously in this section for more information about the COPY ALL feature. A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier Code (if applicable) associated with the Partner ID entered in the Copy From ID field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 21 The Partner Subsystem Header Information Screen EDIM026 Header Information Screen EDIM026 Purpose The Header Information screen enables you to display, update, add, or delete information about a trading partner. This information is required for all other partner profile maintenance procedures and screens. The Header Information screen is the first record that you will need to create to add a new trading partner. Caution: When you delete the header record for a trading partner, all other records for this trading partner are deleted as well. How to Access Access the Header Information screen in either of the following ways: • Type 1 to select Header Information from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this functions only if the Partner ID has been established). At installation, Sterling Gentran:Basic automatically sets up a default Partner ID. The default Partner ID contains default Group and Transaction records that are required for each trading partner. Each time you add a new Partner ID and Control record, the system automatically uses the default Group and Transaction record templates to create default Group and Transaction records for the new trading partner. You have the capability to modify the values in the generic default records to create your own default records. After modification, Sterling Gentran will then use the values specified in your default records. Partner/Qualifier Mode The default Partner ID containing the default Group and Transaction records is: !!! GENTRAN–RESERVED–PARTNER–ID–1 Relationship Mode Following is the default Partner Profile ID containing the default Group and Transaction records: !!! GENTRAN–RU1 !!! GENTRAN–RP1 The default Partner ID can be viewed and modified from the Partner Selection Menu like any other ID (and associated records). See the topic “Partner Selection Menu” for information on how to display and change the records for a specified Partner ID. 2 - 22 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Header Information Screen EDIM026 The Partner Subsystem Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Header Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM026 1.2.1_____ HEADER INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISA-PARTNER XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Description: EXAMPLE_OF_AN_ISA_PARTNER_______________ ________________________________________ Underscore Character : Division . . . . . . : Update Allowed . . . : _ 000 Y Last Update Date . . : 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=IDir PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del (Y/N) Time . . : 00:00:00 User . . : SCI Relationship Mode EDIM026 1.2.1_____ HEADER INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1 NAME Partner: VENDOR-1 Description: GENTRAN_TEST_PARTNER____________________ ________________________________________ Underscore Character : Division . . . . . . : Update Allowed . . . : _ 000 Y Last Update Date . . : 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=IDir PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del (Y/N) Time . . : IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 00:00:00 User . . : SCI 2 - 23 The Partner Subsystem Header Information Screen EDIM026 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=IDir Displays the Interchange Directory. PF9=Add Adds a header record for a new Partner ID being added to the partner profile. Note: When you add a new header record, the system automatically adds default Group and Transaction records, based on the !!!GENTRAN–RESERVED–PARTNER– ID–1 (Partner/ Qualifier mode) OR !!!GENTRAN-RU1/!!!GENTRAN-RP1 (Relationship mode) PF10=Updt Updates the header record for an existing Partner ID. PF11=Del Deletes a header record AND SUBSEQUENTLY ALL OTHER RECORDS for an existing Partner ID. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 2 - 24 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Header Information Screen EDIM026 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) Displays up to a 35-position alphanumeric user name, if it exists on file for the User/ Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) Displays up to a 35-position alphanumeric partner name, if it exists on the file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Displays two 15-position alphabetic fields that contain the User/Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Description A 120-position alphanumeric field that can be used to further describe this partner profile, if you are processing in Partner/Qualifier mode. This field also describes the user/partner relationship if you are processing in Relationship mode. Underscore Character A 1-position alphabetic field that contains the underscore substitution character that will be used in place of the actual underscore ( _ ) on the screen display of selected fields for this partner. Valid values are: ~, ! , @ , #, $, %, ¬, &, *, ( , ) , - , = , +, { , } , : , ; , < , > , / , ? , | , \ , and space. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Division (protected, except Division 000) A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the partner profile is added. The default value is 000. Although this field is called Division, it is used for grouping partners under a common access. That is, access to a trading partner is tied to the Division code on your Security Profile. Before changing the Division code from 000, consider how users are organized in respect to adding and updating the partner profile. For most companies, leaving the Division code as 000 and preventing unauthorized changes through the Security Profile by access and level is sufficient. Any record that contains a Division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 25 The Partner Subsystem Header Information Screen EDIM026 Update Allowed (May be protected for users with Level 2 or 3 Security) Displays the current value for the Update Allowed flag that controls whether this trading partner may be updated. Valid values are: N = No, user cannot make updates to the current parameters. The value N is set for a user maintaining Level 1 Security (typically a system administrator) to lock the established parameters set for Partner IDs that are currently in production. Y = Yes, allow a user with Level 2 or Level 1 Security to change the parameters for the specified trading partner. Note:Remember, ONLY a user with Level 1 security can change the Update Allowed field. Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position field that displays the date on which this Trading Partner Header was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Last Update Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which this Trading Partner Header was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Last Update User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed this Trading Partner Header. 2 - 26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027 The Partner Subsystem Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027 Purpose The Interchange Directory displays a list of all interchange control records currently on file for this Partner Profile ID. How to Access Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 2 to select Interchange Directory from the Partner Selection Menu. • Type 1.2.2 in the Jump Code field (this functions only if the Partner Profile ID has already been established). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM027 1.2.2_____ INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER Part ID: !!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1 MULTIPLE HEADER A ENV ID OPTION VERSION _ ISA ISA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Hdr PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: PF5=Ctrl 2 - 27 The Partner Subsystem Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027 Relationship Mode Select EDIM027 1.2.2_____ User: INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 MULTIPLE HEADER A ENV ID OPTION VERSION _ ISA ISA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Hdr PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF5=Ctrl Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action... View the Control screen for the header option selected on the Interchange Directory Associated with this Do this... screen action... Select To select a header option to view or maintain, type S in the A field, next to the header option you want to view, on the Interchange Directory. Then, press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 2 - 28 PF4=Hdr Displays the Header Information screen. PF5=Ctrl Displays the Control Information screen with the header option you have selected. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027 The Partner Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) A 35-position alphabetic field used to select a Partner ID for which you are displaying, creating, modifying, or deleting records. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Qual (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. User/Partner protected Two 15-position alphabetic fields that are used to select a Partner Relationship for which you are displaying, creating, modifying, or deleting records. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to a Partner ID, and then press PF5 to display the Partner Selection Menu. Multiple Env ID (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for the interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 29 The Partner Subsystem Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027 uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Header Option (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field identifying the type of interchange envelope. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, and STX. Example: ISA = the segment ID for the interchange envelope header segment; GS = the segment ID for group envelope header segment when an interchange envelope is not used. Version (protected) A 12-position field that displays the version associated with this header option, if it exists. 2 - 30 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 Purpose The Control Information – screen 1 enables you to specify control information, required for all other file maintenance procedures and screens, for a trading partner. You can display, update, add, or delete control information. After you add this record, Sterling Gentran creates default group and transaction records. Note: You can modify default group and transaction records with customized data or you can use the system default values. How to Access Access the Control Information screen (screen 1) in either of these two ways: • From the Interchange Directory, select the header option and press PF5. • Type 1.2.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this functions only if the Partner ID has been established). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 1) for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM015 1.2.2.1___ CONTROL INFORMATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER Part ID:!!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1 Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: ___ Version: ____________ Interchange Header Option....: ___ (ISA ICS BG GS UNA UNB SCH STX) Last Incoming Sequence Number: ______________ EDI Databank Inbound.........: _ (D/N) Outbound.........: _ (F/D/N) Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI....: _ (Y/N) Network Tracking.: _ (Y/N) Acknowledge Interchange......: _ (Y/N/E) Errors...........: _ (Y/N) Last Incoming BG Password....: Remote ID..(For PLUS)........: Network ID.(For PLUS)........: Viewpoint - Exception........: Reconciliation Delay (days)..: Enter PF1=Help __________ Syntax Version...: ________ _______________ _ (Y/N) Tracking.........: ___ _ _ (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=IDir PF5=Control PF6=Next Ctl PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 31 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 Relationship Mode EDIM015 1.2.2.1___ CONTROL INFORMATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Multiple Envelope Id: ___ Version: ____________ Interchange Header Option....: ISA (ISA ICS BG GS UNA UNB SCH STX) Last Incoming Sequence Number: ______________ EDI Databank Inbound.........: D (D/N) Outbound.........: F (F/D/N) Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI....: N (Y/N) Network Tracking.: Y (Y/N) Acknowledge Interchange......: Y (Y/N/E) Errors...........: Y (Y/N) Last Incoming BG Password....: Remote ID..(For PLUS)........: Network ID.(For PLUS)........: Viewpoint - Exception........: Reconciliation Delay (days)..: Enter PF1=Help __________ Syntax Version...: TEST____ TEST___________ _ (Y/N) Tracking.........: ___ _ _ (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=IDir PF5=Control PF6=Next Ctl PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=IDir Displays the Interchange Directory. PF5=Control Displays the Control Information screen (screen 2), for the Partner ID and interchange header option selected. For example, if the ISA interchange header option is selected for the specified Partner ID, the Control Information screen (screen 2 – ISA OPTIONS) screen is displayed. PF6=Next Ctl Displays the next sequential control record. PF9=Add Adds a control record for a new Partner ID being added to the partner profile. Note: When you add a new Control record, Sterling Gentran automatically adds default Group and Transaction records, based on the !!!GENTRAN–RESERVED– PARTNER– ID–1 (Partner/Qualifier mode) OR !!!GENTRAN-RU1/!!!GENTRAN-RP1 (Relationship mode) PF10=Updt 2 - 32 Updates the control record for an existing Partner ID. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 The Partner Subsystem PF11=Del Deletes a control record and its subordinates (i.e., records with the same Version/Multiple Envelope IDs) for an existing Partner ID for the indicated header option. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, that indicate when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID that you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 33 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 Multiple Envelope Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. For example, if you currently run ISAs with version 004010 and need to test 004020 with the trading partner, you would set up another ISA control with the version being 004020. Caution: Setting up partners using the version should only be used when two like envelopes need to be generated with different information. Interchange Header Option (required) A 3-position alphabetic field identifying the type of interchange envelope to be used for outbound transactions. The envelope allows you to label an outbound transaction. standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX. For example, ISA = the segment ID for the interchange envelope header segment; GS = the segment ID for group envelope header segment when an interchange envelope is not used. Sterling Gentran:Structure Installed Value: GEN = Generic Last Incoming Sequence Number A 14-position numeric field defining the control number of the last incoming interchange received. If left as spaces, sequence checking for this interchange is not done. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – INCREMENTAL or PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters. EDI Databank Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank used. Valid values are: D N = = Directory only None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter. Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used. Valid values are: F D N = = = Full (message store and directory) Directory only None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter. 2 - 34 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 The Partner Subsystem Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates if interchange acknowledgments are expected for outbound interchanges. A TA1 acknowledges an ISA interchange, an AC1 acknowledges an ICS interchange, and a UCI acknowledges a UNB interchange (EDIFACT). Valid values are: Y = N = Yes, expect TA1, AC1, or UCI acknowledgments. Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to W(aiting). No, do not expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI acknowledgments. Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to N(ot required). Network Tracking A 1-position field indicating whether network tracking is done. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, network tracking is done. No, network tracking is not done. Acknowledge Interchange A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system whether to create an acknowledgment (that is, TA1 or AC1) for each inbound interchange. The default value is N (no, do not create interchange acknowledgments). Valid values are: Y N E = = = Yes, create interchange acknowledgment. No, do not create interchange acknowledgment. Create interchange acknowledgment based on incoming envelope. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter. Errors A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you create segments identifying errors in the received transactions (AK3/AK4, A1, USC, UCD). Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, create segments to identify errors. No, do not create segments to identify errors (default value). Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter. Note: If errors occur and this field is set to Y, acknowledgments are generated (even if acknowledgment generation is turned off at the group and transaction levels). Last Incoming BG Password A 10-position alphanumeric field defining the valid password for an incoming BG segment (interchange header record). Only applicable if used with the BG PARTNER YES global parameter. Syntax Version A 1-position numeric field used to define the Syntax Rules version number of the ISO 9735 to be used. This is only valid for the UNA/UNB header option. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 35 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015 Remote ID (For PLUS) (For Sterling Gentran:Plus Only) An 8-position alphanumeric field that is used to link the partner profile to the remote identifier, if applicable. Network ID (For PLUS) (For Sterling Gentran:Plus Only) A 15-position alphanumeric field that is used to link the partner profile to the network identifier, if applicable. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed Viewpoint – Exception A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management activity is performed at the interchange level for this partner. Valid values are: Y = N = blank = Yes, Exception Management is performed. No, Exception Management is not performed. Defaults to the value Y and the Exception Management processing is controlled by the Configuration File Exception Management Partner Default Indicator. Viewpoint – Tracking A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management activity is performed at the interchange level for this trading partner. Valid values are: Y = N = blank = Yes, Tracking Management is performed. No, Tracking Management is not performed. Defaults to the value Y and the Tracking Management processing is controlled by the Configuration Field Tracking Management Partner default indicator. See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception Management is performed. 2 - 36 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 Purpose The Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange segment type identified on screen 1, another screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen from the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing PF5. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, ISA Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM016 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840 Multiple Envelope Id: ISA Outbound envelope information for ISA segment: XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: Authorization Qual....ISA01: 00 Authorization.ISA02: __________ Security Code Qual....ISA03: 00 Security Code.ISA04: __________ Sender ID Qual........ISA05: ZZ Sender ID.....ISA06: YOUR_COMPANY___ Receiver ID Qual......ISA07: ZZ Receiver ID...ISA08: TRADING_PARTNER Repeat Sep / Stds ID..ISA11: ? or Hex 6F Version...............ISA12: 00200 Use................: I (A/I/D) Control Number........ISA13: 000000000 Ack Requested.ISA14: 0 (1=Yes,0=No) Test or Production....ISA15: P (T/P) Subelement Separator..ISA16: > or Hex 5C Element Separator..........: * or Hex 5C Segment Terminator.........: _ or Hex 15 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 37 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 Relationship Mode EDIM016 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: Outbound envelope information for ISA segment: Authorization Qual....ISA01: Security Code Qual....ISA03: Sender ID Qual........ISA05: Receiver ID Qual......ISA07: Repeat Sep / Stds ID..ISA11: Version...............ISA12: Control Number........ISA13: Test or Production....ISA15: Subelement Separator..ISA16: Element Separator..........: Segment Terminator.........: Enter PF1=Help __ __ __ __ _ or Hex _____ _________ _ (T/P) _ or Hex _ or Hex _ or Hex XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Authorization.ISA02: Security Code.ISA04: Sender ID.....ISA06: Receiver ID...ISA08: __ Use................: Ack Requested.ISA14: __________ __________ _______________ _______________ _ _ (A/I/D) (1=Yes,0=No) __ __ __ PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the specified trading partner's ISA parameters, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key. PF4=Control Displays the first Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the ISA parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 38 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 The Partner Subsystem Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID that you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. Authorization Qual A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier associated with the authorization code your trading partner has assigned to you. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 39 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 Authorization A 10-position numeric field used to define the authorization code your trading partner has assigned to you. If you are not sending an authorization code, type 00 for the Qualifier. Security Code Qual A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier associated with the security code your trading partner has assigned to you. Security Code A 10-position numeric field used to define the security code your trading partner has assigned to you. If you are not sending a security code, type 00 for the Qualifier. Sender ID Qual A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner. Sender ID A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Receiver ID Qual A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the interchange header segment. Receiver ID A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s interchange ID. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. 2 - 40 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 The Partner Subsystem Repeat Sep / Stds ID A 1-position field that contains either the repetition separator or the Interchange Control Standards ID Code. As of ASC X-12 version 004030, the ISA 11 contains the repetition separator that is to be used for repeating data elements. Sterling Gentran will check the ISA 12 Interchange Version to determine the correct value for this field. If ISA 12 is less than 00403, valid values are: U = United States of America X = ANSI Accredited Standards Committee X12 If ISA 12 is 00403 or greater, select any non-alphabetic, non-numeric character not contained in the EDI data. Version A 5-position numeric field defining the version of the EDI standards used to process interchange control envelopes sent to or received from this trading partner. Use A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the Version previously defined. Valid values are: A I D = = = blank = Always use the version designated. Use the version designated in the input. Use this version as a default if the input’s identified version cannot be located in the standards table. Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter. Control Number A 9-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding 1 (one) to the number you type in this field. If you type a zero (0), the system assigns 1 (one) as the beginning control number for your first interchange. Control Number is also termed Envelope Reference ID. Ack Requested A 1-position numeric field used to set the Acknowledgment Requested field on an outbound ISA. Valid values are: 1 0 = = Yes, interchange acknowledgment requested. No, interchange acknowledgment not requested. Test or Production A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether data is test or production. Valid values are: T P = = Test data. Production data. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 41 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016 Subelement Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value that separates portions of an outbound element. In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that separates elements in an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, such as * and ^, and the system converts and enters the hexadecimal value for that character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Segment Terminator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value identifying the end of an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. 2 - 42 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 Purpose This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, ICS Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM018 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF AN ICS PARTNER Part ID: ICS-PARTNER Multiple Envelope Id: ICS Outbound envelope information for ICS segment: Element Separator.............ICS01: Subelement Separator..........ICS02: Control Standards Identifier..ICS03: Version.......................ICS04: Version Use........................: Sender ID Qualifier...........ICS05: Sender ID.....................ICS06: Receiver ID Qualifier.........ICS07: Receiver ID...................ICS08: Control Number................ICS11: Segment Terminator............ICS12: Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: * or Hex 5C : or Hex 7A _ or ____ 00200 A (A/I/D) 01 YOUR-ID________ 01 TRADING-PARTNER 000000001 _ or Hex 15 PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 43 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 Relationship Mode EDIM018 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: ICS Outbound envelope information for ICS segment: Element Separator.............ICS01: Subelement Separator..........ICS02: Control Standards Identifier..ICS03: Version.......................ICS04: Version Use........................: Sender ID Qualifier...........ICS05: Sender ID.....................ICS06: Receiver ID Qualifier.........ICS07: Receiver ID...................ICS08: Control Number................ICS11: Segment Terminator............ICS12: Enter PF1=Help 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: * or Hex 5C : or Hex 7A _ or AIAG 00200 A (A/I/D) 01 YOUR-ID________ 01 TRADING-PARTNER 000000001 _ or Hex 15 PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete ICS parameters for the trading partner, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key. PF4=Control Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the ICS parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 44 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 The Partner Subsystem Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 45 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the hexadecimal value for that character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Subelement Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value used to separate portions of an outbound element. In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Control Standards Identifier A 1-position or 4-position alphabetic field (long or short) used to define the organization responsible for the EDI standard used in the interchange. Valid values are: U X E = = = USA EDI community ASC X12 EDIFACT Version A 5-position numeric field that is used to define the version of the EDI standards used to process control envelopes sent to or received from this trading partner. 2 - 46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018 The Partner Subsystem Version Use A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the version previously defined. Valid values are: A I D = = = blank = Always use the version designated. Use the version designated in the input. Use this version as a default if the identified version in the input cannot be located in the standards table. Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter. Sender ID Qualifier A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner. Sender ID A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier. Receiver ID Qualifier A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the interchange header segment. Receiver ID A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s interchange ID. Control Number A 9-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding 1 (one) to the number you type in this field. If you type a zero (0), the system assigns 1 (one) as the beginning control number for your first interchange. Segment Terminator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value used to identify the end of an outbound segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character in the second field. OR In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 47 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017 Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017 Purpose This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, GS and BG Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM017 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER Part ID: BG-PARNTER Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: BG Version: Outbound envelope information for GS and BG segments: Element Separator................: Segment Terminator...............: * ' or Hex 5C or Hex 7D Outbound envelope information for BG segment: Communication ID.............BG01: Communication Password.......BG02: Application Sender Code......BG03: Application Receiver Code....BG04: Control Number...............BG07: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 48 YOUR-ID___ TP-PASSWD_ 6147937900__ 6147937155__ 00017 PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM017 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Multiple Envelope Id: BG Version: Outbound envelope information for GS and BG segments: Element Separator................: Segment Terminator...............: * ' or Hex 5C or Hex 7D Outbound envelope information for BG segment: Communication ID.............BG01: Communication Password.......BG02: Application Sender Code......BG03: Application Receiver Code....BG04: Control Number...............BG07: Enter PF1=Help YOUR-ID___ TP-PASSWD_ 6147937900__ 6147937155__ 00017 PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the GS or BG parameters for a trading partner, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key. PF4=Control Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates either the GS or BG parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 49 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. 2 - 50 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017 The Partner Subsystem Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the hexadecimal value for that character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Segment Terminator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Communication ID A 10-position alphanumeric field used to define your BG Communication ID. This ID is displayed on the BG Interchange header. Communication Password A 10-position alphanumeric field used to define a password agreed upon by you and your trading partner. This password is displayed on the BG Interchange header. Application Sender Code A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate your application sender code as it is displayed on the BG interchange header segment sent to this trading partner. Application Receiver Code A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate this trading partner's application receiver code as it is displayed on the BG interchange header. Control Number A 5-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding 1 to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning control number for your first interchange. Control number is also termed Envelope Reference ID. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 51 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 Purpose This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – UNA Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM012 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER Part ID: UNA-PARTNER Multiple Envelope Id: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNA segment: Component Element Separator...UNA01: Element Separator.............UNA02: Decimal Notation..............UNA03: Release Indicator.............UNA04: Repetition Separator..........UNA05: Segment Terminator............UNA06: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 52 : + . ? * ' 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: or Hex 7A or Hex 4E (, OR .) or Hex 5C or Hex 7D PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=UNB PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM012 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNA segment: Component Element Separator...UNA01: Element Separator.............UNA02: Decimal Notation..............UNA03: Release Indicator.............UNA04: Repetition Separator..........UNA05: Segment Terminator............UNA06: Enter PF1=Help : + . ? * ' 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: or Hex 7A or Hex 4E (, OR .) or Hex 5C or Hex 7D PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=UNB PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the trading partner's UNA outbound parameters, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key. PF4=Control Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=UNB Displays the UNB screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the UNA parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 53 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. 2 - 54 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 The Partner Subsystem Component Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that is used to separate the individual component elements in a data element. In the first field, type the special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Component Element Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the hexadecimal value for that special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Component Element Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Decimal Notation A 1-position alphabetic field used to type either a comma (,) or a period (.) to indicate the decimal point in a numeric field. Release Indicator A 1-position alphanumeric field used to define a unique character that restores a syntactical character back to its original meaning when used in conjunction with that syntactical separator or terminator character in a document. Repetition Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define the value that is to be used to separate the occurrences of each element in a repeating data element. In the first field, type the special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value so that the system converts the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 55 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012 Segment Terminator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment. In the first field, type a special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. 2 - 56 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 Purpose This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound UNB envelopes for syntax versions 1, 2, and 3. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – UNB Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM019 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER Part ID: UNB-PARTNER Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Version: Outbound envelope information for UNB segment: Syntax ID.............UNB01: Sender ID.............UNB02: Rev Routing Address...UNB02: Recipient ID..........UNB03: Routing Address.......UNB03: Control Reference.....UNB05: Recipients Password...UNB06: Appl Reference........UNB07: Priority Code.........UNB08: Comm Agreement ID.....UNB10: Test Indicator........UNB11: Enter PF1=Help ____ Version..: ___________________________________ Qual: ______________ ___________________________________ Qual: ______________ ______________ ______________ Qual: ______________ _ Ack Requested..UNB09: ___________________________________ _ (1=Yes, Blank=No) 1 ____ ____ __ _ PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 57 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 Relationship Mode EDIM019 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Outbound envelope information for UNB segment: Syntax ID.............UNB01: Sender ID.............UNB02: Rev Routing Address...UNB02: Recipient ID..........UNB03: Routing Address.......UNB03: Control Reference.....UNB05: Recipients Password...UNB06: Appl Reference........UNB07: Priority Code.........UNB08: Comm Agreement ID.....UNB10: Test Indicator........UNB11: Enter PF1=Help 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: ____ Version..: ___________________________________ Qual: ______________ ___________________________________ Qual: ______________ ______________ ______________ Qual: ______________ _ Ack Requested..UNB09: ___________________________________ _ (1=Yes, Blank=No) 1 ____ ____ __ _ PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Control Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 58 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 The Partner Subsystem Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. Syntax ID A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., UNO). The fourth position in this field contains the character set indicator. Valid values are: A, B, C, D, E, and F. Version A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax identifier. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 59 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 Sender ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for your interchange sender. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner. Rev Routing Address A 14-position alphanumeric field used to identify your Reverse Routing Address. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Recipient ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for the trading partner’s interchange. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the interchange header segment. Routing Address A 14-position alphanumeric field used to identify your trading partner’s recipient routing address. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. 2 - 60 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019 The Partner Subsystem Control Reference A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning control sequence number for generating interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type 0 (zero), the system assigns 1 as the beginning interchange control number. Note: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this value as alphanumeric and does not automatically increment the value. Recipients Password A 14-position alphabetic field used to define the password to the trading partner's system or third party network. Qual A 2-position alphanumeric field used to indicate the Qualifier associated with the trading partner's system or third party network. Appl Reference A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange contains only one type of message. Priority Code A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this trading partner's processing priority code as mutually agreed upon. Ack Requested A 1-position numeric field used to designate that you want this trading partner to acknowledge your request. Valid values are: 1 = blank = Yes, you request that trading partner acknowledges your request No, you do not expect an acknowledgment (default value) Comm Agreement ID A 34-position alphanumeric field used to define the type of communication agreement controlling the interchange (e.g., Customs or ECE agreement). Test Indicator A 1-position numeric field used to define to the system whether the interchange is in test mode or production mode. Valid values are: 1 = blank = Interchange is in test mode Interchange is in production mode IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 61 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM021 Purpose This Control Information screen (Part 1) is used for creating UNB envelopes for syntax version 4. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen, for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM021 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 1 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER Part ID: UNB-PARTNER Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Version: Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 1: Syntax ID................UNB01: ____ Version..: 4 Directory Version Nbr....UNB01: ______ Character encoding ......UNB01: ___ Sender ID ...............UNB02: _________________________________ Qual: ____ Sender Internal ID.......UNB02: _________________________________ Sender Internal Sub-ID...UNB02: _________________________________ Recipient ID.............UNB03: _________________________________ Qual: ____ Recipient Internal ID....UNB03: _________________________________ Recipient Internal SubID.UNB03: _________________________________ Control Reference .....UNB05: ______________ Enter PF1=Help 2 - 62 PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=Control-2 PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM021 The Partner Sub- Relationship Mode EDIM021 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 1 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Version: Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 1: Syntax ID................UNB01: ____ Version..: 4 Directory Version Nbr....UNB01: ______ Character encoding ......UNB01: ___ Sender ID ...............UNB02: _________________________________ Qual: ____ Sender Internal ID.......UNB02: _________________________________ Sender Internal Sub-ID...UNB02: _________________________________ Recipient ID.............UNB03: _________________________________ Qual: ____ Recipient Internal ID....UNB03: _________________________________ Recipient Internal SubID.UNB03: _________________________________ Control Reference .....UNB05: ______________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=Control-2 PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Control Displays the Control Information screen (screen 1). PF5=Control – 2 Displays the Control Information – UNB Part 2 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 63 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. Syntax ID A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., UNO). Version A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax identifier. 2 - 64 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM021 The Partner SubDirectory Version Nbr A 6-position alphanumeric field used to define the Service Code List Directory version number. Character encoding A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the Character encoding value. Sender ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for your interchange sender. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your sender identification as it is displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner. Sender Internal ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange sender internal identification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Sender Internal Sub-ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange sender internal subidentification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 65 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 Recipient ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define this trading partner's interchange identification code. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the interchange header segment. Recipient Internal ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange recipient internal identification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Recipient Internal Sub-ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange recipient internal subidentification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Control Reference A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning control sequence number for generating interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you enter in this field. If you type 0 (zero), the system assigns 1 as the beginning interchange control number. Note: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this value as alphanumeric and does not automatically increment the value. 2 - 66 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM022 The Partner Sub- Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM022 Purpose This Control Information screen (Part 2) is used for creating UNB envelopes for syntax version 4. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information – UNB Part 2 screen, for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM022 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 2 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER Part ID: UNB-PARTNER Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Version: Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 2: Recipient Password.......UNB06: Appl Reference...........UNB07: Priority Code ...........UNB08: Comm Agreement ID........UNB10: Test Indicator...........UNB11: Enter PF1=Help __________ Qual: __ ORDERS____ _ Ack Requested..UNB09: _ ___________________________________ _ (1=Yes, Blank=No) PF3=Exit PF4=Control-1 PF5=Gdir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 67 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 Relationship Mode EDIM022 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 2 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Multiple Envelope Id: UNB Version: Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 2: Recipient Password.......UNB06: Appl Reference...........UNB07: Priority Code ...........UNB08: Comm Agreement ID........UNB10: Test Indicator...........UNB11: Enter PF1=Help __________ Qual: __ ORDERS____ _ Ack Requested..UNB09: _ ___________________________________ _ (1=Yes, Blank=No) PF3=Exit PF4=Control-1 PF5=Gdir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Control–1 Displays the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 68 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM022 The Partner SubJump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name is a text name that may help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier value for the Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. Recipient Password A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define the application password to the partner's division, department, or sectional system, if required. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the interchange header segment. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 69 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 Appl Reference A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange contains only one type of message. Priority Code A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this trading partner's processing priority code as mutually agreed upon. Ack Requested A 1-position numeric field used to designate that you want this trading partner to acknowledge your request. Valid values are: 1 = blank = Yes, you request that trading partner acknowledges your request No, you do not expect an acknowledgment (default value) Comm Agreement ID A 34-position alphanumeric field used to define the type of communication agreement controlling the interchange (e.g., Customs or ECE agreement). Test Indicator A 1-position numeric field used to define to the system whether the interchange is in test mode or production mode. Valid values are: 1 = blank = 2 - 70 Interchange is in test mode Interchange is in production mode IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 Purpose This Control Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – SCH Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM013 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF A SCH PARTNER Part ID: SCH-PARTNER Multiple Envelope Id: SCH Outbound envelope information for SCH segment: Segment Code Separator........SCH01: Component Element Separator...SCH02: Element Separator.............SCH03: Segment Terminator............SCH04: Release Indicator.............SCH05: Decimal Notation...................: = : + ' ? . or or or or Hex Hex Hex Hex XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: 7E 7A 4E 7D (, or .) MAKE CHANGES, AND HIT PF10 TO UPDATE Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=STX PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 71 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 Relationship Mode EDIM013 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: SCH Outbound envelope information for SCH segment: Segment Code Separator........SCH01: Component Element Separator...SCH02: Element Separator.............SCH03: Segment Terminator............SCH04: Release Indicator.............SCH05: Decimal Notation...................: Enter PF1=Help = : + ' ? . or or or or Hex Hex Hex Hex XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: 7E 7A 4E 7D (, or .) PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=STX PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the trading partner's SCH or STX outbound parameters, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4. PF4=Control Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=STX Displays the STX screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the SCH parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 72 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 The Partner Subsystem Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier for the Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 73 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 Segment Code Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define the value that is used to separate the segments in a composite data element. In the first field, type the special character. The default value is = for ANA TRADACOMS. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Component Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define the value that is used to separate the component data elements in a composite data element. In the first field, type the special character. The default value is “:” for ANA TRADACOMS. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Component Element Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. Element Separator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment. In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the hexadecimal value for that special character. The default value is + for ANA TRADACOMS. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Note: The Component Element Separator and Element Separator fields must have different values. 2 - 74 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013 The Partner Subsystem Segment Terminator Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment. In the first field, type a special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for that special character. OR In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank. Release Indicator A 1-position alphanumeric field used to define a unique character that restores a syntactical character back to its original meaning when used in conjunction with that syntactical separator or terminator character in a document. Decimal Notation A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter either a comma (,) or a period (.) to indicate the decimal point in a numeric field. The default value is “.” for ANA TRADACOMS. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 75 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 Purpose This Control Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – STX Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM014 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF A STX PARTNER Part ID: STX-PARTNER Multiple Envelope Id: STX Outbound envelope information for STX segment: Syntax Identifier.............STX01: Syntax Version................STX01: Sender ID Code................STX02: Sender ID Name................STX02: Recipient ID Code.............STX03: Recipient ID Name.............STX03: Senders Reference ...(SNRF)...STX05: Recipients Reference (RCRF)...STX06: Application Reference.........STX07: Transmission Priority Code....STX08: Network Identification.(For PLUS)..: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 76 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: ANA_ (ANA or ANAA) 1 1234567890____ ___________________________________ 0987654321____ ___________________________________ YOUR-REF______ TP-REF________ INVOICE_______ _ __________ PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM014 __________ CONTROL INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: STX Outbound envelope information for STX segment: Syntax Identifier.............STX01: Syntax Version................STX01: Sender ID Code................STX02: Sender ID Name................STX02: Recipient ID Code.............STX03: Recipient ID Name.............STX03: Senders Reference ...(SNRF)...STX05: Recipients Reference (RCRF)...STX06: Application Reference.........STX07: Transmission Priority Code....STX08: Network Identification.(For PLUS)..: Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: ANA_ (ANA or ANAA) 1 1234567890____ ___________________________________ 0987654321____ ___________________________________ YOUR-REF______ TP-REF________ INVOICE_______ _ __________ PF3=Exit PF4=Control PF5=GDir PF10=Updt PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the trading partner's STX outbound parameters, you must first return to the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key. PF4=Control Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the STX parameters for an existing Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 77 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple controls with the same header option need to be defined. Syntax Identifier A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., ANA or ANAA). Syntax Version A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax identifier. 2 - 78 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 The Partner Subsystem Sender ID Code A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier code. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Sender ID Name A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the name associated with the sender identification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Recipient ID Code A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define this trading partner's interchange identification code. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Recipient ID Name A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the name associated with the recipient identification. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Senders Reference A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter the sender transmission code. Recipients Reference A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter the recipient transmission code. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 79 The Partner Subsystem Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014 Application Reference A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange contains only one type of message. Transmission Priority Code A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this partner's transmission priority code as mutually agreed upon. Network Identification (For PLUS) A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the network identifier. 2 - 80 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM020 The Partner Subsystem Group Directory EDIM020 Purpose The Group Directory allows you to display a list of all group records for a selected partner. How to Access Access the Group Directory in any one of the following ways: • Type 3 to select Group Directory from the Partner Selection Menu. • Press PF5 from the second Control Information screen. • Type 1.2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM020 1.2.3_____ GROUP DIRECTORY EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840 Qual: Multiple Envelope Id: ___ Multiple Accept A Group ID Env Id Version Compliance Version Flag _ !!!DFT ISA 004030 Y _ BF ISA 004010 Y _ FA ISA 002040 Y _ IN ISA 003050 Y _ PO ISA 003020 Y _ PT ISA 003050 Y _ SH ISA 003010 Y _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Ctrl PF5=Group PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Send Flag Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 - 81 The Partner Subsystem Group Directory EDIM020 Relationship Mode Select EDIM020 1.2.3_____ GROUP DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY PARTNER: VENDOR-1 YOUR COMPANY NAME USER: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Envelope Id: ___ Multiple Accept A Group ID Env Id Version Compliance Version Flag _ !!!DFT ISA 004030 Y _ BF ISA 004010 Y _ FA ISA 002040 Y _ IN ISA 003050 Y _ PO ISA 003020 Y _ PT ISA 003050 Y _ SH ISA 003010 Y _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Ctrl PF5=Group PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Send Flag Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Ctrl Displays the Interchange Directory. PF5=Group Displays the partner Group Information screen for the selected Group ID. Screen Actions Screen actions are displayed at the top of the Group Directory. The following table describes how to perform the screen action functions associated with the partner Group Directory. To perform this action... To view the Group Information screen for a functional group selected on the Group Directory 2 - 82 Associated with this Do this... screen action... Select Type S next to the Group ID you want to view on the Group Directory, and press PF5. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM020 The Partner Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. USER/ PARTNER (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Envelope Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to the Group ID, and then press PF5 to display a Group Information record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 83 The Partner Subsystem Group Directory EDIM020 Group ID (protected) Displays the Group ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed. This is the functional group identification as assigned by the standards. Multiple Env Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple groups with the same Group ID need to be defined. Note: Version is not valid for Group ID of !!!DFT. See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Compliance Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays the version from the standards file to be used in compliance checking for the group record. This could also be an Implementation Convention. Note: This is the version field used by inbound and outbound mapping for map selection. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter. Global parameter, PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP, instructs both Editors to only look at this field to get the version for compliance checking. If this field is incorrect or missing, the Editors suspend the group. Accept Flag (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of group from your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner. No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: The value N literally prevents the acceptance of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a particular group from a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. 2 - 84 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM020 The Partner Subsystem Send Flag (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of group to your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I send this type of group to my trading partners. No, I do not send this group to my trading partners (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of a particular group to a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 85 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen EDIM030 Group Information Screen EDIM030 Purpose The Group Information screen allows you to identify separate types of processing for various functional groups. For example, you can verify which groups can be sent or received, or specify control numbers within a functional group. The system automatically creates a default group record when you add a new Partner Control record. If you intend to use the default group record, you should update the record to reflect the appropriate information for your trading partner. However, we strongly recommend creating a separate group record for each type of functional group that is sent or received. How to Access Access the Group Information screen by doing one of the following: • Type S to select a Group ID from the Group Directory and press Enter. • Type 1.2.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM030 1.2.3.1___ Part ID.: Group ID: GROUP INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840 !!!DFT Multiple Env Id: ISA XXX Qual: Version: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ____________ Compliance Version.................: 004030______ Version Use: I (A/I/D) Accept Flag........................: Y (Y/N) Send Flag..: Y (Y/N) Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF...........: Y (Y/N) Acknowledge Group or Transaction...: T (G/T) Acknowledgment overdue after.......: 000:00 (HHH:MM) Alternate Acknowledgment Partner...: ___________________________________ Alternate Partner Qualifier........: ______________ Last Incoming Control Number.......: ______________ EDI Databank Inbound...............: Viewpoint - Exception..............: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 86 D _ (D/N) (Y/N) Outbound...: Tracking...: D _ (D/N) (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=GDir PF5=Group PF6=Next Grp PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen EDIM030 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM030 1.2.3.1___ User....: Group ID: GROUP INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY PO Multiple Env Id: ISA XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: ____________ Compliance Version.................: 004030______ Version Use: I (A/I/D) Accept Flag........................: N (Y/N) Send Flag..: Y (Y/N) Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF...........: Y (Y/N) Acknowledge Group or Transaction...: _ (G/T) Acknowledgment overdue after.......: ___:__ (HHH:MM) Alternate Acknowledgment User......: ___________________________________ Alternate Acknowledgment Partner...: ______________ Last Incoming Control Number.......: ______________ EDI Databank Inbound...............: Viewpoint - Exception..............: Enter PF1=Help D _ (D/N) (Y/N) Outbound...: Tracking...: D _ (D/N) (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=GDir PF5=Group PF6=Next Grp PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To display a different group definition, type a partial or complete Group ID in the Group ID field, and press Enter. PF4=GDir Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Group Displays the second screen of group information for the specified Group ID. PF6=Next Grp Displays the next functional group record for this partner. PF9=Add Adds the new group record for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF11=Del Deletes an existing group record for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 87 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen EDIM030 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Group ID A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Group ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed. This is the functional group identification as assigned by the standards. Multiple Env Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic field that identifies the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. 2 - 88 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen EDIM030 The Partner Subsystem Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple groups with the same Group ID need to be defined. Note: Version is not valid for Group ID of !!!DFT. See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Compliance Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the version from the standards file to be used in compliance checking for the group record. Note: This is the version field used by inbound and outbound mapping for map selection. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter. Global parameter, PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP, instructs both Editors to only look at this field to get the version for compliance checking. If this field is incorrect or missing, the Editors suspends the group. Version Use A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the version defined above. Valid values are: A I D = = = blank = Always use the version designated. Use the version designated in the input. Use this version as a default if the identified version cannot be located in the standards table. Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter. Accept Flag A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of group from your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner. No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering a value N literally prevents the acceptance of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a particular group from a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 89 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen EDIM030 Send Flag A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of group to your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I send this type of group to my trading partners. No, I do not send of this group to my trading partners (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of a particular group to a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF A 1-position alphanumeric field indicating whether group acknowledgments are expected for outbound groups. Valid values are: Y = Yes, expect AK1, B5, or UCF acknowledgments. Databank Acknowledgement Status will be initially set to W (waiting). N = No, do not expect AK1, B5, or UCF acknowledgments. Databank Acknowledgement Status will be initially set to N (not required). Acknowledge Group or Transaction A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether to acknowledge inbound transactions at the group or transaction level. Valid values are: G T = = blank = Group (AK1/AK9, B5, UCF) Transaction (AK2/AK5, UCM) No acknowledgements will be generated. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter. Acknowledgment overdue after (hours/minutes) A 5-position numeric field used to enter the number of hours and minutes after which an acknowledgment is considered overdue. The format is HHH:MM. Used in databank reporting. Used in reconciliation with received acknowledgments and outbound groups. Note: A blank value in this field is considered to be a value of 0 hours. 2 - 90 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen EDIM030 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Alternate Acknowledgment Partner A 35-position alphanumeric field that identifies an alternative acknowledgment partner (i.e., an alias for you or your trading partner), designated so that acknowledgments received with Sender IDs different than the documents sent can be reconciled. Example: Send Document to a division and receive an acknowledgment from their Corporate. Alternate Acknowledgment User A 15-position field used with the Alternate Acknowledgement Partner field. Together, these fields identify an alternate partner relationship designated so those acknowledgements received with Sender IDs different from the documents sent can be reconciled. Alternate Partner Qualifier A 4-position field used to indicate the Qualifier associated with the alternative acknowledgment partner, if applicable. This field is used in association with the Alternate Acknowledgment Partner field to reconcile acknowledgments received with different Sender IDs than the documents sent. Alternate Acknowledgment Partner A 15-position field used with the Alternate Acknowledgement User field. Together, these fields identify an alternate partner relationship designated so those acknowledgements received with Sender IDs different from the documents sent can be reconciled. Last Incoming Control Number A 9-position numeric field defining the control number of the last incoming group received. This value is used to verify whether inbound groups with this Group ID have sequential control numbers. If this field is blank, no sequence checking is performed. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–INCREMENTAL or PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 91 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen EDIM030 EDI Databank Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank to be used inbound. Valid values are: D = Directory only (Audit) N = None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter. EDI Databank Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used outbound. Valid values are: D N = = Directory only (Audit) None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter. Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed Viewpoint – Exception A 1-position field indicating whether to perform Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management activity at the group level for this trading partner. Valid values are: Y = N = blank = Yes, perform Exception Management. No, do not perform Exception Management. Defaults to the value Y, the Exception Management processing is controlled by the Configuration File Exception Management Partner Default Indicator. See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception Management is performed. Tracking A 1-position field indicating whether to perform Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management activity at the group level for this trading partner. Valid values are: Y = N = blank = 2 - 92 Yes, perform Tracking Management. No, do not perform Tracking Management. Defaults to the value Y, the Tracking Management processing is controlled by the Configuration File Tracking Management Partner Default Indicator. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 Purpose This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate group screen (screen 2) exists for each interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope. A default group is automatically created when you add a new Partner Control record. You can modify this default group record or use it unchanged. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Group Information screen. The group screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information (screen 1). Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (BAT options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM031 __________ Part ID.: Group Id: GROUP INFORMATION XXX EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 INVOIC Multiple Env. Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: Outbound envelope information for BAT segment: Message Reference Number......BAT01: Controlling Agency.................: 000000000001 UN Accept BAT Inbound.................: Permit BAT Outbound................: Y Y Transaction Segment ID.............: Message Reference Number...........: ___ ( /MHD) ____________ GROUP UPDATED Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide (Y/N) (Y/N) PF5=TDir PF14=Info PF6=Next Grp 2 - 93 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 Relationship Mode EDIM031 __________ User...: Group Id: GROUP INFORMATION XXX YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY INVOIC Multiple Env Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Outbound envelope information for BAT segment: Message Reference Number......BAT01: Controlling Agency.................: 000000000001 UN Accept BAT Inbound.................: Permit BAT Outbound................: Y Y Transaction Segment ID.............: Message Reference Number...........: ___ ( /MHD) ____________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt (Y/N) (Y/N) PF5=TDir PF14=Info PF6=Next Grp Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the trading partner's BAT parameters, you must first return to the Group Information (screen 1) by pressing PF4. 2 - 94 PF4=Group Displays the Group Information (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=TDir Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Grp Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 The Partner Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Group ID (protected) Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID for the Group as defined for the Partner ID displayed at the top of the screen. Multiple Env Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 95 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID is needed. The version resulted from the value specified on the Group Information (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Message Reference Number A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number. Controlling Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type. Accept BAT Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of group from your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner. No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a particular group from a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. Permit BAT Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of group to your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I send this type of group to my Trading Partners No, I do not send of this group to my trading partners (default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter. Caution: Entering a value N literally prevents the sending of this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of a particular group to a trading partner. 2 - 96 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Segment ID A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. Valid values are: MHD for TRADACOMS, or spaces. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. Message Reference Number A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 97 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 Purpose This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate group screen (screen 2) exists for each interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope. The system automatically adds a default group when you add a new Partner Control record. You can modify this default group record or use it unchanged. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen from the Group Information (screen 1) by pressing PF5. The group screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (UNG options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM032 __________ Part ID.: Group ID: GROUP INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER UNA-PARTNER INVOIC Multiple Env Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNG segment: 2 - 98 Functional Group ID...UNG01: Sender ID.............UNG02: Recipients ID.........UNG03: Reference Number......UNG05: Controlling Agency....UNG06: Version Number........UNG07: Application Password..UNG08: INVOIC YOUR-ID__________________________ Qual: ____ TRADING-PARTNER__________________ Qual: ____ 00000000000001 E__ 090 Release: 1__ Association: ______ ______________ Transaction Segment ID: ___ ( /UNH) Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt Reference Number: PF5=TDir PF14=Info ______________ PF6=Next Grp IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM032 __________ User...: Group ID: GROUP INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY INVOIC Multiple Env Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNG segment: Functional Group ID...UNG01: INVOIC Sender ID.............UNG02: YOUR-ID____________________________ Qual: ____ Recipients ID.........UNG03: TRADING-PARTNER____________________ Qual: ____ Reference Number......UNG05: 00000000000001 Controlling Agency....UNG06: E__ Version Number........UNG07: 090 Release: 1__ Association: ______ Application Password..UNG08: ______________ Transaction Segment ID: ___ ( /UNH) Reference Number: Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt PF5=TDir PF14=Info ______________ PF6=Next Grp Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To delete the trading partner's UNG parameters, you must first return to the Group Information (screen 1) by pressing PF4. PF4=Group Displays the Group Information (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=TDir Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Grp Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 99 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Header Option A 3-position field identifying the interchange envelope. This field is used to restrict the group records that are displayed on this screen. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) 2 - 100 Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 The Partner Subsystem Group ID (protected) Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID that identifies the Group as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Multiple Env Id (protected) Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group exists with the same Group ID. The version results when a value is entered on the Group Information (screen). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Functional Group ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field used to display the functional group identification as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Sender ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the Sender ID as it is displayed on the group header segment (UNG) sent to this trading partner. Recipients ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s Interchange ID. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is displayed on the group header segment (UNG). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 101 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032 Reference Number A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number. Caution: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this value as alphanumeric and does not automatically increment the value. To prevent the generation of optional UNG envelopes, leave this field blank. Controlling Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type. Version Number A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the functional group. Release A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current version number. Association A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code assigned by the association responsible for the design and maintenance of the message type. Application Password A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define the application password to the partner's division, department, or sectional system, if required. Transaction Segment ID A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. The valid value for this field is UNH for EDIFACT. Reference Number A 14-position (if EDIFACT) numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. 2 - 102 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 Purpose This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate Group Information screen (screen 2) exists for each group segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Group Information (screen 1). The group screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information (screen 1). A default group is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record. You can modify this default group record or use it unchanged. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (GS options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM033 __________ Partner ID: Group ID..: GROUP INFORMATION XXX EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER ISA–PARTNER PO Multiple Env Id: BG 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual...: Version: Outbound envelope information for GS segment: Functional Group ID............GS01: Applications Senders Code......GS02: Applications Receivers Code....GS03: Control Number.................GS06: Responsible Agency Code........GS07: Version........................GS08: PO 1234567890___ 0987654321___ 000000001 X_ 002040________ Transaction Segment ID.........: __ ( /ST) Transaction Control Number.....: _________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=TDir PF14=Info PF6=Next Grp 2 - 103 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 Relationship Mode EDIM033 __________ User....: Group ID: GROUP INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY PO Multiple Env Id: ISA XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Outbound envelope information for GS segment: Functional Group ID............GS01: Applications Senders Code......GS02: Applications Receivers Code....GS03: Control Number.................GS06: Responsible Agency Code........GS07: Version........................GS08: PO STERLING_______ XYZ____________ 000000227 X_ ____________ Transaction Segment ID.............: Transaction Control Number.........: ___ ( /ST) _________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF10=Updt PF5=TDir PF14=Info PF6=Next Grp Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Group Displays the Group Information screen for the Partner ID selected. To delete the GS parameters for a trading partner, you must first return to the Group Information (screen 1) by pressing PF4. PF5=TDir Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Grp Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. 2 - 104 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 The Partner Subsystem Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Partner ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Group ID (protected) Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID that identifies the group as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Multiple Env Id Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Group Information (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5 for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 105 The Partner Subsystem Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 Functional Group ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field displays the functional group identification as defined for the Partner ID displayed. This field is a display of the Group ID from the key. Applications Senders Code A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate your application sender code as it is displayed on the GS group envelope sent to this trading partner. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Applications Receivers Code A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate this trading partner's application receiver code as it is displayed on the GS group envelope. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Control Number A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning group control number for group control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning group control number. Responsible Agency Code A 2-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type. Valid values are: X – ASC X12 and T – TDCC. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used by the envelope generation program when creating GS Envelopes outbound. If this field is left blank, the envelope generation program uses the compliance version from the Group Information (screen 1) instead. 2 - 106 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Segment ID A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined, or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Transaction Control Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. The valid value is ST for American ASC X12/TDCC. Transaction Control Number A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence number for generating transaction envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Transaction Control Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 107 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM025 Transaction Directory EDIM025 Purpose The Transaction Directory allows you to display a list of all transaction records for a selected partner. How to Access Access the Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways: • On the Partner Selection Menu, type 4 to select Transaction Directory and press Enter. • Press PF5 from the Group Information screen (screen 2). • Type 1.2.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Select EDIM025 1.2.4_____ TRANSACTION DIRECTORY XXX EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISA-PARTNER Qual: Multiple Env Id: ___ Multiple Accept A Trans ID Rlse# Env Id Version Group ID Flag _ !!!DFT ISA Y _ 832 ISA SC Y _ 850 ISA PO Y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT TRANS ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=GDir PF5=Trans PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 2 - 108 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Send Flag Y Y Y T/P P T T IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Directory EDIM025 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM025 1.2.4_____ TRANSACTION DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 YOUR COMPANY NAME User: YOUR COMPANY Multiple Env Id: ___ Multiple Accept A Trans ID Rlse# Env Id Version Group ID Flag _ !!!DFT ISA Y _ 832 ISA SC Y _ 850 ISA PO Y _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT TRANS ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=GDir PF5=Trans PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Send Flag Y Y Y T/P P T T Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Partner Transaction Directory. The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action... Retrieve the Partner Transaction Information screen for a transaction set on the Partner Transaction Directory Associated with this Do this... screen action... Select To select a Transaction Set ID to view or maintain, type S next to the selected ID you want to view on the Partner Transaction Directory. Then, press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=GDir Displays the Group Directory. PF5=Trans Displays the Partner Transaction Information screen for the selected Transaction ID. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 109 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM025 Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to the Transaction ID, and then press PF5 to display the Transaction Information screen. Trans ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). 2 - 110 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Directory EDIM025 The Partner Subsystem Rlse # (protected) A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is displayed only for TRADACOMS transactions. Multiple Env Id (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field that displays the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used to display the standard’s Version ID to be used for this transaction. This field is used only if duplicate Transaction IDs are needed for different versions of the standard. Note: Version is not valid for Transaction ID of !!!DFT. See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Group ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that displays the functional group identification as defined for the Partner ID displayed. This field is a display of the Group ID from the key. Each transaction record has a functional group associated with it. This resolves the problem with the mapper selecting the incorrect functional group for partner-specific maps, when multiple functional groups are defined to the application. Accept Flag (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of transaction from your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, accept this type of transaction from my trading partner. No, do not accept this type of transaction from my trading partner (default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a particular transaction from a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter. Send Flag (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of transaction to your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I send this type of transaction to my trading partner. No, I do not send of this transaction to my trading partner (default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of a particular transaction to a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 111 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM025 T/P (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field used to define whether this is a test or production transaction type. This field is used in Data Separation and Error Rejection. Valid values are: T P 2 - 112 = = test transaction production transaction (default value) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 Purpose The Transaction Information screen allows you to identify separate processing for various transactions. For example, you can verify which transactions may be sent or received, or specify Control numbers within a transaction set. How to Access Access the Transaction Information screen in either of the following ways: • Type S to select a Transaction ID from the Transaction Directory, and press Enter. • Type 1.2.4.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1,” for information on how to modify the default record. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM040 1.2.4.1___ TRANSACTION INFORMATION EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISA-PARTNER Transaction ID: 850___ Functional Group ID.............: Test or Production..............: Translation Map ID Inbound......: EDI Databank Inbound............: Application Databank Inbound....: Last Incoming Control Number....: Accept Transaction Inbound......: Send Transaction Outbound.......: Expect an AK2 or UCM............: Acknowledge this Transaction....: Transaction Acknowledgment Type.: Viewpoint - Exception...........: Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Version: ____________ Multiple Env Id: ISA PO____ T (T/P) __________ Outbound: __________ D (D/N) Outbound: D (D/N) D (F/D/N) Outbound: D (D/N) ______________ Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) 997___ (997/999/Contrl) _ (Y/N) Tracking: _ (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=TDir PF5=Trans PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Next Trn 2 - 113 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 Relationship Mode EDIM040 1.2.4.1___ TRANSACTION INFORMATION YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: 810 Functional Group ID.............: Test or Production..............: Translation Map ID Inbound......: EDI Databank Inbound............: Application Databank Inbound....: Last Incoming Control Number....: Accept Transaction Inbound......: Send Transaction Outbound.......: Expect an AK2 or UCM............: Acknowledge this Transaction....: Transaction Acknowledgment Type.: Viewpoint - Exception...........: Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: ____________ Multiple Env Id: ISA IN____ P (T/P) __________ Outbound: __________ D (D/N) Outbound: D (D/N) F (F/D/N) Outbound: D (D/N) ______________ Y (Y/N) N (Y/N) N (Y/N) Y (Y/N) 997___ (997/999/Contrl) _ (Y/N) Tracking: _ (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=TDir PF5=Trans PF6=Next Trn PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To display a different transaction definition, type a partial or complete Transaction ID in the Transaction ID field, and press Enter. 2 - 114 PF4=TDir Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction screen (screen 2) for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Trn Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF9=Add Adds the new transaction definition for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF11=Del Deletes the transaction information record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 The Partner Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 115 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the standard’s Version ID to be used for this transaction. This field is used only if duplicate Transaction IDs are needed for different versions of the standard. Only applicable if used with the TRANSACTION VERSION global parameter. Note: Version is not valid for Transaction ID of !!!DFT. Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Functional Group ID A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the functional group identification as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). This field is a display of the Group ID from the key. Each transaction record has a functional group associated with it. This prevents the mapper from selecting the incorrect functional group for partner-specific maps, when multiple functional groups are defined to the application. Test or Production A 1-position alphabetic field used to define whether this is a test or production transaction type. This field is used in Data Separation and Error Rejection. Valid values are: T P = = test transaction production transaction (default value) Translation Map ID Inbound A 10-position alphanumeric field that identifies the specific map for the application to use for this partner and transaction. Used for partner-specific mapping only. Translation Map ID Outbound A 10-position numeric field that identifies the specific map for the application to use for this partner and transaction. Used for partner-specific mapping only. EDI Databank Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank to be used. Valid values are: D N = = Directory only None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter. 2 - 116 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 The Partner Subsystem EDI Databank Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used. Valid values are: D N = = Directory only None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter. Application Databank Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of application databank to be used. Valid values are: F D N = = = Full Directory only None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter. Application Databank Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of application databank to be used. Valid values are: D = Directory only N = None Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter. Last Incoming Control Number A 9-position numeric field defining the number of the last incoming group received. This value is used to verify whether the groups coming in are in incremental or chronological order. If this field is blank, no sequence checking is performed. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–INCREMENTAL or PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters. Accept Transaction Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of transaction from your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I receive this type of transaction from my trading partner. No, I do not accept this type of transaction from my trading partner (default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a particular transaction from a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 117 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 Send Transaction Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of transaction to your trading partner. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, I send this type of transaction to my trading partner. No, I do not send of this transaction to my trading partner (default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file. Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of a particular transaction to a trading partner. Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter. Expect an AK2 or UCM A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates if transaction acknowledgments are expected for outbound transactions. Valid values are: Y = N = Yes, expect AK2 or UCM acknowledgment. Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to W(aiting) No, do not expect AK2 or UCM acknowledgments. Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to N(ot required) Acknowledge this Transaction A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether to generate a 997 or CONTRL acknowledgement for this transaction. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, acknowledge this transaction. No, do not acknowledge this transaction. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter. Transaction Acknowledgment Type A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the type of acknowledgment you want. Valid values are: 997 = 999 = Contrl = ANSI functional acknowledgment (default value). UCS functional acknowledgment. EDIFACT acknowledgment. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter. 2 - 118 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen EDIM040 The Partner Subsystem Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed Viewpoint – Exception A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management activity is performed at the transaction level for this partner. Valid values are: Y = N = Blank = Yes, Exception Management is performed. No, Exception Management is not performed. Exception Management processing is controlled by the Configuration File Exception Management Partner Default Indicator. Tracking A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management activity is performed at the transaction level for this partner. Valid values are: Y = N = Blank = Yes, Tracking is performed. No, Tracking is not performed. Defaults to the value Y. The Tracking Management processing is controlled by the Configuration File Tracking Management Partner Default Indicator. See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception Management is performed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 119 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043 Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043 Purpose This Transaction Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate Transaction screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope. A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record. You can modify this record or use it unchanged. Sterling Gentran also gives you the ability to modify the default record itself to create a custom default. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information (screen 1). The transaction screen displayed is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen (ST options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM043 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: ISA-PARTNER Transaction ID: 850 Qual: Version: Multiple Env ID: Outbound envelope information for ST segment: Transaction Set Identifier.....ST01: Control Number.................ST02: Implementation Convention......ST03: Version............................: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 120 ISA 850 000000001 ____________________________________ 004010______ PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF10=Updt PF5=Name PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM043 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: 850 EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Multiple Env Id: ISA Outbound envelope information for ST segment: Transaction Set Identifier.....ST01: Control Number.................ST02: Implementation Convention......ST03: Version............................: Enter PF1=Help 850 000000001 ___________________________________ ____________ PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Name PF10=Updt PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Name Displays the Name and Address screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Tran Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 121 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Version (protected) A 12-position field that displays the version associated with this header option, if it exists. 2 - 122 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043 The Partner Subsystem Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Transaction Set Identifier (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the transaction set identifier as defined by the standards. Control Number A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence number for generating transaction envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, beginning with the number you enter. Implementation Convention A 35-position field that contains the name of the Implementation Convention Guide that is to be used for compliance rules for this transaction set. Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one transaction with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 123 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042 Purpose This Transaction Information screen (Part 1) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate Transaction Information screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope. The system automatically adds a default transaction record when you add a new Partner Control record. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information screen. The Transaction screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen – UNH Part 1 screen, for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM042 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 1 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: UNA-PARTNER Transaction ID: INVOIC Qual: Version: Multiple Env ID: Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 1: Message Reference Number......UNH01: Message Type..................UNH02: Version Number................UNH02: Version Release Number........UNH02: Controlling Agency............UNH02: Version Association Code......UNH02: Code List Directory Version #.UNH02: Message Type Sub-Function ID..UNH02: Common Access Reference.......UNH03: Status of Transfer............UNH04: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 124 UNA 00000000000001 INVOIC 090 001 ___ ______ ______ ______ ___________________________________ _ (C/F) PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF10=Updt PF5=Part2 PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM042 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 1 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: INVOIC XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Multiple Env Id: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 1: Message Reference Number......UNH01: Message Type..................UNH02: Version Number................UNH02: Version Release Number........UNH02: Controlling Agency............UNH02: Version Association Code......UNH02: Code List Directory Version #.UNH02: Message Type Sub-Function ID..UNH02: Common Access Reference.......UNH03: Status of Transfer............UNH04: Enter PF1=Help 00000000000001 INVOIC 090 001 ED ______ ______ ______ __NNN______________________________ _ (C/F) PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF10=Updt PF5=Part2 PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Part2 Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 125 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. 2 - 126 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042 The Partner Subsystem Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Message Reference Number A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a unique reference number assigned by your division or department. Message Type (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the type of message. Version Number A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the functional group (e.g., D55). Version Release Number A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current version number (e.g., 99B). Controlling Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type (e.g., UN). Version Association Code A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code assigned by the association responsible for the design and maintenance of the message type. Code List Directory Version # A 6-position alphanumeric field the defines the Code List Directory Version Number. This is valid for Syntax Version 4 and greater. Message Type Sub-function ID A 6-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Type Sub-function. This is valid for Syntax Version 4 and greater. Common Access Reference A 35-position alphanumeric field that indicates a key used to relate all transfers of data to the partner currently displayed. Status of Transfer A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates the status of the transfer. Valid values are: C F = = Creation (first) Final (last) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 127 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046 Purpose This Transaction Information screen (Part 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. How to Access Access this screen from the Transaction Information – UNH Part 1 screen by pressing PF5. Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen, for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM046 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 2 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: UNA PARTNER Transaction ID: INVOIC Qual: Version: Multiple Env Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 UNA Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 2: Message Subset id.............UNH05: Message Subset Version Nbr....UNH05: Message Subset Release Nbr....UNH05: Controlling Agency............UNH05: Message Imp. Guideline ID.....UNH06: Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr...UNH06: Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr...UNH06: Controlling Agency............UNH06: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 128 ______________ ___ ___ ___ ______________ ___ ___ ___ PF3=Exit PF4=Part1 PF5=Part3 PF10=Updt PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM046 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 2 YOUR COMPANY User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: INVOIC 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Multiple Env Id: ISA Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 2: Message Subset id.............UNH05: Message Subset Version Nbr....UNH05: Message Subset Release Nbr....UNH05: Controlling Agency............UNH05: Message Imp. Guideline ID.....UNH06: Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr...UNH06: Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr...UNH06: Controlling Agency............UNH06: Enter PF1=Help ______________ ___ ___ ___ ______________ ___ ___ ___ PF3=Exit PF4=Part1 PF5=Part3 PF10=Updt PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Part1 Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 1 screen. PF5=Part3 Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 3 screen. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 129 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name is the name that may help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. 2 - 130 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046 The Partner Subsystem Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Message Subset id A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Identification. Message Subset Version Nbr A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Version Number. Message Subset Release Nbr A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Release Number. Controlling Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this Message Subset. Message Imp. Guideline ID A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline Identification. Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline Version Number. Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline Release Number. Controlling Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this Message Implementation Guideline. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 131 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047 Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047 Purpose This Transaction Information screen (Part 3) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. How to Access Access this screen from the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen by pressing PF5. Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information – UNH Part 3 screen, for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM047 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 3 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: UNA-PARNTER Transaction ID: INVOIC Qual: Version: Multiple Env Id: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 UNA Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 3: Scenario Identification.......UNH07: Scenario Version Nbr..........UNH07: Scenario Release Nbr .........UNH07: Controlling Agency............UNH07: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 132 ______________ ___ ___ ___ PF3=Exit PF4=Part2 PF5=Name PF10=Updt PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM047 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 3 YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: INVOIC 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Version: Multiple Env Id: UNA Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 3: Scenario Identification.......UNH07: Scenario Version Nbr..........UNH07: Scenario Release Nbr .........UNH07: Controlling Agency............UNH07: Enter PF1=Help ______________ ___ ___ ___ PF3=Exit PF4=Part2 PF5=Name PF10=Updt PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Part2 Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen. PF5=Name Displays the next name and address screen for the Partner Profile ID currently displayed. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 133 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). 2 - 134 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047 The Partner Subsystem Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Scenario Identification (reserved for future use) A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario identification. Scenario Version Nbr (reserved for future use) A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario version number. Scenario Release Nbr (reserved for future use) A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario release number. Controlling Agency (reserved for future use) A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this scenario. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 135 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041 Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041 Purpose This Transaction Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen. A separate Transaction Information screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope. When entering this screen, the !!!DFT default record is always the first transaction displayed. A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record. You can modify this record or use it unchanged. Sterling Gentran also gives you the ability to modify the default record itself to create a custom default record. See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). The Transaction screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control Information screen (screen 1). Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen (MHD Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM041 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Part ID: YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 Transaction ID: INVOIC Release: Qual: Version: Multiple Env Id: Outbound envelope information for MHD segment: Message Reference Number......MHD01: Message Type..................MHD02: Release Number................MHD02: Version Number.....................: Version Release Number.............: Controlling Agency.................: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 136 STX 00000000000001 INVOIC 8 (0-9) ANA 001 __ PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF10=Updt PF5=Name PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM041 __________ TRANSACTION INFORMATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Transaction ID: INVOIC XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Release: Version: Multiple Env Id: STX Outbound envelope information for MHD segment: Message Reference Number......MHD01: Message Type..................MHD02: Release Number................MHD02: Version Number.....................: Version Release Number.............: Controlling Agency.................: Enter PF1=Help 00000000000001 INVOIC 8 (0-9) ANA 001 __ PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF10=Updt PF5=Name PF14=Info PF6=Nxt Tran Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Name Displays the next Name and Address screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this Partner ID. PF10=Updt Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 137 The Partner Subsystem Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Transaction ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). Release (protected) A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is displayed only for TRADACOMS transactions. 2 - 138 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041 The Partner Subsystem Version (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers. Multiple Env Id A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces. Message Reference Number A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter a unique reference number assigned by your division or department. Message Type (protected) A 6-position field that contains the Transaction ID. Release Number A 1-position numeric field used to define the release number within the current version number. Valid values are: 0 – 9. Version Number A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the functional group. Version Release Number A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current version number. Controlling Agency A 2-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 139 The Partner Subsystem Name and Address Screen EDIM035 Name and Address Screen EDIM035 Purpose The Name and Address screen enables you to log each trading partner's name, address, telephone number, and personal contact name so that you can reference the information and use it for reporting purposes. How to Access Access the Name and Address screen in either of these two ways: • Type 5 to select the Name and Address option from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Name and Address screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM035 1.2.5_____ Partner..: NAME AND ADDRESS EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER ISA-PARTNER XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Name...: Address: EXAMPLE_OF_AN_ISA_PARTNER__________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ City...: ______________________________ State..: ____ Zip....: _____ - ____ Country Code: __ Contact: ______________________________ Phone..: ( ___ ) ___ - ____ x ____ International Dial Code: 000 Enter PF1=Help 2 - 140 PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Name2 PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Name and Address Screen EDIM035 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM035 1.2.5_____ NAME AND ADDRESS YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY User/Part: PART (PART,USER) XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Name...: Address: XYZ_COMPUTER_COMPANY_______________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ___________________________________ City...: ______________________________ State..: ____ Zip....: _____ - ____ Country Code: __ Contact: ______________________________ Phone..: ( ___ ) ___ - ____ x ____ International Dial Code: 000 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Name2 PF6=NXT NAME PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Name2 Displays the second name and address screeen for the Partner ID currently displayed.. PF9=Add Adds the new name and address information for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates an existing name and address information, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF11=Del Deletes the name and address record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. For Relationship Mode PF6=NXT NAME Displays the next Partner ID record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 141 The Partner Subsystem Name and Address Screen EDIM035 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Partner (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. User (protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Partner (protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Part A 4-position alphabetic field indicating which portion of the user/partner relationship this record contains information. Valid values are: Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Part=Partner name and address information User=User name and address information Name A 35-position alphanumeric field used to describe the trading partner's business name. This name is displayed above the Partner IDs on other Partner Maintenance screens. 2 - 142 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Name and Address Screen EDIM035 The Partner Subsystem Address This field has five lines. Each line is a 35-position alphanumeric field used to indicate the trading partner's business address. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. City A 30-position alphabetic field used to enter the trading partner's city. State A 4-position field used to enter the trading partner's state. Zip Two fields. A 5-position numeric field followed by a 4-position numeric field. Used to enter the trading partner's Zip code, and extended Zip code. Country Code A 2-position alphabetic field used to enter the trading partner's country code. Contact A 30-position alphanumeric field used to designate the name of a personal contact at this trading partner's office. Phone Four alphanumeric fields that are used to enter the trading partner's telephone number (area code – 3 positions, number – 7 positions, and internal extension – 4 positions). International Dial Code A 3-position numeric field used to enter the trading partner's international dial code (must be numeric). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 143 The Partner Subsystem Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036 Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036 Purpose The Name and Address Part 2 screen enables you to enter an e-mail address so that you can reference the information and use it for reporting purposes. How to Access Access the screen by pressing PF5 on the Name and Address Screen (EDIM035). Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Name and Address Part 2 screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM036 __________ Partner..: IBM E-mail Address: Enter PF1=Help 2 - 144 NAME AND ADDRESS - PART 2 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: EDI_COODINATOR@SIBM.COM_______________________ PF3=Exit PF4=Name1 PF5=UserDef PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036 The Partner Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM036 __________ User: User/Part: NAME AND ADDRESS - PART 2 TRADING_PARTNER ID PART (PART,USER) E-mail Address: Partner: XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 STERLING_COMM EDI_COODINATOR@STERCOMM.COM_______________________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Name1 PF5=UserDef PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF6=Nxt Name PF14=Info Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Name1 Displays the Name and Address Information screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=User Def Displays the User Definition screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF9=Add Adds the new name and address part 2 information definition for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates an existing name and address part 2 information definition, as defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF11=Del Deletes the name and address part 2 record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 145 The Partner Subsystem Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036 For Relationship Mode PF6=Nxt Name Displays the next Partner ID record. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Partner (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. User (protected) A 15-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Partner (protected) A 15-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Part A 4-position alphabetic field indicating which portion of the user/partner relationship this record contains information. Valid values are: Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Part=Partner name and address information User=User name and address information E-Mail Address A 50-position alphanumeric field used to enter an e-mail address for the trading partner. The e-mail address is displayed on the Expected Acknowledgment Monitor Report (EDID510). 2 - 146 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036 The Partner Subsystem Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic "Using Underscore Substitution Characters" in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 147 The Partner Subsystem User Defined Screen EDIM045 User Defined Screen EDIM045 Purpose The User Defined screen provides you with a place to maintain any additional information you need on file for a specified trading partner. For example, you might enter record or field definitions using your own structure, as they relate to the specified trading partner. Or, you could use this screen to define an alternative personal contact and phone number to be used in case the primary contact for the specified trading partner cannot be reached. The data residing on this record is left up to you to define. You can have multiple user-defined records for each trading partner, and can use your own numbering scheme for each access. $TCR Record ID is reserved by Sterling Gentran:Basic. This user-defined record provides transmission control information for generating the $TCR record during envelope generation. See the topic “Outbound Data Mapping” in Chapter 3 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/ OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide and the topic “Outbound EDI Databank Extract Program” in Chapter 5 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for more details on using the $TCR record. How to Access Access the User Defined screen in either of the following ways: • Type S to select User Defined from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the User Defined screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. 2 - 148 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User Defined Screen EDIM045 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM045 1.2.6_____ Part ID..: Record ID: User Data.: USER DEFINED EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER ISA-PARTNER AP01 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 1...5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0 CALL_MS._JONES_AT_212-555-5555_IF_THERE_ IS_A_PROBLEM_WITH_INCOMING_PO'S.________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ _____________________________________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Name2 PF5=Data Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info PF6=Nxt User Relationship Mode EDIM045 1.2.6_____ User.....: Record ID: User Data.: USER DEFINED YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY ____ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 1...5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0 ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ _____________________________________ USER NOT FOUND Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Name2 PF5=Data Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt User 2 - 149 The Partner Subsystem User Defined Screen EDIM045 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. To display a different user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed, change the Record ID number, and press Enter. PF4=Name2 Displays the Name and Address part 2 screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Data Sep Displays the Data Separation screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Nxt User Displays the next user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed. PF9=Add Adds the user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the user-defined record for the specified Partner ID. PF11=Del Deletes the user-defined record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 2 - 150 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User Defined Screen EDIM045 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Record ID A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter a user-specified record type defining each record you add for the trading partner. User Data This field consists of 6 lines you can use to define reference information for the Partner ID specified: 5 lines of a 40-position alphanumeric field and 1 line of a 37-position alphanumeric field. You can use these fields to enter any additional data that you need for this Partner ID. The information in these fields is not used by Sterling Gentran:Basic for processing. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 151 The Partner Subsystem Data Separation Screen EDIM050 Data Separation Screen EDIM050 Purpose The Data Separation screen enables you to set up data separation parameters for each inbound and outbound processing run. Data is separated into a maximum of 899 staging areas for direct transmission, transmission to networks (if outbound), or 99 staging areas for your different applications (if inbound). Staged data can be subsequently added to with additional Sterling Gentran:Basic processing steps. You can have multiple output data separation records for each trading partner. Inbound data splitting enables you to separate incoming documents for processing by your application files. Documents can be separated by functional group, transaction set, by test/ production, or by version. Outbound Data Splitting enables you to separate outgoing data for transmission to your trading partners. Outbound data can only be separated at the partner level. Typically, data in outbound split files are run through your communications software. Only applicable if used with the DIRECTED OUTPUT FILES global parameter. How to Access Access the Data Separation screen in either of the following ways: • Type 7 to select Data Separation from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Data Separation screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. 2 - 152 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Separation Screen EDIM050 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM050 1.2.7_____ Part ID: DATA SEPARATION TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY VENDOR-1 Level.................: Direction.............: Level ID..............: Release...............: Test/Production.......: Version...............: Inbound Application ID: Outbound Network......: Output File Identifiers: 0002 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: T (P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction) I (I=Inbound, O=Outbound) 810___ (Group ID or Transaction ID) _ _ (T/P) ____________ __________ __________ GENTRAN:Realtime Option Priority ____ ____ ___ _ ____ ____ PF3=Exit PF4=User Def PF5=Error Rej PF6=Next Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info Relationship Mode EDIM050 1.2.7_____ User...: DATA SEPARATION YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY Level.................: Direction.............: Level ID..............: Release...............: Test/Production.......: Version...............: Inbound Application ID: Outbound Network......: Output File Identifiers: 0002 ____ ____ ____ Enter PF1=Help ____ ____ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 THEIR COMPANY NAME Partner: THEIR COMPANY T (P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction) I (I=Inbound, O=Outbound) 810___ (Group ID or Transaction ID) _ _ (T/P) ____________ __________ __________ GENTRAN:Realtime Option Priority ____ ____ ___ _ ____ ____ PF3=Exit PF4=User Def PF5=Error Rej PF6=Next Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 153 The Partner Subsystem Data Separation Screen EDIM050 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=User Def Displays the User Defined screen for the Partner ID selected. PF5=Error Rej Displays the Error Rejection screen for the Partner ID currently displayed. PF6=Next Sep Displays the next output data separation record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF9=Add Adds the output data separation record for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the output data separation record for the specified Partner ID. PF11=Del Deletes the output data separation record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 2 - 154 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Separation Screen EDIM050 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Level A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the level of data separation for this file. If the Direction field contains the value O (Outbound), you must type the value P (Interchange). P G T = = = Interchange Group Transaction Direction A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the transmission direction of the data being separated. If the Level field contains the value G or T, you must type the value I (Inbound). Valid values are: I O = = Inbound Outbound Level ID This field is used ONLY for inbound splitting. A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter either the functional group or the Transaction ID. If the Level field contains the value G (Group), use this field to define the functional group. If the Level field contains the value T (Transaction), use this field to define the transaction set. Leave this field blank if the Level field contains the value P (Partner). For example: Functional Groups Transaction Sets PO, IN, or FA 850, 810, or 997 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 155 The Partner Subsystem Data Separation Screen EDIM050 Release A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is displayed only for TRADACOMS transaction. Test/Production A 1-position alphabetic field used to separate test data from production data. This flag is only used at the transaction level, and is used in combination with the Test/Production flag on the Transaction record. This field is used for inbound data only. Valid values are: T P = = Test data Production data Only applicable if used with the TRANSACTION TEST/PRODUCTION SPLIT global parameter. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the standard Version ID to be used for splitting inbound data by version. This field is optional for group and transaction, and is NOT used at the interchange level. Only applicable if used with the GROUP VERSION SPLIT or TRANSACTION VERSION SPLIT global parameters. Inbound Application ID A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the name of an inbound application. This field must be completed at the transaction level when using ##INSTREAM in the Inbound Mapper. Outbound Network A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the final destination for the outbound application, which is used by the Outbound EDI Data Extract program. The network name can be any meaningful name that is used to group outbound data that is going to the same destination. See the topic “Outbound EDI Databank Program” in Chapter 5 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide. Output File Identifiers (required) Two rows of five fields. Each field is a 4-position numeric field used to enter an identifier for the file to which the data should be written. Fields must be entered left to right, top to bottom. Valid values are: 1 – 99 if the direction is equal to “I,” and 1 – 99 and 200 – 999 if the direction is equal to “0.” Sterling Gentran:Realtime Installation Only Option A 3-position numeric field that contains the Realtime option number for this data separation record. The option number can be either an Immediate option or a Queue option. 2 - 156 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Separation Screen EDIM050 The Partner Subsystem Priority A 1-digit numeric field indicating how long you want to delay processing the data for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime option. Valid values are 1 through 9. Note: If the option is an Immediate option, a priority 1 causes the process to be started immediately. Each priority greater than 1 causes a 10-second time delay over the previous priority. For example, a priority of 2 results in a 10-second delay while a priority of 9 results in an 80second delay. If the option is a Queue option, the priority is ignored and the data is written to the queue file immediately. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 157 The Partner Subsystem Error Rejection Screen EDIM055 Error Rejection Screen EDIM055 Purpose The Error Rejection screen enables you to designate specific data transmissions to be rejected, based upon errors you specify as unacceptable. You can have multiple error rejection records for each trading partner. Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ERROR CONTROL global parameter. The ability to add Partner Error Rejection depends on the settings on the Error Message and Control File as follows: “” “A” “D” “P” Specific or global rejection records can be added. No partner rejection records can be added. Only global partner rejection records can be added. Only specific partner rejection records can be added. How to Access Access the Error Rejection screen in either of the following ways: • Type 8 to select Error Rejection from the Partner Selection menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Error Rejection screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. 2 - 158 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Error Rejection Screen EDIM055 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM055 1.2.8_____ Part ID: ERROR REJECTION EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Level..........: Level ID.......: Release........: Error Number...: Version........: G (P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction) I_____ (Group ID or Transaction ID) _ 00689 ____________ Reject Inbound.: Reject Outbound: Y Y Enter PF1=Help (Y/N) (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=Data Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info PF6=Next Err Relationship Mode EDIM055 1.2.8_____ User...: ERROR REJECTION YOUR COMPANY NAME YOUR COMPANY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Level..........: Level ID.......: Release........: Error Number...: Version........: G (P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction) I_____ (Group ID or Transaction ID) _ 00689 ____________ Reject Inbound.: Reject Outbound: Y Y Enter PF1=Help (Y/N) (Y/N) PF3=Exit PF4=Data Sep PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Next Err 2 - 159 The Partner Subsystem Error Rejection Screen EDIM055 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Data Sep Displays the Data Separation screen for the Partner ID selected. PF6=Next Err Displays the next error rejection record defined for the Partner ID displayed. PF9=Add Adds the error rejection record for the Partner ID displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the error rejection record for the specified Partner ID. PF11=Del Deletes the error rejection record for the specified Partner ID. PF14=Info Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information on this screen was created or last changed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode 2 - 160 Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Error Rejection Screen EDIM055 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Part ID (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. (Partner Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the partner name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Level A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the level that this error occurs. Valid values are: P G T = = = Interchange: Error occurs on interchange header or trailer. Group: Error occurs on group header or trailer. Transaction: Error occurs on transaction header or trailer or within the actual transaction. Level ID A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Group or Transaction ID for this error. If the Level field contains value P, Level ID must be spaces. Release A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field displays only for TRADACOMS transaction. Error Number A 5-position alphanumeric field used to enter the number of the error to be rejected. This number must be on Sterling Gentran:Basic Error Message file. Version A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Version ID of the standard to be used for rejection of errors by version. Only applicable if used with system configuration options, Interchange Version (outbound), Group Version, Transaction Version. Reject Inbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate to Sterling Gentran:Basic whether to reject inbound data with this error. Y N = = Yes, reject inbound data with the error indicated. No, do not reject inbound data with the error indicated. Reject Outbound A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate to Sterling Gentran:Basic whether to reject outbound data with this error. Y N = = Yes, reject outbound data with the error indicated. No, do not reject outbound data with the error indicated. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 161 The Partner Subsystem Copy All Records Screen EDIM060 Copy All Records Screen EDIM060 Purpose The Copy All Records screen enables you to copy records from an existing trading partner to a newly added trading partner. How to Access Access the Copy All Records screen in either of these two ways: • Type 9 to select Copy All Records from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.2.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this is active only after a partner has been established). To copy all records from an existing trading partner and duplicate them for a new trading partner, from the Partner Selection Menu, perform the following: 1. For Partner/Qualifier mode, type the new, unique Partner Profile ID in the Part ID field. Then, type the Partner ID of the existing trading partner from which you are copying in the records in the Copy ID field. OR For Relationship mode, type the new, unique User ID in the User field and the Partner ID in the Part ID field. Then, type the User/Partner ID of the existing trading partner from which you are copying the records in the Copy User field. 2. Type 9 (Copy All Records) in the selection field to initiate the COPY ALL feature. The system displays the Copy All Records screen, which lists records copied to the new Partner Profile ID. Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Copy All Records screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes. 2 - 162 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Copy All Records Screen EDIM060 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM060 1.2.9_____ COPY ALL RECORDS XXX EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER Partner Id: BG-PARTNER Copy Partner YOUR COMPANY Record Type --------------------------------- Qual.: Qual.: Records Added ------------- Header Data Control Data Group Information Transactions Name and Address User Defined Data Output Data Separation Error Rejection Control ----- TOTAL ----- 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Duplicates ---------- 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 4 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 COPY-ALL SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED. Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit Relationship Mode EDIM060 1.2.9_____ COPY ALL RECORDS XXX YOUR COMPANY NAME User...: YOUR COMPANY Copy User..: APLS Record Type --------------------------------- 06/01/2011 12:00:00 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Partner: VENDOR-1 Partner...: BG Records Added ------------- Header Data Control Data Group Information Transactions Name and Address User Defined Data Output Data Separation Error Rejection Control ----- TOTAL ----- 0 1 2 2 2 0 12 0 19 Duplicates ---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 COPY-ALL SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED. Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 163 The Partner Subsystem Copy All Records Screen EDIM060 Screen Actions To process the Copy All function, press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays a list of all record types that includes the number of each record type added to the new Partner ID (as copied from the existing Partner ID) and the number of duplicate records not added to the new Partner ID (if they exist). Sterling Gentran also displays a Copy All confirmation message. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Field (Partner Name – protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the partner name, as found on the Name and Address record. The partner name can help to further identify the Partner ID. (User Name protected) A 35-position alphabetic field displaying the user name, if it exists on file for the User/Partner ID. Partner Id (protected) Displays the Partner ID you have entered or selected. User/Partner (protected) Two 15-position alphabetic fields that display the User/ Partner ID you have entered or selected. Note: The Partner ID and Qualifier make up the key for all associated records. 2 - 164 Relationship Mode Description IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Copy All Records Screen EDIM060 The Partner Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Field Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. Copy User/ Partner Copy Partner Displays the Partner ID of an existing trading partner from which you are copying all records. Qual (protected) Displays the Qualifier (if applicable) associated with the new Partner ID from the Copy Partner field. Relationship Mode Description Displays the User/Partner ID of an existing trading partner from which you are copying all records. Record Type (protected) Displays each record type available in the partner profile. Records Added (protected) Displays the number of records, for each record type, that were successfully added to the new Partner ID. Duplicates (protected) Displays the number of existing records, for each record type, that Sterling Gentran:Basic found for the new Partner ID to which you were copying. If a duplicate record is found, the original record existing for the new Partner ID is not overwritten by the new (Copy From) record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 165 The Partner Subsystem Partner Cross Reference Menu EDIM009 Partner Cross Reference Menu EDIM009 Purpose The Partner Cross Reference Menu contains two menu options to permit viewing the Partner Cross Reference file by X-Ref ID and Qualifier or by Partner ID and Qualifier. This screen is valid only for Partner/. How to Access Access the Partner Cross Reference Menu, if you are in Partner/Qualifier mode, in either of these two ways: • On the Partner Maintenance Menu, type 3 to select the Partner Cross Reference Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Partner Cross Reference Menu. EDIM009 1.3_______ PARTNER CROSS REFERENCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ Enter PF1=Help 1. Partner Cross Reference by X–Ref ID 2. Partner Cross Reference by Partner ID PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff 2 - 166 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Cross Reference Menu EDIM009 The Partner Subsystem Menu Options The Partner Cross Reference Menu contains two options, which are listed below. The list of menu options, as well as a brief description of each option follows. Menu Option Description 1. Partner Cross Reference by X-Ref ID Enables you to perform a search by X-Ref ID to display and maintain a particular trading partner cross-reference. 2. Partner Cross Reference by Partner ID Enables you to perform a search by Partner ID to display and maintain a particular trading partner cross-reference. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1 or 2) to select a menu option. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 167 The Partner Subsystem Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008 Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008 Purpose EDI data can have two Partner IDs in the envelopes: one for the interchange-level and a second for the group-level. Often, these Partner IDs are DUNS numbers, network telephone numbers, access codes and/or communication IDs. Remembering your trading partners’ numbers (literally hundreds) can be difficult and confusing for those who have to maintain the file. The Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen, which is valid only for Partner/, provides you with the capability to reduce the number of partner records for each trading partner and assign ONE Partner ID that is meaningful to you. How to Access Access the Cross-Reference by X-Ref ID screen in either of two ways: • Type 1 to select Partner Cross Reference by X-Ref ID from the Partner Cross Reference Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Cross-Reference by X-Ref ID screen. Add Delete Info Update Select EDIM008 1.3.1_____ CROSS-REFERENCE BY X-REF ID XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Starting X-Ref...: ___________________________________ A _ X-Ref Partner ___________________________________ ___________________________________ Qual ____ ____ Div ____ _ X-Ref Partner ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ____ ____ ____ _ X-Ref Partner ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ____ ____ ____ _ X-Ref Partner ___________________________________ ___________________________________ ____ ____ ____ Enter PF1=Help PF2=XRefP PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 2 - 168 PF3=Exit PF5=Maint IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008 The Partner Subsystem Screen Actions To search for a particular cross-reference, type the Cross Reference ID or a partial ID in the Starting X-Ref field, and press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays the first cross-reference and Partner ID matching the search key you entered. The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Cross Reference screen. The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action... Associated with this screen action... Do this... To add a cross-reference entry to the Cross Reference File for an existing Partner ID Add Type A in the A field, type the new cross-reference and Qualifier (this becomes the search Partner ID and Qualifier), type the Partner ID and Qualifier of a Partner ID that exists on the partner profile in the Partner fields, and press Enter. To delete a cross-reference entry on the Cross Reference File Delete Type D in the A field next to the desired cross-reference, and press Enter. Remember, you are only deleting the cross-reference on the Cross Reference File, NOT the Partner ID as it exists on your partner profile. Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. To update a cross-reference entry in the Cross Reference file Update Type U in the A field corresponding to the appropriate cross reference, modify the Partner ID and Qualifier, and press Enter. To select a Partner ID from the cross-reference to maintain Select Type S in the A field next to the crossreference that is linked to the Partner ID, and press PF5. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 169 The Partner Subsystem Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=XrefP Displays the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen. To access, type S in the A field next to the Partner ID to view, and press PF2=XrefP. PF5=Maint Displays the Partner Selection Menu (for the Partner ID selected) from which you can perform partner profile maintenance. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Starting X-Ref A 35-position alphanumeric field used to specify where you want to begin examining the cross-referenced Partner ID listing. To specify a search, type the X-Ref ID, or partial XRef ID. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. 2 - 170 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008 The Partner Subsystem A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Valid values include the following codes: A = D S = = I = U = Add: add a new cross-reference and Qualifier for an existing Partner ID and Qualifier. Delete: delete an existing cross-reference. Select: select a cross-reference listing from which to perform Partner ID maintenance. Info: Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Update: update an existing cross-reference. X-Ref A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter or display the X-Ref ID cross-reference for a specific Partner ID. Note: The values in the X-Ref and X-Ref Qual fields make up the key, which cannot be updated. If you need to change these values you should delete the old record and add a new one. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. X-Ref Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the X-Ref ID cross-reference Qualifier associated with the X-Ref ID cross-reference Partner ID, if applicable. Note: The values in the X-Ref and X-Ref Qual fields make up the key, which cannot be updated. If you need to change these values you should delete the old record and add a new one. X-Ref Div A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the cross-reference is added. The default value is 000. Partner A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. This is the Partner ID to which you are cross-referencing. Partner Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier (if applicable) associated with the Partner ID as it exists on the partner profile. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 171 The Partner Subsystem Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006 Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006 Purpose The Cross Reference by Partner ID, valid only for Partner/, screen provides you with an alternative view of the Partner Cross Reference file. This screen provides you with the ability to see what XRef ID entries have been established for a particular trading partner. If you need to add, update, or delete a cross-reference record, use the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen. Access the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen directly from the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen. Also, you can access the Partner Maintenance screen for a Partner ID directly from the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen. How to Access Access the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen in any one of the following ways: • On the Partner Cross Reference Menu, type 2 to select the Partner Cross Reference by Partner ID screen, and press Enter. • Type S to select the desired Partner ID on the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen and press PF2. • Type 1.3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen. Info Select EDIM006 1.3.2_____ CROSS REFERENCE BY PARTNER XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner ID: VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual: ____ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Cross Reference ID 100200345 1003347899000 121212121 5136666666 6147937000 END OF CROSS REFERENCE Enter PF1=Help PF2=XRefX PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 2 - 172 Qual ZZ ZZ ZZ PF3=Exit Div 000 000 000 000 000 PF5=Maint PF6=Nxt Part IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006 The Partner Subsystem Screen Actions To view the X-Ref IDs for a specific Partner ID, type the Partner ID and Qualifier in the appropriate fields at the top of the screen. The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Cross Reference by Partner screen. The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. Associated with this screen action... To perform this action... Do this... Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. To select a Cross Reference ID to maintain. Select Type S in the A field next to the desired Cross Reference ID, and press PF2. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=XRefX Displays the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen for the Cross Reference ID selected. Note: Pressing PF2 without selecting a specific Cross Reference ID transfers you back to the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen using the first cross-reference record on the Cross Reference by Partner screen for positioning. PF5=Maint Displays the Partner Selection Menu for the Partner ID listed at the top of the screen from which you can perform partner profile maintenance. PF6=Nxt Part Displays the Cross Reference IDs for the next Partner ID found on the partner profile. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 173 The Partner Subsystem Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. This is the Partner ID to which you are cross-referencing. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID Qualifier (if applicable) associated with the Partner ID as it exists on the partner profile. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to the Cross Reference ID and press PF5 to select a cross-reference listing from which to perform cross-reference maintenance. Type I (Info) next to the Cross Reference ID and press Enter to display the date, time and user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Cross Reference ID (protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the cross-reference identifications for a specific Partner ID. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the X-Ref ID (if applicable). Div (protected) A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the cross-reference is added. The default value is 000. 2 - 174 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009 Purpose The Trading Relationship Menu contains two menu options to permit viewing the relationship file by EDI ID or by user/partner. This screen is valid only for Relationship mode. How to Access Access the Trading Partner Relationship Menu in either of these two ways: • On the Partner Maintenance Menu, type 3 to select Trading Partner Relationship and press Enter. • Type 1.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship Menu. EDIM009 1.3_______ TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID 2. Trading Partner Relationship by User/Partner Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 175 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009 Menu Options The Trading Partner Relationship Menu contains two selections, which are described in the following table. Menu Option Description 1. Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID Enables you to perform a search by EDI ID to display and maintain a particular trading partner relationship. 2. Trading Partner Relationship by user/partner Enables you to perform a search by user/ partner to display and maintain a particular trading partner relationship. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1 or 2) and press Enter to perform the selected function. 2 - 176 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 Purpose The Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen provides you the capability of uniquely identifying relational conditions with your trading partners. By combining the Sender and Receiver ID with Qualifiers and associating this combination to the user/partner Profile ID, a unique relationship can be defined. This screen is valid only for Relationship mode. How to Access Access the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen in either of these two ways: • Type 1 to select Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID from the Trading Partner Relationship Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen. Add Delete Info Update Select EDIM023 1.3.1_____ TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP BY EDI ID XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 USER EDI ID.........: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ Div: ___ Starting Part EDI ID: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ A _ Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________ _ Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________ _ Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________ _ Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________ END OF RELATIONSHIP FILE Enter PF1=Help PF2=TPPrt PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd STATUS IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide ADD: 000 DEL: 000 UPD: 00 PF5=Maint PF6=Nxt User 2 - 177 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 Screen Actions To search for a particular User EDI ID, type the User EDI ID or partial User EDI ID information in the User EDI ID field and press Enter. Sterling Gentran will display the first user that matches the search key or partial search key you entered. To search for a particular User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combination, type the User EDI ID in the User EDI ID field and type the full or partial, Partner EDI ID in the first PART EDI ID field and press Enter. The system will display the first Trading Partner Relationship that matches the search key you entered. The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Trading Partner Relationship screen. The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action... 2 - 178 Associated with this screen action... Do this... To add a cross-reference entry to the trading partner Relationship file for an existing Partner ID Add Type A in the A field, type the new Partner EDI ID in Partner EDI ID and Qual, type the existing User/Partner ID in User/ Partner, and then press Enter. To add a new relationship entry to the trading partner Relationship file for an existing User/Partner ID Add Type the new User EDI ID in User EDI ID and Qual. Type A in the A field, type a new Partner EDI ID in Partner EDI ID and Qual, type the existing User/Partner ID in User/Partner, and then press Enter. To delete a trading partner relationship entry on the trading partner Relationship file Delete Make sure you are on the correct User EDI ID then type D in the A field next to the desired Partner EDI ID, and press Enter. Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. To update a trading partner relationship entry in the Trading Partner Relationship file Update Type U in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Partner EDI ID, modify the User/Partner, and press Enter. To select a user/partner profile from the trading partner relationship field to which you want to perform maintenance Select Make sure you are on the correct User EDI ID and then type S in the A field next to the desired Partner EDI ID that is linked to the user/partner profile. Then, press the PF5 key. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 Associated with this screen action... To perform this action... To view other User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combinations that share this User/Partner ID Select The Partner Subsystem Do this... Make sure you are on the correct User EDI ID and then Type S in the A field next to the desired Partner EDI ID that is linked to the User/Partner ID, and press the PF2 key. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=TPPrt Displays the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen (starts with the user/partner selected. PF5=Maint Displays the Partner Selection Menu (for the User/Partner ID selected) from which you can perform partner profile maintenance. PF6=Nxt User Displays the user EDI and Partner ID starting with the next User EDI ID. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 179 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 USER EDI ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter or display the User EDI ID portion of the user/trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the User EDI ID, if applicable. Div A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the trading partner relationship is added. The default value is 000. Starting Part EDI ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to specify where you want to being examining the partner relationship listing. To specify a search, type the Partner EDI ID, or a partial Partner EDI ID. This will be paired with the User EDI ID to position within the list. The display will begin at this relationship or the nearest matching relationship. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. (Starting Part EDI ID) Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Starting Partner EDI ID, if applicable. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Valid values include the following codes: 2 - 180 A = D S = = I = U = Add: add a new trading partner relationship for an existing User/ Partner ID. Delete: delete an existing trading partner relationship. Select: select a trading partner relationship from which to perform User/Partner ID maintenance. Info: Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Update: update an existing trading partner relationship. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023 The Partner Subsystem Partner EDI ID A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner relationship EDI ID portion of the user/trading partner relationship for a specific user/partner on the partner profile. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. User/Partner (user portion) A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the user portion of the User/Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. User/Partner (partner portion) A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner portion of the User/ Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. Qual A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID, if applicable. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 181 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 Purpose The Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen provides you with an alternative view of the partner Relationship file. This screen provides you with the ability to see which relationship entries have been established for a user/partner combination. This screen is valid only for Relationship mode. Note: If you need to add, update, or delete a relationship record, use the Trading Partner by EDI ID screen. How to Access Access the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen using any one these methods: • Type 3 to select Trading Partner Relationship by User/Partner from the Trading Partner Relationship Menu and press Enter. • Type 1.3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. • On the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen, type S next to the Partner EDI ID User/Partner field and press PF2. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen. Info Select EDIM024 1.3.2_____ TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP BY PARTNER Start User/Partner: YOUR_COMPANY___ / A User EDI ID/Partner EDI ID _ ABLANK VENDOR-1 _ YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1_______ Qual Div 000 000 000 ZZ _ _ _ END OF CROSS REFERENCE RECORDS Enter PF1=Help PF2=TPEDI PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 2 - 182 PF5=Maint PF6=Nxt Part IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 The Partner Subsystem Screen Actions To view the relationship records for a specific User/Partner ID, enter the User/Partner ID in the appropriate fields at the top of the screen. The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen. The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. Associated with this screen action... To perform this action... Do this... Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. To select the User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combination from Trading Partner Relationship File and return to Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID. Select Make sure you are on the correct User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID. Then, type S in the A field next to the desired User EDI ID and press PF2. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=TPEDI Displays the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen (begins with the User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID selected). PF6=Nxt Part Displays the User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combination (begins with the next User Partner ID). Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 183 The Partner Subsystem Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Start User (user portion) A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the user portion of the User/Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. Start Partner (partner portion) A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner portion of the User/ Partner ID that exists on the partner profile. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S to select a trading partner relationship for which to perform User/Partner ID maintenance and press PF5. Type I (for Info) and press Enter to display the date, time and user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. User EDI ID (protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the User EDI ID portion of the user/ trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character (USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. User EDI ID Qualifier (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the User EDI ID, if applicable. Partner EDI ID (protected) A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the Partner EDI ID portion of the user/ trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile. Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character. To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the defined partner header record. See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this feature. 2 - 184 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 The Partner Subsystem Div (protected) A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the trading partner relationship is added. The default value is 000. Partner EDI ID Qualifier (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the Partner EDI ID, if applicable. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 2 - 185 The Partner Subsystem 2 - 186 Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 3 The Standards Subsystem Overview This chapter contains the following topics related to the Standards subsystem. Topic Page Before You Begin .................................................................................................................. 3-2 Standards Maintenance Menu ........................................................EDIM100 ....................... 3-8 Version Directory............................................................................EDIM111 ..................... 3-11 Version Screen ................................................................................EDIM110 ..................... 3-14 Version/Transaction Directory........................................................EDIM113 ..................... 3-17 Transaction Directory .....................................................................EDIM121/EDIM122.... 3-21 Transaction Screen..........................................................................EDIM120 ..................... 3-27 Segments Screen.............................................................................EDIM130 ..................... 3-33 Segment Element Screen ................................................................EDIM140 ..................... 3-38 Segment Element............................................................................EDIM141 ..................... 3-44 Segment Element Activity Screen..................................................EDIM150 ..................... 3-49 Data Element Definition Screen .....................................................EDIM160 ..................... 3-54 Standard Code Menu ......................................................................EDIM170 ..................... 3-58 Standard Code Directory ................................................................EDIM171 ..................... 3-60 Standard Code Maintenance Screen ...............................................EDIM172 ..................... 3-63 Code Maintenance List Options Screen .........................................EDIM173 ..................... 3-66 Transaction in Use Screen ..............................................................EDIM180 ..................... 3-68 Standard Association Screen ..........................................................EDIM105 ..................... 3-72 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-1 The Standards Subsystem Before You Begin Before You Begin What are Standards? To use EDI effectively, trading partners must use industry-agreed-upon guidelines on what data they transmit and how that data is arranged. Standards are those guidelines by which trading partners conduct electronic data interchange (EDI). Standards, though permanent and uniform, continually evolve to meet changing requirements of the individuals and organizations that use them. However, even with the evolution of EDI standards to meet changing needs, occasionally trading partners require unique applications of these standards. Standards agencies issue updates to standards versions during regular intervals; they might issue small changes, fixes, and additions intermittently. EDI users need to be able to respond to these intermittent changes and non-standards communications quickly and easily. The Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem has been designed to support the various national and international EDI Standards, such as, ASC X12, UN/EDIFACT, TRADACOMS, ODETTE, and GENCOD. Because of conflicts with Version/Release among the various Standards Controlling Agencies, Sterling Gentran Agency is used along with Version ID to uniquely identify a standard. The agency is a three position code that represents the Controlling Agency or board that is responsible for issuing and maintaining the standard. Sterling Gentran uses the following default agency codes: X ASC X12 UN UN/EDIFACT A TRADACOMS T TDCC F Fixed Format A sample usage would be ASC X12 and UN/EDIFACT both have a version 002 release 001. The ASC X12 version is implemented as ‘002001’ with an agency of ‘X.’ The UN/EDIFACT version is implemented as ‘002001’ with an agency of ‘UN.’ Sterling Gentran encompasses provisions to support subsets and localized standards. These standards are based on other standards, but have been customized for specific industry or region usage. The version is 12 positions and is comprised of the version number for three characters, version release for the characters, and version association for six characters. The version association identifies the subset. For example, UCS version 003010UCS is a subset of ASC X12 003010. The version association is UCS. EDIFICE version 001921ED3 is a subset of UN/ EDIFACT 001921. The version association is ED3. The controlling agency for these two subsets are different from the original versions. To identify the agency to Sterling Gentran and maintain uniqueness for these subsets, the Association file contains a cross-reference between the version association and agency. The Editors in the standard loading process use this file to determine the agency. If a version association is present, the association file is read to retrieve the agency. If no version association is present, the default agency values identified above is used. Any time a version is added that contains a version association, an appropriate Association/Agency record must be added via the EDIM105 – Standard Association screen. 3-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Standards Subsystem For our example, an association record is set up for 003010UCS as Association = UCS and Agency = T, for 001921ED3 as Association = ED3 and Agency = UN. This tells the Editor to use agency ‘T’ for any version that has a version association of ‘UCS,’ ‘UN’ for any version that has a version association of ‘ED3.’ The agency to be used for an association should reflect the controlling agency. See the topics “Inbound Processing Programs” and “Outbound Processing Programs” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for more information about using agency and association for standard loading in the Editors and Mappers. Several international standards, such as ODETTE, Brokernet and TRADACOMS include multiple definitions of segments and elements within the same version. Sterling Gentran:Basic has been structured to support up to 100 different definitions of a Segment ID or Element ID per version. A segment version is associated with Segment ID and an element version is associated with Element ID. The majority of segments and elements use a segment/element version of ‘00.’ If additional definitions are needed, versions ‘01’ – ‘99’ are available. Sterling Gentran:Basic uses the segment/ element version to identify the correct definition when building maps or compliance editing interchanges. Sterling Gentran:Basic supports code lists for code validation in the mappers and compliance Editors. Four files are used to contain these code values. File 1 contains supported code lists for elements with a maximum length of 5 or less. File 2 contains supported code lists for elements with a maximum length of 6 – 10. File 3 contains supported code lists for elements with a maximum length of 11 – 20. File 4 contains supported code lists for elements with a maximum length of 21 – 40. Using the Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem, your EDI coordinator can: • Specify EDI standards transactions for use in data translation. • Examine transaction standards, in full detail. • Perform interim maintenance to standard transactions. • Create special transactions for use in unique trading partner communication. The Standards subsystem contains all the screens you need to view, add, change, or delete data relating to EDI standards. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-3 The Standards Subsystem Before You Begin What is in this Chapter? The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with the reference information you need to use the Standards subsystem of Sterling Gentran:Basic. This chapter is divided into several sections. Each section is comprised of all reference information relating to a particular screen. In each section, you will find the following reference information: • The purpose of the screen • Instructions on how to access the screen • An example of the screen • Descriptions of screen actions, when applicable • A list of the valid function keys for the screen, as well as descriptions of each key • A description and valid values for each field on the screen How to Access the Standards Subsystem Access all the screens in the Standards subsystem from the Standards Maintenance Menu. Perform either of these two actions to access the Standards Maintenance Menu: • In the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 2 in the Selection field to select Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 2.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. The Standards Maintenance Menu contains an unlabeled selection field in which you type the number corresponding to a menu option. The selection field is displayed to the left of the first menu option. After you type the number of the menu option in the selection field, you must press Enter for the system to display the screen corresponding to the menu option you selected. 3-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Standards Subsystem Refer to Figure 3.1as you navigate the Standards subsystem. In this figure, each screen is identified in a box. The uppermost box identifies the Standards Maintenance Menu, from which you can access all other Standards screens. The arrow lines illustrate which screens you can access from various locations in the Standards subsystem. Standards Maintenance Menu Version Transaction Directory Directory Version/ Transaction Directory Transaction in Use User Envelope Specification Association Version Outbound Specification Version Transaction Standard Code Directory Standard Code Menu Segment Standard Code Maintenance Segment Element Segment Element Activity Standard Code List Options Data Element Definition Standard Code Maintenance Figure 3.1 Standards Subsystem Screen Flow IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-5 The Standards Subsystem Before You Begin Standards Jump Codes A jump code is a 1- to 10-position alphabetic or numeric code in the Jump Code field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. Use the jump code to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another, while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible via the Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: Step 1: Press Home. The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field. Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter. Note:If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab to return to the next entry field on the screen. The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Screen Screen Title Jump Codes Name Numeric Alphabetic Sterling Gentran Main Menu EDIM001 0.0 0 BSC MAIN Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100 2.0 2 STD Version Directory EDIM111 2.1 STD.VDIR Version EDIM110 2.2 STD.VER Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 2.3 STD.VTDIR Transaction Directory EDIM121 2.4 STD.TDIR EDIM122 3-6 Transaction EDIM120 2.5 STD.TRN STD.TRAN Segment EDIM130 2.6 STD.SEG Segment Element EDIM140 2.7 STD.SEGELE Segment Element Activity EDIM150 2.8 STD.ACT Data Element Definition EDIM160 2.9 STD.DD STD.ELE IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Standards Subsystem Screen Screen Title Jump Codes Name Numeric Alphabetic Standard Code Menu EDIM170 2.10 STD.CDE STD.CODE Standard Code Directory EDIM171 2.10.1 STD.CDEDIR Standard Code Maintenance EDIM172 2.10.2 STD.CDEMNT Code Maintenance List Options EDIM173 2.10.3 STD.CDEOPT Transaction In Use EDIM180 2.11 STD.TUSE STD.USE Standard Association EDIM105 2.13 STD.ASSOC If Sterling Gentran:Structure is installed User Envelope Specification EDIM190 2.12 STD.ENV STD.UENV See Appendix A for a complete list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic jump codes and their associated screens. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-7 The Standards Subsystem Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100 Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100 Purpose The Standards Maintenance Menu contains thirteen menu options that you can use to perform standards file maintenance online. Use these screens to display, add, and change EDI standards. Note: Menu option 12, User Envelope Specification, is available only if IBM® Sterling Gentran:Structure® for z/OS® is installed on your system. How to Access Access the Standards Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways: • In the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 2 in the selection field to select the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 2.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Standards Maintenance Menu. EDIM100 2.0_______ STANDARDS MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. __ Enter PF1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Version Directory Version Version/Transaction Directory Transaction Directory Transaction Segment Segment Element Segment Element Activity Data Element Definition Standard Code Menu Transaction in Use User Envelope Specification Standard Association PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff 3-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100 The Standards Subsystem The Standards Maintenance Menu contains menu options that enable you to perform various online standards maintenance functions. The list of menu options, as well as a description of each option follows. Note: The Standards subsystem contains additional screens that are not listed below. The screens that are not listed are detail screens that are displayed only from one of the screens listed below. Menu Option Description 1. Version Directory Lists all versions defined on the Version file. 2. Version Enables you to add or maintain a version definition. 3. Version/Transaction Directory Lists all versions that contain a given transaction. 4. Transaction Directory Lists all transactions for a given version. 5. Transaction Enables you to add or maintain a transaction definition. 6. Segment Enables you to add or maintain a segment definition. 7. Segment Element Enables you to add or maintain a data element definition within a specific segment (to add or maintain segment element conditions). 8. Segment Element Activity Enables you to add or maintain the activity description and accumulators (if applicable) for a data element. 9. Data Element Definition Enables you to add or maintain the data element definition for the description of individual data elements. 10. Standard Code Menu Provides access to the screens that enable you to display, add, or maintain the list of codes for a data element. 11. Transaction In Use Enables you to select the versions and specific transactions that you use for EDI communication. 12. User Envelope Specification Enables you to add or maintain the user envelope definition used during fixed standard mapping. (This menu option is available to Sterling Gentran:Structure customers only.) 13. Standard Association Enables you to display and modify standard association records. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3-9 The Standards Subsystem Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection Type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to select and press Enter. 3 - 10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Version Directory EDIM111 The Standards Subsystem Version Directory EDIM111 Purpose The Version Directory lists all standards versions, whether they are user-specific or public standard, that are in the Standards file. The system displays up to ten standards versions on the Version Directory at one time. You can type a partial Version ID in the Starting Version ID field. The screen contains ten Version IDs, beginning with the closest matching Version ID, in the Version ID column. If you leave the Starting Version ID field blank, the list begins with the first Version ID on the Standards file. How to Access Access the Version Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 1 to select Version Directory from the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Version Directory. Select EDIM111 2.1_______ VERSION DIRECTORY Starting Version Id: Search Agency......: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Version ID G2/7 G2/8 G2/9 G3/0 G3/1 00100 00200 00300 00400 004001 Agncy T T T T T X X X X UN G2/7________ ___ Envelope Type TDCC TDCC TDCC TDCC TDCC ANSI-X12 ANSI-X12 ANSI-X12 ANSI-X12 EDIFACT XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Agency..: T__ Description U A TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 7 N TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 8 N TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 9 N TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 3 RELEASE 0 N TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 3 RELEASE 1 N ANSI INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMEN N ANSI INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMEN N INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT N INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT N EDIFACT CONTRL/AUTACK/KEYMAN MESSAGES (VERS N TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE VERSION ID AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY Enter PF1=Help PF2=Tdir PF3=Exit PF5=Vers PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 11 The Standards Subsystem Version Directory EDIM111 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Version Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Version screen for a version on the Version Directory. Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S next to the version for which you want to view the Version screen, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Tdir Displays the Transaction Directory for the version selected. Type S in the A field of the version you want to select and press PF5. If no version is selected, the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected. PF5=Vers Displays the Version screen for the version selected. Type S in the A field of the version you want to select and press PF5. If no version is selected, the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 3 - 12 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Version Directory EDIM111 The Standards Subsystem Starting Version Id A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version at which the display list is to start. You can type a partial Version ID in this field. The system will then display ten Version IDs, starting with the closest matching Version ID. If you leave this field blank, the version list begins with the first version found on the Standards file. Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is combined with the starting version identification to position the display list. Search Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field that restricts the Version IDs being displayed on this screen to those that match the Search Agency. If you leave this field blank, all agencies will display. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a version record. Type S next to the selected Version ID, and then press PF2 to display the Transaction Directory or PF5 to display the Version screen. Version ID (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version. Agncy (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Envelope Type (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that indicates the agency responsible for the standard. Valid values are: TRADACOMS EDIFACT TDCC ANSI-X12 USER DEF = = = = = ANA TRADACOMS EDIFACT TDCC ASC X12 User-defined standard Description (protected) A 27-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version. UA (Update Allowed) (protected) A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not this Version record can be updated. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, any records for this version can be updated. No, none of the records for this version can be updated. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 13 The Standards Subsystem Version Screen EDIM110 Version Screen EDIM110 Purpose The Version screen displays the highest level of standards maintenance. All standards records are associated with a specific Version ID. The definition for a Version ID is maintained at this level. You can view, change, or delete the definition for the Version ID on this screen. How to Access Access the Version screen in any one of the following ways: • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 2 to select Version and press Enter. • Type S to select a Version ID and press PF2 on the Version/Transaction Directory. • Press PF2 on the Transaction screen. • Type S to select a Version ID and press PF5 on the Version Directory. • Type 2.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Version screen. EDIM110 2.2_______ VERSION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Version Id.......: 004010______ Agency...........: X__ Description......: ANSI_VERSION_4_RELEASE_1_SUBRELEASE_0__ASC_X12________ Envelope Type....: X (A=ANA, E=EDIFACT, T=TDCC, X=X12) Update Allowed...: N (Y/N) Last Update Date: 01/23/03 Time: 10:38:21 User: XXX Enter PF1=Help PF2=Tdir 3 - 14 PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir PF5=Trans PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF6=Nxt Vers IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Version Screen EDIM110 The Standards Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Tdir Displays the Transaction Directory for the version displayed on the Version screen. PF4=Vdir Displays the Version Directory beginning with the version displayed on the Version screen. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction screen for the displayed version. PF6=Nxt Vers Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions are displayed in ascending alphanumeric order. PF9=Add Creates a new Version record. PF10=Updt Updates the current Version record after you have changed information on the Version screen. PF11=Del Deletes the current Version record. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Description A 54-position alphanumeric field that contains information about this version. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 15 The Standards Subsystem Version Screen EDIM110 Envelope Type A 1-position alphanumeric field where you indicate the code for selecting the EDI envelope type. Valid values are: A E T X D = = = = = ANA TRADACOMS EDIFACT TDCC ASC X12 User-defined standard Update Allowed A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not this Version record can be updated. Valid values are: Y N = = Yes, any records for this version can be updated. No, none of the records for this version can be updated. Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position field that displays the date on which this Version record was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Last Update Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which this version record was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user whom created or last changed this Version record. 3 - 16 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 The Standards Subsystem Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 Purpose The Version/Transaction Directory lists all versions containing a specific transaction. The list of versions begins with the value entered in the Starting Version ID field. You can type a partial Version ID in the Starting Version ID field. The system displays up to ten Version IDs, beginning with the closest matching Version ID, in the Version ID column. If you leave the Starting Version ID field blank, the list begins with the first Version ID on the Standards file. How to Access Access the Version/Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways: • Type 3 to select Version/Transaction Directory in the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type S to select the appropriate Transaction number and press PF14 on the Transaction Directory. • Press PF14 on the Transaction screen. • Type 2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Version/Transaction Directory. Select EDIM113 2.3_______ Transaction Id.....: Starting Version Id: Search Agency......: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ VERSION/TRANSACTION DIRECTORY ______ 004010______ X__ Version Agncy Rlse Envelope ID Type 004010 X ANSI-X12 004010AIAG X ANSI-X12 004010RIFMAT X ANSI-X12 004010TI0900 X ANSI-X12 004011 X ANSI-X12 004012 X ANSI-X12 00402 X ANSI-X12 004020 X ANSI-X12 004021 X ANSI-X12 1 X ANSI-X12 Search Limit: XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 0050 Description ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 A AIAG - X12 VERSION 4, RELEASE 1, FEBRUAR RAIL INDUSTRY FORUM VERSION 4, RELEASE X12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY - ISSUE ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 1 A ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 2 A INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 2 SUBRELEASE 0 A ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 2 SUBRELEASE 1 A VERSION 1 SPECIAL FOR CHRYSLER CORP TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE VERSION ID AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir PF5=Trans PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 17 The Standards Subsystem Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Version/Transaction Directory. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View the Version screen for a version on the Version/ Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the version for which you want to view the Version screen, and then press PF2. View the Transaction screen for a version on the Version/ Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the version for which you want to view the Transaction screen, and then press PF5. View the Transaction Directory for a version on the Version/Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the version for which you want to view the Transaction Directory, and then press PF4. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 3 - 18 PF2=Vers Displays the Version screen for the version selected. Type S in the A field of the version you want to select and press PF2. If no version is selected, the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected. PF4=Tdir Displays the Transaction Directory for the version selected. Type S in the A field of the version you want to select and press PF4. If no version is selected, the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 The Standards Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Transaction Id A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification for which the system displays versions containing that transaction. Starting Version Id A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the identification of the version at which the display list is to start. You can type a partial Version ID in this field. The system displays a list of Version IDs, starting with the nearest matching Version ID, in the Version ID column. If you leave this field blank, the list begins with the first version found on the Standards file. Search Limit A 4-digit numeric field in which you enter the maximum number of reads of the Transaction file before the results are displayed on the screen. The default value is 50. If the system reaches the search limit, the message ‘Search Limit Exceeded’ is displayed near the bottom of the screen. To view additional versions, press PF8 or change the limit and press Enter. Note: To improve response time, reduce the search limit. Search Agency A 3-position alphanumeric field that restricts the Version IDs being displayed on this screen to those that match the Search Agency. If you leave this field blank, all agencies will display. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the selected Transaction ID, and then press PF2 to display the Version screen, PF4 to display the Transaction Directory, or PF5 to display the Transaction screen. Version ID (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 19 The Standards Subsystem Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113 Agncy (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Rlse (protected) A 1-position alphanumeric field that specifies the release number for the transaction identification. The release number is currently only being used for ANA TRADACOMS standards. Envelope Type (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that indicates the envelope category that the version belongs. Valid values are: TRADACOMS EDIFACT TDCC ANSI-X12 USER DEF = = = = = ANA TRADACOMS EDIFACT TDCC ASC X12 User-defined standard Description (protected) A 41-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version. 3 - 20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 Purpose The Transaction Directory lists all transactions for a given version. The system displays as many as ten transactions on the Transaction Directory at one time. To view additional transactions, press PF8. You can type a partial Version ID in the Version ID field then press PF6. The system will start displaying Transactions for the Version ID with the closest matching Version ID. If you leave the Starting Trans ID field blank, the list begins with the first transaction for the Version ID on the standards file. Two screens exist for transaction directories. The EDIM122 screen displays for TRADACOMS standards Version IDs and the EDIM121 screen displays for non-TRADACOMS standards Version IDs. Difference Between the Two Transaction Directories The Transaction Directory for TRADACOMS versions functions the same as the nonTRADACOMS Transaction Directory. The difference is the order in which the transactions are listed. The non-TRADACOMS Transaction Directory lists transactions in the order in which they are displayed on the standard Transaction file (e.g., in ascending alphanumeric version order). The TRADACOMS Transaction Directory lists transactions in logical order within the document, within ascending numeric release order, within ascending alphanumeric order. This means that a document’s header transaction is followed by its detail transaction(s), followed by its trailer transaction. How to Access Access the appropriate Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways. Note: You do not need to indicate whether you need EDIM121 or EDIM122. The system automatically displays the Transaction Directory, based on the version you select. • Type 4 to select Transaction Directory on the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type S to select the appropriate Version ID and press PF2 on the Version Directory. • Type a Version ID on the Version screen and press PF2. • Type a transaction code and Version ID on the Transaction screen and press PF4. • Type S to select a Version ID on the Version/Transaction screen and press PF4. • Type 2.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 21 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 Screen Example This example illustrates the Transaction Directory (EDIM121) that displays for most versions. Select EDIM121 2.4_______ Version ID. . . . . : Starting Trans ID . : TRANSACTION DIRECTORY 004010______ ______ XXX Agency. . : 06/01/2011 12:00:00 X__ Description: ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 ASC X12 Trans Func A ID Id Description _ CONTROL TRANSACTION _ 100 PG INSURANCE PLAN DESCRIPTION _ 101 NL NAME AND ADDRESS LISTS _ 104 SA AIR SHIPMENT INFORMATION _ 105 BF BUSINESS ENTITY FILINGS _ 106 MH MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL _ 107 MC REQUEST FOR MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL _ 108 MK RESPONSE TO A MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL _ 109 VE VESSEL CONTENT DETAILS _ 110 IA AIR FREIGHT DETAILS AND INVOICE TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE TRANS NO AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir PF5=Trans PF6=Nxt Vers PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF14=VTdir Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Directory. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... 3 - 22 Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View the Version Directory for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Version Directory, and then press PF4. View the Transaction screen for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Transaction screen, and then press PF5. View the directory of transactions for the next version. N/A Press PF6. View the Version/Transaction Directory for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Version/ Transaction Directory, and then press PF14. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 The Standards Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Vdir Displays the Version Directory, starting with the version displayed on the Transaction Directory. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected. PF6=Nxt Vers Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions are displayed in ascending alphanumeric order. PF14=VTdir Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the version/ transaction selected. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version ID A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you identify the version of the standard. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Starting Trans ID A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification with which the Version ID list is to begin. Type a Transaction ID in this field. You can type a partial Transaction ID in this field. The system displays up to ten transactions for the closest matching Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this field blank, the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the Standards file. Description (protected) A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the selected Trans ID, and then press PF4 to display the Version Directory, PF5 to display the Transaction screen, or PF14 to display the Version/Transaction Directory. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 23 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 Trans ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the transaction. Func Id (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that displays the functional group identification for the transaction, if a functional group identification exists. Description (protected) A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction. Screen Example This example illustrates the Transaction Directory that is displayed only for transactions in ANA TRADACOMS versions (EDIM122). Select EDIM122 2.4________ TRANSACTION DIRECTORY Version ID.........: ANA001______ Starting Trans ID..: _______ XXX Agency....: Release...: Description: TRADACOMS UNITED KINGDOM Trans A ID Rel Description _ 0 CONTROL TRANSACTION _ AVLHDR 1 AVAILABILITY REPORT HEADER _ AVLDET 1 AVAILABILITY REPORT DETAILS _ AVLTLR 1 AVAILABILITY REPORT TRAILER _ GENHDR 1 GENERAL COMMUNICATION HEADER _ GENRAL 2 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS TEXT _ GENTLR 1 GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS TRAILER _ LPRHDR 1 DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT HEADER _ LPRDET 1 DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT DETAILS _ LPRTLR 1 DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT TRAILER END OF TRANSACTION SET Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir PF5=Trans PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 06/01/2011 12:00:00 A __ PF6=Nxt Ver PF14=VTdir Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Directory. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Version Directory for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. 3 - 24 Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Version Directory, and then press PF4. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 To perform this action ... The Standards Subsystem Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View the Transaction screen for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Transaction screen, and then press PF5. View the directory of transactions for the next version. N/A Press PF6. View the Version/Transaction Directory for a transaction on the Transaction Directory. Select Type S next to the transaction for which you want to view the Version/ Transaction Directory, and then press PF14. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Vdir Displays the Version Directory, starting with the version displayed on the Transaction Directory. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected. PF6=Nxt Vers Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions will display in ascending alphanumeric order. PF14=VTdir Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the version/ transaction selected. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 25 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122 Version ID A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you identify the version of the standard. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version identification. Starting Trans ID A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification with which the Version ID list is to begin. Type a Transaction ID in this field. You can type a partial Transaction ID in this field. The system displays up to ten transactions for the closest matching Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this field blank, the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the Standards file. Release A 1-digit numeric field that specifies the release number for the starting Transaction ID entered. Description (protected) A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the selected Trans ID, then press PF4 to display the Version Directory screen, PF5 to display the Transaction screen, or PF14 to display the Version/Transaction Directory. Trans ID (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the transaction for the specific transaction. Rel (protected) A 1-position alphanumeric field that displays the release number of the Transaction ID. Description (protected) A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction. 3 - 26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Screen EDIM120 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Screen EDIM120 Purpose The Transaction screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for a specific transaction within a version. The Transaction screen is displayed differently, depending on whether the standard version entered on the screen is TRADACOMS or non-TRADACOMS. Difference Between the Two Transaction Screen Displays The Transaction screen for TRADACOMS versions displays additional information specific to TRADACOMS. This information consists of release number, previous transaction indicator, next transaction (1) code, next release (1) number, next transaction (2) code, next release (2) number, next transaction (3), next release (3), next transaction (4), next release (4), and RSGRSG release number. See the “Field Descriptions” sub-topic following in this section for further information on the TRADACOMS fields. How to Access Access the appropriate Transaction screen in any one of the following ways: • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 5 to select Transaction and press Enter. • Press PF5 on the Version screen. • Press PF5 on the Version/Transaction Directory. • Type S to select a transaction number and press PF5 on the Transaction Directory. • Type 2.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 27 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Screen EDIM120 Screen Examples The following example illustrates the Transaction screen that is displayed for most versions. EDIM120 2.5_______ Transaction Code.....: Version Id...........: Description..........: Functional Id........: LS/LE Bounding Ind...: NTE Float Ind........: Number of Segments...: TRANSACTION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ______ 004010______ Agency.: X__ CONTROL_TRANSACTION________________________________ ______ _ (Y/N/ ) _ (Y/N/ ) 0026 Repeat Ind: N (Y/N) Job Name: _________ Last Update Date: 05/01/04 Time: 11:08:55 User: XXX Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir PF5=Segment PF6=Nxt Tran PF7=Rpt PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Vtdir The following example illustrates the Transaction screen that is displayed only for transactions in ANA TRADACOMS versions. EDIM120 2.5_______ Transaction Code.....: Version Id...........: Description..........: Functional Id........: LS/LE Bounding Ind...: NTE Float Ind........: Number of Segments...: Prev Transaction.....: Next Transaction (1).: Next Transaction (2).: Next Transaction (3).: Next Transaction (4).: RSGRSG Release.......: TRANSACTION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 INVOIC Release: 9 ANA001______ Agency.: A__ INVOICE_DETAILS____________________________________ INVOIC _ (Y/N/ ) _ (Y/N/ ) 0010 Repeat Ind: N (Y/N) Y VATTLR Release: 9 ______ Release: _ ______ Release: 0 ______ Release: 0 Job Name: _________ _ Last Update Date: 03/31/04 Time: 11:39:24 User: XXX Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir PF5=Segment PF6=Nxt Tran PF7=Rpt PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=VTdir 3 - 28 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Screen EDIM120 The Standards Subsystem Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction screen. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View an existing Transaction record. N/A Type the transaction code and Version ID and press Enter. Create a new Transaction record. N/A Complete the screen fields and press PF9 to add the record. Change an existing Transaction record. N/A Display the record, type the changes, and then press PF10 to update the record. Delete an existing Transaction record. N/A Press PF11 to delete the record. The system prompts you to confirm or cancel the deletion. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Vers Displays the Version screen for the transaction selected on the Transaction Directory. PF4=Tdir Displays the Transaction Directory. PF5=Segment Displays the Segments screen for the displayed transaction. If no transaction is displayed on this screen, a blank Segments screen is displayed. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays the next consecutive Transaction record. Transactions are displayed in ascending alphanumeric order. PF7=Rpt Allows you to submit the batch Standards Print report for the standard transaction displayed at the top of the screen. Note: Codes are not printed for the requested transaction. If you need to print all of the code records associated with a transaction, execute the EXEC036 JCL member and set the "Print Codes" flag to "Y" in the parameter record. PF14=VTdir Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the transaction selected on the Transaction screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 29 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Screen EDIM120 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Transaction Code (required) A 6-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the transaction code. Release (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 1-digit numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Description A 51-position alphanumeric field containing information about the transaction. Functional Id A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the functional group. You can leave this field blank if a functional identification does not exist for the specified transaction. The functional identification is usually determined by the controlling agency. LS/LE Bounding Ind (required) A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates how LS/LE segments are used within a transaction. Valid values are: Y = N = blank = 3 - 30 LS/LE segments are present in the transaction and are used to determine position (bounded). LS/LE segments are present in the transaction but are not used to determine position (unbounded). No LS/LE segments are present in the transaction. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Screen EDIM120 The Standards Subsystem NTE Float Ind (required) A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not the NTE segment (the Note segment) is displayed outside of a defined sequence order in the transaction (to float). Valid values are: Y = N = blank = NTE segments are present in the transaction and are displayed anywhere in the document. NTE segments are present in the transaction but are assigned a position in the document. NTE segments are NOT present in the transaction. Number of Segments (required) A 4-position numeric field that contains the number of segments in this transaction. This number must be greater than zero. Repeat Ind A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates if there are any repeating elements/group elements in the transaction set. Valid values: Y N = = Yes, there are repeating elements/group elements in this transaction. No, there are no repeating elements/group elements (default value). Prev Transaction (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that indicates if this Transaction ID (message) is part of a logical document and is preceded by another message. The first message in a logical document (usually a Header message) contains the value ‘N’ in this field as it begins the logical document. Valid values: Y = N = Yes, this message is part of a logical document and is preceded by another message. No, this message is not preceded by another message in the logical document. Next Transaction (1) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document. This field is blank for the last message in a logical document (usually a Trailer message). Release A 1-position numeric field that displays the release for the message in Next Transaction (1). Next Transaction (2) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document. This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. This field is blank if the message is only used in a single logical document. Release A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the Next Transaction (2) field. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 31 The Standards Subsystem Transaction Screen EDIM120 Next Transaction (3) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document. This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. Also, this field is blank if the message is only used in a single logical document. Release A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the Next Transaction (3) field. Next Transaction (4) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document. This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. This field is blank if the message is only used in a single logical document. Release A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the Next Transaction (4) field. RSGRSG Release (ANA TRADACOMS versions only) A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release of RSGRSG message that belongs with this message. This field is coded for the first message (usually a Header message) of those logical documents that can use the RSGRSG message. Job Name An 8-position alphanumeric field used to designate a user-specified jobname when printing a report using the PF7 key. Valid values are any valid jobname. To select reports for printing, type the user-specified jobname in the Job Name field and press PF7. If you do not type a value in the Job Name field, the system uses a default value, which was defined during installation customization of the JCL (EDIRJCL) file. Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position numeric field that indicates the date on which the Transaction record was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which this Transaction record was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed this Transaction record. 3 - 32 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segments Screen EDIM130 The Standards Subsystem Segments Screen EDIM130 Purpose The Segments screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for a specific segment within a transaction. How to Access Access the Segments screen in any one of the following ways: • Type 6 to select Segment from the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Press PF5 on the Transaction screen. • Type 2.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. Screen Examples The following example illustrates the Segments screen that is displayed for most versions. Add Delete Update Select Info EDIM130 2.6_______ SEGMENTS Version Id......: 00001______ Transaction ID..: ______ A _ _ _ _ _ XXX Agency..: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 X__ ******Segment****** Man ***Use*** **Loop*** DE Seg Loop LP Act No Id Ver Ty Req Cde Min Max Min Max Count Grp Id B/E Cnt 0001 AC1_ 00 H _ O 1 999999 _ ______ ___5 __ ______ _ ___ INTERCHANGE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT__________________________________________ 0002 BG__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___7 __ ______ _ __1 TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_HEADER________________________________________ 0003 EG__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___4 __ ______ _ __1__ TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_TRAILER______________________________________ _ 0004 GE__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___2 __ ______ _ __1_ FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_TRAILER__________________________________________ 0005 GS__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___8 __ ______ _ __1 FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_HEADER_____________________________________________ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Trans IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Elements PF6=Nxt Tran 3 - 33 The Standards Subsystem Segments Screen EDIM130 This an example of the Segments screen that is displayed only for transactions in ANA TRADACOMS versions. Add Delete Update Select Info EDIM130 2.6_______ SEGMENTS Version Id......: ANA001______ Transaction ID..: ______ A _ _ _ _ _ XXX Agency..: Release: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 A__ 0 ******Segment****** Man ***Use*** **Loop*** DE Seg Loop LP Act No Id Ver Ty Req Cde Min Max Min Max Count Grp Id B/E Cnt 0001 AC1_ 00 H _ O 1 999999 _ ______ ___5 __ ______ _ ___ INTERCHANGE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT______________________________________ 0002 BG__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___7 __ ______ _ __1 TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_HEADER______________________________________ 0003 EG__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___4 __ ______ _ __1 TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_TRAILER_____________________________________ 0004 GE__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___2 __ ______ _ __1 FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_TRAILER_________________________________________ 0005 GS__ 00 H _ O 1 _____1 _ ______ ___8 __ ______ _ __1 FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_HEADER__________________________________________ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Elements PF6=Nxt Tran Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segments screen. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... 3 - 34 Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View an existing Segment record. N/A Type the ID for the version in the Version ID field, the agency in the Agency field, and the transaction code in the Transaction Code field, and then press Enter View the Segment Element screen for an existing segment. Select Type S in the A field next to the segment for which you want to view elements, and then press PF5. Create a new Segment record. Add Type A in the A field, complete the fields for the segment, and then press Enter. Change an existing Segment record. Update Type U in the A field next to the segment you want to change, change the data in any of the fields for that segment, and then press Enter IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segments Screen EDIM130 To perform this action ... The Standards Subsystem Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... Delete an existing Segment record. Delete Type D in the A field next to the segment you want to delete, and then press Enter. The system prompts you to confirm or cancel the deletion. Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction screen for these segments. PF5=Elements Displays the Segment Elements screen. Type S in the A field next to the segment for which you want to view elements, and then press PF5 to display the Segment Elements screen. PF6=Nxt Tran Displays the Segments screen for the next consecutive Transaction ID. Segments are displayed in ascending alphanumeric order. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 35 The Standards Subsystem Segments Screen EDIM130 Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Transaction ID (required) A 6-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the transaction code. Release (ANA TRADACOMS version only) A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action. Type S next to the selected Segment ID and press PF5 to display the Segment Element screen. Type A to add a segment record, U to update a record, D to delete a record, or I to display the date, time and user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Press Enter to perform the function. Segment No (required) A 4-position numeric field indicating the position the segment is displayed in the transaction. Segment Id (required) A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier. Segment Ver (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment. Segment Ty (required) A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates the section where the segment is displayed. Valid values are: H D S F = = = = Header Detail Summary Float Req Reserved for future use. Man Cde (required) A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the segment is required to be present in the transaction. Valid values are: M O F C 3 - 36 = = = = Mandatory – segment must be present. Optional – segment is not required. Floating – segment is displayed anywhere in transaction. Conditional – segment is not required. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segments Screen EDIM130 The Standards Subsystem Min Use A 1-position numeric field that indicates the minimum number of required occurrences for this segment. The default is zero for optional segments and one for mandatory segments. Max Use (required) A 6-digit numeric field that indicates the maximum number of times that a particular segment is allowed to occur, in succession, at a specific location within the transaction. Min Loop A 1-position numeric field that indicates the minimum number of required occurrences for this loop. The default is zero for optional loops and one for mandatory loops. Max Loop A 6-digit numeric field that indicates the maximum number of times that the loop is allowed to occur at a specific location sequence of the transaction. This field is coded on the first segment of the loop. DE Count (required) A 4-position numeric field that contains the number of data elements that comprise the segment. Seg Grp A 2-position numeric field that contains the segment group number that uniquely identifies each segment group (loop) within a message. This value is used with the anticollision segments UGH/UGT for positioning in EDIFACT. Loop Id A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the identification for the loop. LP B/E A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the segment is a beginning or ending segment in a loop. Valid values are: B = C = E = space = Beginning of loop – mandatory/optional flags are to be used regardless of whether the first segment of the loop is present. Beginning of Conditional loop – mandatory flags are to be treated as optional if the first segment of the loop is not present. End of loop. If loop ID is coded, this segment is in the middle of the loop. If loop ID is not coded, this segment is not part of a loop. Act Cnt A 3-position numeric field that contains the total number of Element Activity records that are associated with this segment. Description (required) A 65-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the segment. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 37 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Screen EDIM140 Segment Element Screen EDIM140 Purpose The Segment Element screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for specific data elements within a segment. This definition includes updating a segment element record with conditional codes, if necessary. If conditional codes exist for a segment element, an asterisk (*) is displayed to the right of the description in the Cd field. From the Segment Element screen, you can view and update the conditional codes on the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen. It is important to note that you must first add a segment element record before you update it with conditional codes. Following is a brief overview of the steps for adding and then updating a segment element record: 1. To add the segment element record, type A in the A field. 2. To update the new segment element record with conditional codes, type S in the A field. The system displays the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen. 3. Type the conditional codes in the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen. Note: An asterisk displays in the Cd field. See the next topic, “Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance Screen,” for details on that screen. How to Access Access the appropriate Segment Element screen in any one of the following ways: 3 - 38 • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 7 to select Segment Element and press Enter. • Type S in the A field next to the element for which you want to view detail on the Segments screen, and press PF5. • Type 2.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Screen EDIM140 The Standards Subsystem Screen Examples The following example illustrates the Segment Element screen that is displayed for most standards versions. Add Update Delete Select Info EDIM140 2.7_______ Version Id...: Segment Id...: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Seq Num 0001 0002 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Ele Seq 001 002 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ SEGMENT ELEMENT XXX 004010______ Agency..: B3A_ Segment Version..: Sub Man Com Ad Ele Ele Ele In 000 M M _ 000 O O _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ Element Id Ver 640__ 00 21___ 00 _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ _____ __ 06/01/2011 12:00:00 X__ 00 **Group** Dsg Ty Description Cd _____ _ TRANSACTION TYPE CODE _____ _ NUMBER OF SHIPMENTS _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ R 0001 0001 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ END OF SEGMENT ELEMENTS Enter PF1=Help PF2=Actvty PF3=Exit PF4=Segment PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF5=Elem Def PF6=Nxt Segm The following example illustrates the Segment Element screen that is displayed only for segment elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions. Add Update Delete Select Info EDIM140 2.7_______ SEGMENT ELEMENT Version Id...: Segment Id...: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Seq Num 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 ____ Ele Seq 001 001 001 002 003 003 003 003 003 ___ ANA001______ Agency..: CLO_ Segment Version..: Sub Man Com Ad Ele Ele Ele In 001 M O _ 002 M O _ 003 M O _ 000 O O _ 001 O O _ 002 O O _ 003 O O _ 004 O O _ 005 O O _ ___ _ _ _ Element Id Ver CLO0_ 08 CLO1_ 08 CLO2_ 08 CNAM_ 08 CAD0_ 08 CAD1_ 08 CAD2_ 08 CAD3_ 08 CAD4_ 08 _____ __ R 0001 ____ ____ 0001 0001 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 A__ 08 **Group** Dsg Ty CLOC_ G CLOC_ R CLOC_ _ _____ _ CADD_ G CADD_ R CADD_ R CADD_ R CADD_ _ _____ _ END OF SEGMENT ELEMENTS Enter PF1=Help PF2=Actvty PF3=Exit PF4=Segment PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Description Cd CUSTOMER'S ANA LOCATI CUSTOMER'S OWN LOCATI SUPPLIER'S IDENT. OF CUSTOMER'S NAME CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI CUSTOMER'S POST CODE PF5=Elem Def PF6=Nxt Segm 3 - 39 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Screen EDIM140 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segment Element screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... 3 - 40 Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View an existing Segment Element record. N/A Type the ID for the version in the Version ID field, the agency in the Agency field, the ID for the segment in the Segment ID field, and the version for the segment in the Segment Version field, and then press Enter Add a new segment element. Add Type A in the A field, complete the fields for the segment element, and then press Enter Update an existing segment element. Update Type U in the A field next to the element you want to update, change the data in any of the fields for that segment element, and then press Enter Delete an existing segment element. Delete Type D in the A field next to the segment element you want to delete, and then press Enter. The conditional codes, if any exist, are also deleted. The system prompts you to confirm or cancel the deletion. Update a segment element with conditional codes. Select Type S in the A field next to the segment element for which you want to perform conditional code maintenance, and then press Enter. The Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen is displayed. View the Data Element Definition screen. Select Type S in the A field next to the segment element for which you want to view data element definitions, and then press PF5. Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Screen EDIM140 The Standards Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Actvty Displays the Segment Element Activity screen. Type S in the A field next to the segment element for which you want to view activity, and then press PF2 to display the Segment Element Activity screen. PF4=Segment Displays the Segment screen for these elements. PF5=Elem Def Displays the Data Element Definition screen. Type S in the A field next to the segment element for which you want to view data element definitions, and then press PF5 to display the Data Element Definition screen. PF6=Nxt Segm Displays the elements for the next consecutive Segment record. Segments will display in ascending in alphanumeric order. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Segment Id (required) A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier. Segment Version (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 41 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Screen EDIM140 A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates the action you want to perform for a particular segment element. The top line of the screen lists valid actions. The valid action codes for the Segment Element screen are the following: A U D S = = = = I = Add a new segment element Update an existing segment element Delete an existing segment element. Select an existing segment element, then press Enter to display the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen, PF2 to display the Segment Element Activity screen, or PF5 to display the Data Element Definition screen. (Info) Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Seq Num (required) A 4-digit number representing the physical position of the element/subelement within the segment. Ele Seq (required) A 3-digit numeric field that contains the position of the simple element/group element within the segment. Sub Ele A 3-digit numeric field that specifies a subelement within a group element. Valid values are: 000 = 001-999 = simple elements subelements within a group element Man Ele A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of simple element/group element is required in the segment. Valid values are: M O C = = = Mandatory Optional Conditional Com Ele A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of the subelement is required in the group element. Valid values are: M O C 3 - 42 = = = Mandatory Optional Conditional IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Screen EDIM140 The Standards Subsystem Ad In A 1-character alphabetic field that contains a flag that indicates if information in this element should be passed to reports and databanking. Y blank = = Information is to be passed to reports and databanking Not used Element Id A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element identification (dictionary number) for this element. Element Ver (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. R A 4-position numeric field that indicates the number of times an element/group element can repeat within the segment. Group Dsg A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the group element identification that has been assigned to this set of subelements. Group Ty A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates the beginning/ending of group element. Valid values are: G R blank = = = First subelement in a group Subelement is in middle of group End of group Description (protected) A 21-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined on the dictionary file. Cd (protected) A 1-character alphabetic flag that indicates whether the segment element contains conditional information. Conditional codes can be updated and displayed on the Segment Element Code Maintenance screen. Valid values are: * blank = = Conditional information exists for the segment element. No conditional information. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 43 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element EDIM141 Segment Element EDIM141 Conditional Code Maintenance Screen Purpose The Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen enables you to view and update conditional codes for a specified segment element. Data Element Relational Conditions Relational conditions can occur between elements, based on the presence or absence of those elements. The information in the CONDITIONAL AREA identifies to Sterling Gentran:Basic the condition of the element relationship (e.g., how two or more elements are related), and exactly which elements are involved. If a data element has more than one relational condition, the order of the conditional codes is very important.You can specify and update the segment element conditional codes for a specified segment element in the CONDITIONAL AREA. Relational conditions are: • conditions in which one or more data elements within the same segment are associated with another one or more data elements, or • one or more composite elements within the same group element are associated with another one or more composite elements. ASC X12 and EDIFACT use different dependency identifiers. However, Sterling Gentran supports both types of dependency identifiers. The following table lists the ASC X12 and EDIFACT equivalency dependency identifiers. ASC X12 3 - 44 EDIFACT Description E D1 One and only one of the entities in the list will be present. P D2 If one entity in the list is present, the rest will be present. R D3 At least one of the entities in the list will be present. C D5 If the first entity in the list is present, all of the others will be present. It is permissible that one or more of the entities not specified as the first entity in the list may be present, without requiring the first entity to be present. L D6 If the first entity in the list is present, at least one more will be present. It is permissible that one or more of the entities not specified as the first entity in the list may be present, without requiring the first entity to be present. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element EDIM141 The Standards Subsystem Example – Relational Condition Let’s say a paired relational condition exists between the third and fourth data elements in a segment. According to the definition (above) for a paired relational condition, both elements must be defined in order to have a clear meaning. To set up the paired relational condition, type P in the Code 1 field in the CONDITIONAL AREA of the screen, 3 in the Code 2 field, and 4 in the Code 3 field. Typing P in the Code 1 field signifies to Sterling Gentran:Basic that a paired relationship exists; typing the three-digit numbers in the Code 2 and Code 3 fields indicates the position of the affected data elements (e.g., segment sequence number). Sterling Gentran:Basic creates and reports data element conditional codes using the values in the Code fields. In the above example, conditional code P00304 is generated. How to Access The Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen is a continuation of the Segment Element screen. Access this screen by typing S to select a segment element from the Segment Element screen and pressing Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen that is displayed for most standards versions. EDIM141 __________ SEGMENT ELEMENT CONDITIONAL CODE MAINTENANCE Version Id: 004030 Agency.........: X Segment Id: AC1 Segment Version: 00 Element Description: INTERCHANGE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT NOTE CODE Mandatory Element: O Audit Id Indicator: (M/O/C) XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Sequence: 0005 Element Id: 9918 Element Version: 00 (Y) ************************** CONDITIONAL AREA ************************** Code 1: ___ Code 2: ___ Code 3: ___ Code 4: ___ Code 5: ___ Code 6: ___ Code 7: ___ Code 8: ___ Code 9: ___ Code 10: ___ Group Conditional......: _ Enter PF1=Help Last Update Date: 06/01/03 Time: 12:00:00 User: XXX PF3=Exit PF4=Seg Elem PF10=Updt IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 45 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element EDIM141 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Seg Elem Returns to the Segment Element screen for the segment element displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the conditional codes after you type changes to the conditional codes in the Code fields for the displayed segment element. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that indicates the version identification of the standard. Agency (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Segment Id (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier. Segment Version (protected) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment. Sequence (protected) A 4-position numeric field that indicates the physical position of the element within the segment or subelement within the group element. Element Description (protected) A 65-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined on the dictionary file. Mandatory Element (protected) A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of the element or subelement is required in the segment/group element. 3 - 46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element EDIM141 The Standards Subsystem Element Id (protected) A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) identification for this element. Element Ver (protected) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Audit Id Indicator (protected) A 1-position alphabetic flag that indicates if information in this element should be passed to reports and databanking. Y = blank = Information is to be passed to reports and databanking Not used CONDITIONAL AREA: Code [#]: An area of this screen that contains ten 3-position alphanumeric code fields in which you can enter conditional code values that describe relationships between elements or subelements. Alphabetic codes indicate the type of element relationship; the 3-digit numeric values indicate the position of the affected data elements/subelements. Valid values describing the relationships are: ASC X12 Values EDIFACT Values Description E D1 Indicates that one and only one of the entities in the list will be present. P D2 Indicates that if any of the referenced elements/ subelements are present, they all must be present. R D3 Indicates that at least one of the referenced elements/subelements may be present. C D5 Indicates that if the first referenced element/ subelement is used, all remaining referenced elements/subelements must be used. L D6 Indicates that if the first referenced element/ subelement is used, at least one of the remaining referenced elements/subelements must be used. Group Conditional A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the conditional relationships identified in the Conditional Area relate to the elements within a segment or subelements in a group element. Valid values are: Y = Conditional relationship corresponds to subelements in a group of elements. N or Space = Conditional relationship corresponds to the elements in segments. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 47 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element EDIM141 Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified segment element record (including the conditional information) was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Last Update Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which the specified segment element record (including the conditional information) was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Last Update User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the segment element record. 3 - 48 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 Purpose The Segment Element Activity screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition of accumulation activity (if applicable) for specific segment elements. How to Access Access the Segment Element Activity screen in any one of the following ways: • Type 8 to select Segment Element Activity from the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type S in the A field on the Segment Element screen next to the element for which you want to view segment element activity, and press PF2. • Type 2.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. Screen Examples The following example illustrates the Segment Element Activity screen that is displayed for most standards versions. EDIM150 2.8_______ SEGMENT ELEMENT ACTIVITY Version Id.............: Transaction Code.......: Segment Id.............: Position in Transaction: Position in Segment....: Position in Element....: 004030______ ______ BG_ 0002 0007 000 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Agency.............: X__ Segment Version....: 00 Element Id: 404 Ver: 00 TRANSMISSION CONTROL NUMBER Activity Desc............: STORE_INTERCHANGE_CONTROL_NUMBER_______________ Action Number Accumulators......: 1) _ __ (A)ddition, (C)ompare, 2) _ __ (I)ncrement, (S)ave, 3) _ __ (V)erify 4) _ __ 5) _ __ Element Compare1: ______ Element Compare2: ______ Element Compare3: ______ Store Element Req: S (S/ ) Last Update Date/Time/User: 06/01/11 12:00:00 XXX Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Elements PF5=Elem Def PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt Actv 3 - 49 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 The following example illustrates the Segment Element Activity screen that is displayed only for segment elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions. The ANA TRADACOMS screen is displayed only if you type A (for ANA TRADACOMS) in the Envelope Type field of the Version screen. EDIM150 2.8_______ SEGMENT ELEMENT ACTIVITY Version Id.............: Transaction Code.......: Segment Id.............: Position in Transaction: Position in Segment....: Position in Element....: ANA001______ ______ STX 0023 0009 000 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Agency.............: A__ Release............: 0 Segment Version....: 00 Element Id: 9848 Ver: 00 FUNCTION GROUP REFERENCE NUMBER Activity Desc............: _______________________________________________ Action Number Accumulators......: 1) _ __ (A)ddition, (C)ompare, 2) _ __ (I)ncrement, (S)ave, 3) _ __ (V)erify 4) _ __ 5) _ __ Element Compare1: ______ Element Compare2: ______ Element Compare3: ______ Store Element Req: S (S/ ) Last Update Date/Time/User: 06/01/03 12:00:00 XXX Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Elements PF5=Elem Def PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF6=Nxt Actv Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 3 - 50 PF4=Elements Displays the Segment Element screen for this Activity record. PF5=Elem Def Displays the Data Element Definition screen for the displayed Activity record. PF6=Nxt Actv Displays the next consecutive Activity record. Activity records are displayed in ascending alphanumeric sequence. PF11=Del Deletes the current Activity record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 The Standards Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Transaction Code (required) A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the transaction code. Release (ANA TRADACOMS version only) A 1-digit numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID. Segment Id (required) A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier. Segment Version (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment. Position in Transaction (required) A 4-position numeric field indicating the position the segment is displayed in the transaction. Position in Segment (required) A 4-position numeric field that indicates the position of the element within the segment. Position in Element A 3-position numeric field that indicates the position of the subelement within the group element. Element Id (protected) A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) identification for this element. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 51 The Standards Subsystem Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 Ver (protected) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Element Description (protected) A 43-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined on the dictionary file. Activity Desc A 46-position alphanumeric field that describes the activity action that is to be taken for this element/subelement. Action A 1-character alphabetic field that specifies the action for the accumulator. There are five accumulators, which are numbered 1 – 5 in the column to the left of the Action column. Valid values are: A C = = I = S = V = Add value in this element/subelement to the indicated accumulator. Compare value in this element/subelement to the value in the indicated accumulator. When there is a value in this element/subelement, increment the indicated accumulator by one. Save the value in this element/subelement to the indicated accumulator. Initialize the indicated accumulator to zero. Number A 2-digit numeric field that specifies the number of the accumulator for this activity. There are five accumulators, which are numbered 1 – 5 in column to the left of the Action column. Valid values are 01 – 99. Element Compare1 A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes. Element Compare2 A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes. Element Compare3 A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes. 3 - 52 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150 The Standards Subsystem Store Element Req A 1-character alphabetic flag to indicate if the value in this element/subelement is to be saved for future comparison. Valid values are: S = blank = Save the element/subelement Not used Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified segment element activity record was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Last Update Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which the segment element activity record was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Last Update User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the segment element activity record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 53 The Standards Subsystem Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160 Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160 Purpose The Data Element Definition screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition of individual data elements within a segment. Note: Online modifications do not affect batch standards unless the Batch Maintenance program (EXEC030) is run. How to Access Access the Data Element Definition screen in any of the following ways: • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 9 to select Data Element Definition and press Enter. • Press PF5 on the Segment Element Activity screen. • Press PF5 on the Segment Element screen. • Type 2.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Data Element Definition screen. EDIM160 2.9_______ DATA ELEMENT DEFINITION XXX Version Id....: 004030______ Agency.........: X__ Element Id....: 404__ Element Version: 00 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Description: TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_NUMBER______________________________________ Element Type..: N0 (AN/ID/R/Nn/DT/D8/TM/T6/T8/CD/B) Minimum Length: 001 Maximum Length: 00005 Composite Code Definition: ____________________ Last Update Date: 06/01/11 Time: 12:00:00 User: XXX Enter PF1=Help 3 - 54 PF3=Exit PF4=Seg Elem PF5=Code Dir PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF6=Nxt Elem IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160 The Standards Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Seg Elem PF5=Code Dir PF6=Nxt Elem PF11=Del Displays the Segment Element screen for this Data Element Definition record. Displays the Standard Code Directory for the displayed Data Element Definition record. Codes are valid only with element type of AN or ID. Displays the next consecutive Data Element Definition record. Data Element Definition records are displayed in ascending alphanumeric sequence. Deletes the current Data Element Definition record. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Element Id (required) A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) identification. Element Version (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Description (required) A 65-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 55 The Standards Subsystem Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160 Element Type A 2-position alphanumeric field that specifies the editing format of the data contained in this data element. Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for Sterling Gentran:Structure only include: CM CY DD JD J8 MM PD PJ PM PY Pn Sn YY ZD ZJ ZM ZY = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Date format = MMDDYYYY Date format = YYYYMMDD Date format = DDMMYY Date format = Julian YYDDD Date format = Julian YYYYDDD Date format = MMDDYY Date format = Packed DDMMYY Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD Date format = Packed MMDDYY Date format = Packed YYMMDD Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions Date format = YYMMDD Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include: AN CD DT D8 ID Nn R Rn = = = = = = = = TM T6 T8 = = = string type – alphanumeric Date format = DDMMYYYY Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD Date format = YYYYMMDD Identifier type – element has code list Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point Decimal – n indicates the maximum number of explicit decimal positions Time format = HHMM Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds Time format = HHMMSSss, where ss = hundreds of seconds Minimum Length A 3-digit numeric field that specifies the minimum length for the element/subelement. Maximum Length A 5-digit numeric field that specifies the maximum length for the element/subelement. Composite Code Definition A 10-position alphanumeric field that specifies the breakdown of composite codes. Format is n/m/x/ where n is the length of the first part of composite code, m is the length of the second part of composite code, and x is the length of the third part. Up to 5 3 - 56 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160 The Standards Subsystem component pieces can be supported and the total of the pieces must equal the maximum length specified. Last Update Date (protected) An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified data element record was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY. Last Update Time (protected) An 8-position field that displays the time at which the data element record was created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Last Update User (protected) A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the data element record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 57 The Standards Subsystem Standard Code Menu EDIM170 Standard Code Menu EDIM170 Purpose The Standard Code Menu contains three menu options that you can use to display codes and perform standard code maintenance. How to Access Access the Standard Code Menu in either of the following ways: • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 10 to select Data Element Code Values and press Enter. • Type 2.10 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Standard Code Menu. EDIM170 2.10______ STANDARD CODE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ Enter PF1=Help 1. Standard Code Directory 2. Standard Code Maintenance 3. Standard Code List Options PF3=Exit PF4=Elem PF15=Logoff Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Elem 3 - 58 Displays the Data Element Definition screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standard Code Menu EDIM170 The Standards Subsystem Menu Options Menu Option Description 1. Standard Code Directory Enables you to display code records for an Element ID. 2. Standard Code Maintenance Enables you to perform maintenance to code records. 3. Standard Code List Options Enables you to move, copy, or delete code lists. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press Enter to perform the selected function. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 59 The Standards Subsystem Standard Code Directory EDIM171 Standard Code Directory EDIM171 Purpose The Standard Code Directory allows you to display standard code records. If you access the screen from the Data Element Definition screen, the system displays code records for that Element ID. If you access the screen from Standards Code Menu, you can type a Version ID, Agency, Language, Element ID and Element Version, and then press Enter. Scroll forward through the records using the PF6 key. How to Access Access the Standard Code Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 1 to select Standard Code Directory from the Standard Code Menu and press Enter. • From the Data Element Definition, press PF5. • Type 2.10.1 in Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Standard Code Directory. Select Info EDIM171 2.10.1____ Version Id: Element Id: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 004010______ Agency: 235__ Element Version: X__ 00 Language.: Min/Max..: XXX EN_ 0002 / 06/01/2011 12:00:00 0002 Comp Code/Description _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AA____AMERICAN_TRUCKING_ASSOCIATIONS_ASSEMBLY_________________________ AB____ASSEMBLY________________________________________________________ AC____AGGREGATION_CODE_(USED_TO_CONSOLIDATE_PART_FAMILIES)____________ AD____AMERICAN_DENTAL_ASSOCIATION_CODES_______________________________ AE____SERIAL_ITEM_AND_CONTRIBUTION_IDENTIFIER_(DEFINED_IN_ANSI_239.56) AF____FRONT_AXLE_SERIAL_NUMBER________________________________________ AG____AGE_____________________________________________________________ AH____BILLBOARDS_COMMERCIAL___________________________________________ AI____ALTERNATE_ISBN__________________________________________________ AJ____PIGGYBACK_COMMERCIAL____________________________________________ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 3 - 60 STANDARD CODE DIRECTORY PF3=Exit PF4=Elem Defin PF5=Code Maint PF6=Nxt Code IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standard Code Directory EDIM171 The Standards Subsystem Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Standard Code Directory. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View existing code records. N/A Type the Version ID, Agency, Language, Element ID, and Element Version and press Enter Transfer to Standard Code Maintenance screen Select Type S next to the code value for which you want to maintain, and then press PF5. Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Elem Defin Displays the Data Element Definition screen. PF5=Code Maint Displays the Standard Code Maintenance screen for the code selected. PF6=Nxt Code Displays code records for the next consecutive element on file. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 61 The Standards Subsystem Standard Code Directory EDIM171 Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Language (required) A 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the Version ID and Agency, always EN (English). Element Id (required) A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) identification. Element Version (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Min (protected) Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. Max (protected) Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a particular code value. Type S to select an existing code value. Type I to display the date, time and user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Comp A 1-digit numeric field that identifies which composite part of the code value is defined. The value in the Composite Code Definition field on the Data Element Definition screen (EDIM160) determines how many composite parts comprise the code. Valid values are 1 – 5. Code/Description A 70-position alphanumeric field that shows a code and its description. The line is split as follows, based on the maximum element length: 3 - 62 • Maximum element length 1 – 5 displays a 5-byte code with a 65-byte description. • Maximum element length 6 – 10 displays a 10-byte code with a 60-byte description. • Maximum element length 11 – 20 displays a 20-byte code with a 50-byte description. • Maximum element length 21 – 40 displays a 40-byte code with a 30-byte description. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172 The Standards Subsystem Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172 Purpose The Standard Code Maintenance screen enables you to add, delete, display, and change the definition for individual data elements coded as an ID or AN type on the Data Element Definition screen. How to Access Access the Standard Code Maintenance screen in any one of the following ways: • In the Standard Code Menu, type 2 to select Standard Code Maintenance and press Enter. • Type 2.10.2 in the Jump Code field from any screen. • Type S in the A field on the Standard Code Directory for the next code you want to maintain and press PF5. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Standard Code Maintenance screen. Add Delete Update Info EDIM172 2.10.2____ Version Id: Element Id: A STANDARD CODE MAINTENANCE 004010______ Agency: 235__ Element Version: X__ 00 Language.: Min/Max..: XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 EN_ 002 / 00002 Comp Code/Description _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ AA______________________________________ AMERICAN_TRUCKING_ASSOCIATIONS_ASSEMBLY__________________________ AB______________________________________ ASSEMBLY_________________________________________________________ AC______________________________________ AGGREGATION_CODE_(USED_TO_CONSOLIDATE_PART_FAMILIES)_____________ AD______________________________________ AMERICAN_DENTAL_ASSOCIATION_CODES________________________________ AE______________________________________ SERIAL_ITEM_AND_CONTRIBUTION_IDENTIFIER_(DEFINED_IN_ANSI_239.56)_ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Code Dir IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt Code 3 - 63 The Standards Subsystem Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Standard Code Maintenance screen. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... Add a new code definition. Add Type A in the A (Action Code) field, type the appropriate values in the Version Id, Agency, Language, ELement Id, Element Version, Min/Max, Comp and Description fields for the code you are defining and press Enter. Delete an existing code definition. Delete Type D in the A field corresponding to the code you want to delete and press Enter. Modify an existing code definition. Update Type U in the A field corresponding to the code you want to update, type the changes to the existing code definition, and press Enter. Display the date, time, and user initials on the message line to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Code Dir Displays the Standard Code Directory. PF6=Nxt Code Displays the next consecutive element on the current code file. There are four code files. This function key processes the current code file sequentially to locate the next element identification. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. 3 - 64 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172 The Standards Subsystem To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version Id (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version identification. Language (required) A 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the Version ID and Agency, always EN (English). Element Id (required) A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) ID. Element Version (required) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Min (protected) Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. Max (protected) Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a particular code value. Valid values are: A D U I = = = = Add a new code value Delete an existing code value Update an existing code value (Info) Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Comp A 1-digit numeric field that identifies the composite part of a data element code value being defined. This field works with Composite Code Definition from Data Element Definition (EDIM160) screen. Code A 40-position alphanumeric field that contains the code value. Description A 65-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the code value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 65 The Standards Subsystem Code Maintenance List Options Screen EDIM173 Code Maintenance List Options Screen EDIM173 Purpose The Code Maintenance List Options screen allows you to move or copy entire code lists from version/release to a new version/release. How to Access Access the Code Maintenance List Options screen in either of the following ways: • From the Standard Code Menu, type 3 to select Standard Code List Options and press Enter. • Type 2.10.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Code Maintenance List Options screen. EDIM173 2.10.3____ CODE MAINTENANCE LIST OPTIONS XXX "FROM" List Version Id....: 004010______ Element Id....: 235__ Language Code.: EN_ Agency.........: Element Version: X__ 00 "TO" List Version Id....: ____________ Element Id....: _____ Language Code.: EN_ Agency.........: Element Version: ___ __ List Options..: _ Enter PF1=Help 06/01/2011 12:00:00 (Move, Copy, Delete) PF3=Exit Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 3 - 66 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Code Maintenance List Options Screen EDIM173 The Standards Subsystem “From” List Version Id (required) The 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard that contains the code list that is to be moved or copied. Agency (required) The 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is associated with the ‘From’ version identification. Element Id (required) The 5-position alphanumeric field that identifies the element of the code list that is to be moved or copied. Element Version (required) The 2-position numeric field that identifies the version of the ‘From’ element. Language Code The 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the Code List. The value is always EN (English) “To” List Version Id (required) The 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard that is to receive the code list. Agency (required) The 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is associated with the ‘To’ version identification. Element Id (required) The 5-position alphanumeric field that identifies the element that is to receive the code list. Element Version (required) The 2-position numeric field that identifies the version of the element that is to receive the code list. Language Code The 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the Code List. The value is always EN (English) List Options (required) The 1-position alphabetic field that identifies what action is to be performed. Valid Values are: M C D Move the code list to a new version. The code list will be deleted in ‘from’ version. Copy the code list to a new version. Delete the code list from a version. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 67 The Standards Subsystem Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180 Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180 Purpose The Transaction in Use screen enables you to select the standard version transactions required by your EDI environment. All transaction definitions within each standard version required by your EDI environment must be identified to Sterling Gentran:Basic. You can identify these transaction definitions to Sterling Gentran:Basic by doing the following: 1. Select the required transactions within each version via the Transaction in Use screen. 2. Load the selected transactions via the batch Selective Standards Download program (EBDI030). 3. Notify your system administrator, who then executes the batch program to download the selected transactions. How to Access Access the Transaction in Use screen in either of the following ways: 3 - 68 • Type 11 to select Transaction in Use from the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 2.11 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180 The Standards Subsystem Screen Examples The following example illustrates the Transaction In Use screen that is displayed for most standards versions. Select Unselect EDIM180 2.11______ TRANSACTION IN USE Version ID.....: 004010______ Transaction ID.: ______ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Agency...... X__ Release No.. _ Description..: ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 ASC X12 Trans No. Description CONTROL TRANSACTION 100 INSURANCE PLAN DESCRIPTION 101 NAME AND ADDRESS LISTS 104 AIR SHIPMENT INFORMATION 105 BUSINESS ENTITY FILINGS 106 MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL 107 REQUEST FOR MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL 108 RESPONSE TO A MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL 109 VESSEL CONTENT DETAILS 110 AIR FREIGHT DETAILS AND INVOICE Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF6=Nxt Vers The following example illustrates the Transaction In Use screen that is displayed only for segment elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions. The ANA TRADACOMS screen is displayed only if you type A (for ANA TRADACOMS) in the Envelope Type field of the Version screen. Select Unselect EDIM180 2.11______ TRANSACTION IN USE Version ID.....: 002901EAN005 Transaction ID.: ______ XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Agency...... UN_ Release No.. 0 Description..: EDIFACT 1990 RELEASE 901 Trans ID Description CONTROL TRANSACTION CONTRL EDIFACT CONTROL MESSAGE INVOIC INVOICE ORDERS EDIFACT PURCHASE ORDER A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ENTER A TRANSACTION SELECTION Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt Vers 3 - 69 The Standards Subsystem Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction in Use screen. The following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... View an existing transaction in Use record. N/A Type the Version ID in the Version ID field and the agency in the Agency field, and then press Enter Select a version transaction for EDI. Select Type S in the A field next to the transaction you want to select, and then press Enter Unselect a version transaction for EDI. Unselect Type U in the A field next to the preselected transaction (indicated by the word selected next to the transaction) you want to unselect, and press Enter. The system removes the word selected that is displayed next to the transaction. Note: The control transaction and the acknowledgement transactions (e.g., 997, 999, control) must always be selected if any other transactions are selected for a version. Note: If you receive the message Update not allowed the value in the Update Allowed field on the Version screen is set to N. This means that the version and all its transactions, segments, and elements cannot be updated. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF6=Nxt Vers Displays transaction codes for the next consecutive Version ID. Versions are displayed in ascending alphanumeric sequence. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. 3 - 70 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180 The Standards Subsystem Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Version ID (required) A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the standard. Agency (required) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version identification from the Standards file. Transaction ID A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification in which the version identification list is to begin. You can type a complete or partial Transaction ID in this field. The system displays up to ten transactions, starting with the nearest matching Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this field blank, the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the Standards file. Release No. A 1-position numeric field that specifies the release number for the starting transaction identification entered. Description (protected) A 52-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a particular transaction identification. Valid values are: S U = = Select transaction Unselect transaction Trans No. (protected) A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the transaction identification. Rlse No (protected) A 1-position alphanumeric field that specifies the release number of the transaction code. The release number is currently being used only for ANA TRADACOMS standards. Description (protected) A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 71 The Standards Subsystem Standard Association Screen EDIM105 Standard Association Screen EDIM105 Purpose The Standards Association screen allows you to access the Standards Association file. This file contains a list of Association values and the Agency codes that have been assigned to them. The batch Editors use this file to determine the agency to be used with the Version ID as the key to the optimized table file. The Association is located in positions 7 – 12 of the Version ID. How to Access Access the Standard Association screen in either of the following ways: • In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 13 to select Standard Association and press Enter. • Type 2.13 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Standard Association screen. Add Delete Info Update EDIM105 2.13______ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Association AIAG__ AMP___ ATE___ A01051 A02031 A03031 A04031 A09041 A10011 A14041 A15031 A16031 A94___ BISAC_ BR____ Agency X__ X__ SC_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ UN_ NH_ X__ JV_ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 3 - 72 STANDARD ASSOCIATION XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Description AIAG*______________________________ AMP*_______________________________ LOADED_BY_STANDARDS_MAINTENANCE____ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________ ODETTE_REMADV_V3R1*________________ ODETTE_STATAC_V3R1*________________ NHS*_______________________________ BOOK_INDUSTRY_ASSOCIATION*_________ JOINT_VENTURE______________________ PF3=Exit IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Standard Association Screen EDIM105 The Standards Subsystem Screen Actions Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... Do this ... Add a new Association record. Add Complete the screen fields, type A in A field and press Enter. Delete an existing Association record. Delete Display the record, type D in A field and press Enter. Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Info Type I in the A field next to the desired entry and press Enter. Change an existing Association record. Update Display the record, type the changes, type U in A field and press Enter. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. A (Action Code) A 1-position field that indicates the action you want to perform for a particular association. The top line of the screen lists valid actions. The valid action codes for the Standard Association screen: A I = = U D = = Add a new Association (Info) Display the date, time and user initials, on the message line, to indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed. Update an existing Association Delete an existing Association IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 3 - 73 The Standards Subsystem Standard Association Screen EDIM105 Association A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the ‘Association’ value as it is displayed in the EDI envelope (GS or UNG/UNH). Association is contained in positions 7 – 12 of the Version ID. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version identification. Description A 35-position that contains information about the Association/Agency relationship. 3 - 74 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 4 The Databank Subsystem Overview This chapter contains the following topics related to the Databank subsystem. Topic Page Before You Begin ................................................................................................................. 4-3 Databank Screens and Functions.......................................................................................... 4-10 How to Use the Maintenance Functions............................................................................... 4-14 Databank Maintenance Menu.........................................................EDIM250 ..................... 4-24 Interchange Directory Screen .........................................................EDIM254 .................... 4-27 Group Directory..............................................................................EDIM255 .................... 4-31 Group Directory – Date ..................................................................EDIM25A ................... 4-36 Interchange Status Screen...............................................................EDIM251 .................... 4-41 Group Status Screen .......................................................................EDIM252 .................... 4-48 Transaction Status Screen...............................................................EDIM253 .................... 4-55 Document Directory .......................................................................EDIM262 .................... 4-61 Document Status Screen .................................................................EDIM263 .................... 4-65 Change Audit Directory..................................................................EDIM268 .................... 4-70 Change Audit Status Screen ...........................................................EDIM269 .................... 4-74 Online Log Display Screen.............................................................EDIMOLD.................. 4-79 Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen.................................EDIM240 .................... 4-83 Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen ......................................EDIM241 .................... 4-89 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound ................................EDIM271 .................... 4-94 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound...................................EDIM271 .................... 4-99 Interchange Display Screen ............................................................EDIM256 .................. 4-103 Group Display Screen.....................................................................EDIM257 .................. 4-108 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound ................................EDIM258 .................. 4-113 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound ..................................EDIM258 .................. 4-118 Transaction Display Screen ............................................................EDIM259 .................. 4-123 Segment Display Screen.................................................................EDIM260 .................. 4-127 Data Element Display Screen .........................................................EDIM261 .................. 4-131 Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound ..................................EDIM265 .................. 4-135 Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound.....................................EDIM265 .................. 4-140 Document Display Screen ..............................................................EDIM264 .................. 4-145 Record Display Screen ...................................................................EDIM266 .................. 4-149 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-1 The Databank Subsystem Overview Field Display Screen.......................................................................EDIM267 .................. 4-152 Change Audit Status Detail Screen ................................................EDIM270 .................. 4-155 4-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Databank Subsystem Before You Begin What is the Databank? A databank is a repository for storing document/transaction data and any related control information. Using the Databank subsystem, you can control and monitor the document/ transaction flow through the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. What is in this Chapter? This chapter explains the menus and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Maintenance subsystem. In addition, this chapter describes how to use the databank maintenance functions. Databank Facility The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Facility provides a powerful set of capabilities for controlling and tracking the flow of documents between your EDI-enabled applications and your EDI trading partners. The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Facility takes advantage of the proven functions already in the Sterling Gentran:Basic family of products while adding functions that provide flexible control of documents as they pass through the system. The Databank Facility option, if implemented, is an integral part of your Sterling Gentran:Basic system, as shown in Figure 4.1. Use of the Databank Facility is optional. Outbound Communications Outbound Applications Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Inbound Applications Inbound Communications Figure 4.1 Databank Context IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-3 The Databank Subsystem Before You Begin Feature Summary The Sterling Gentran:Basic databank provides advanced features for addressing your EDI requirements. See the “Features and Functions” figure within this topic for an illustration of the features. The Databank Facility option provides control and tracking of documents through your EDI system for a wide range of users. See the “Databank Facility Users” figure within this topic for an illustration. The following major features are provided with the Databank Facility option. • Flexible Configuration All of the Databank features are optional. Configuring the various components of the Databank Facility is defined by the user based on their EDI processing requirements. For example, one implementation may choose to capture all application and EDI data on the databank. Another implementation may chose to capture just outbound EDI control and status information. If acknowledgment reconciliation is to be part of your implementation then the Outbound EDI Databank Directory must be used at a minimum. Acknowledgment reconciliation is reconciling acknowledgments received from your trading partners to outbound documents that have been sent to those trading partners. • Full Processing Concurrency All processing, including Batch/Online, Mapping/Compliance, and Inbound/Outbound, can run concurrently. • Complete Online Control and Tracking Immediate control and tracking of both application documents and EDI transactions is available to you with Databank Maintenance. With Online Databank Maintenance, the following actions can be performed against your application and EDI data: Select (Inquiry) Delete Data Edit (optionally restricted at installation) Manually Acknowledge Manual Network Status Update Reset for Reprocessing • Complete Online Change Audit Trails All online updates performed against the databank by users are captured and available for online inquiry. 4-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin • The Databank Subsystem Comprehensive Security Security by User ID and Division can be set up as tightly or loosely as required. • Data Archive/Restore Capabilities Application and EDI data can be archived and restored with the Databank Facility. You can manage their archives selectively based on flexible selection criteria and/or use the Housekeeping mode to maintain archives based on retention periods. • Duplicate Checking Application document duplicate checking is performed based on the user defined User Reference. EDI duplicate checking is also provided using the EDI Envelope Reference IDs. Processing can be controlled using these duplicate indicators. • Distribution and Process Control Application and/or EDI data can be stored in, and selectively extracted from, the Databank Facility. This store and extract capability allows processing to be scheduled based on your business needs. The store capability allows application and communication scheduling to be set up independently. The selective extract capability allows application documents and EDI interchanges to be extracted in the groupings that are required by your applications and communications. • Network Tracking Network Tracking extends EDI tracking to your networks. Network Tracking reconciles Network Status information to Interchanges that have been sent. The Online Network Status information posted to Interchanges is Received by Network, Processed by Network and Picked Up by Trading Partner. • Deferred Enveloping Deferred Enveloping is an optional feature that can be used to store un-enveloped data on the outbound EDI databank files throughout the day. This data can then be extracted for enveloping using a number of criteria, including transaction type, data, time, network, test-production status, partner, user, and batch run number. These selected transactions can then be enveloped and transmitted to the trading partner. This feature provides the following benefits: • Application and transmission schedule independence • Minimize the number of envelopes • Document-level control over mapping and editing errors • Document-level control over duplicate documents • Establish the maximum number of transactions per envelope IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-5 The Databank Subsystem Before You Begin Features and Functions Figure 4.2 illustrates the databank features and functions. CICS Online Inquiry Edit Delete Reprocess Manually Acknowledge Network Status Update Databank Archive/ Restore Inquiry Extract Store/ Reprocess Batch Figure 4.2 Databank Features/Functions 4-6 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Databank Subsystem Databank Facility Users Figure 4.3 illustrates the databank facility users. Purchasing Sterling Gentran:Basic Sterling Connect:Enterprise Accounts Receivable In-house Databank Accounts Payable Communications Facility Online Databank Batch Databank Maintenance Maintenance - EDI Coordinator - Order Desk Clerk - Operations - Management Figure 4.3 Databank Facility Users IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-7 The Databank Subsystem Before You Begin Architecture This section describes the Databank facility architecture and the major components. The Databank Facility provides Application/EDI data and information access, as illustrated in Figure 4.4. Application EDI Directory Directory - Control - Status - Control - Status Message Store Message Store - Document Data - EDI Data Change Audit Figure 4.4 Databank Information Databank Components The major components of the Databank facility are: Online Databank Facility All control and tracking of EDI transactions and your application documents can be performed online using the CICS-based Databank Maintenance option. Document, acknowledgment, network and communication status information for your document/ transactions can all be maintained online using the Online Databank Maintenance option. Batch Databank Maintenance With the Databank Facility, both application and EDI data can be archived and restored based on retention periods or flexible selection criteria. Batch Databank Inquiry Powerful Databank Inquiry tools provide both summary and detailed reporting of your databank information. Flexible Extract Tools The Databank Facility's Extract tools provide a wide range of selection criteria. The ability to extract application documents and EDI data, grouped according to the needs of your applications and communications, is provided with these Extract tools. 4-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Databank Subsystem Databank Processing Flow The Databank facility allows all forms of user data entering and exiting Sterling Gentran:Basic to be stored and processed. Figure 4.5 provides a detailed view of the processing flow. Outbound Outbound Mapper Application Application Application Inbound Application Extract Outbound Editor Outbound Outbound Application EDI Databank Databank Inbound Inbound Application EDI Databank Databank Inbound Mapper Outbound EDI Extract C o m m u n i c a t i o n s Inbound Editor Inbound Figure 4.5 Databank Processing Flow Who Should Use Databank Maintenance? Sterling Gentran:Basic provides many options for controlling both EDI and application document activity in your EDI environment. Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Maintenance functions should be used by the persons responsible for monitoring, controlling, and reconciling the flow of documents through Sterling Gentran:Basic to and from your communications and applications. Security Set-up Access to the Databank Maintenance feature is controlled through the use of the self-contained security system. The system allows you to define users with their own privileges. See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for information about security set-up. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4-9 The Databank Subsystem Databank Screens and Functions Databank Screens and Functions Figure 4.6 illustrates the overall flow of the Databank Maintenance feature. Databank Maintenance Menu Interchange Group Document Directory Directory Directory Change Log Audit Display Directory Interchange Group Transaction Document Status Status Status Status Change Audit Status Interchange Transaction Document Status Status Status Detail Detail Detail Interchange Group Display Display EDI Transaction Document Display Display Detail Segment Record Display Display Data Element Display Change Audit Status Field Display Figure 4.6 Databank Maintenance Screen Flow 4 - 10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Databank Screens and Functions The Databank Subsystem Additional Functions The following functions are available within Databank Maintenance from screens other than the Databank Maintenance Menu: Interchange Status Detail Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI interchange on the databank. EDI Interchange Display Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific interchange on the databank. EDI Group Display Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific functional group on the databank. EDI Transaction Display Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific transaction on the databank. Transaction Status Detail Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI transaction on the databank. Segment Display Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific segment on the databank. Data Element Display Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific data element on the databank. Document Status Detail Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI transaction on the databank. Document Display Used to display the application data for a specific document on the databank. Record Display Used to display the application data for a specific record on the databank. Field Display Used to display the application data for a specific field on the databank. From this screen users can edit the data. Change Audit Status Detail Used to view the details regarding a change that has been made to data on the databank by a user using Databank Maintenance. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 11 The Databank Subsystem Databank Screens and Functions Databank Jump Codes A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another, within a subsystem, while bypassing menu screens. All screens that are accessible by a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for more information about using jump codes. You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: Step 1: Press Home. The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field. Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter. Note: If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab to return to the next entry field on the screen. The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank subsystem menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. 4 - 12 Screen Title Sterling Gentran Main Menu Screen Name EDIM001 Jump Codes Numeric 0.0 0 Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250 3.0 3 DB Interchange Directory EDIM254 3.1 DB.IDIR Group Directory EDIM255 3.2 DB.GDIR Group Directory – Date EDIM25A 3.11 DB.GDTE Interchange Status EDIM251 3.3 DB.ISTAT Group Status EDIM252 3.4 DB.GSTAT Transaction Status EDIM253 3.5 DB.TSTAT Document Directory EDIM262 3.6 DB.DDIR Document Status EDIM263 3.7 DB.DSTAT Change Audit Directory EDIM268 3.8 DB.CADIR DB.ADIR Change Audit Status EDIM269 3.9 DB.CASTAT DB.ASTAT Online Log EDIMOLD 3.10 DB.LOG Alphabetic BSC MAIN IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Databank Screens and Functions Screen Title Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Acknowledgment Overdue Detail The Databank Subsystem Screen Name EDIM240 Jump Codes Numeric 3.12 Alphabetic ACK.OVER EDIM241 3.12.1 ACK.OVDTL See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 13 The Databank Subsystem How to Use the Maintenance Functions How to Use the Maintenance Functions To demonstrate the use of Databank Maintenance, a number of commonly used procedures are presented. The scenarios provided are: • Review detailed information regarding security setup. • Display the detailed status information for an EDI interchange. • Manually acknowledge a functional group. • Delete an outbound application document. • Reset an inbound application document for re-extraction. • Select an EDI transaction for detailed status viewing, and then link to the document status detail for that transaction. • View all change audit status information for online changes that have been applied to databank data for a specific partner. Display the Detailed Status Information for an EDI Interchange The procedure to display the detailed status information for an EDI interchange is described below: 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Interchange Status function and press Enter. The Interchange Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Interchange Status screen, type the Interchange ID and Qualifier to be displayed and press Enter. 4. Advance the insertion point to the interchange you wish to display. Type S beside the interchange you wish to display then press PF14. The Interchange Status Detail is displayed. 5. To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. Manually Acknowledge a Functional Group The procedure to manually acknowledge a functional group is described below: 4 - 14 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Interchange Status function and press Enter. The Interchange Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Interchange Status screen, type the Interchange ID and Qualifier to be displayed and press Enter. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide How to Use the Maintenance Functions The Databank Subsystem 4. Advance the insertion point to the interchange you wish to display. Type S beside the interchange you wish to display then press PF5. The Group Status screen is displayed. 5. Advance the insertion point to the group you wish to acknowledge. Type A beside the group you wish to acknowledge then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed. 6. Press PF10 to acknowledge the functional group or PF12 to cancel the request. A confirmation message is displayed. 7. To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. Delete an Outbound Application Document The procedure to delete an outbound application document is described below: 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Document Status function and press Enter. The Document Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Document Status screen, type the Partner ID and Qualifier to be displayed and press Enter. 4. Advance the insertion point to the application document you wish to delete. Type D beside the document you wish to delete then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed. 5. Press PF11 to delete the application document or PF12 to cancel the request. A confirmation message is displayed. 6. To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. Reset an Inbound Application Document for Reprocessing The procedure to reset an inbound application document for reprocessing is described below: 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Document Status function and press Enter. The Document Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Document Status screen, type the Partner ID and Qualifier to be displayed and press Enter. 4. Advance the insertion point to the document you wish to reset. Type R beside the document you wish to reset then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed. 5. Press PF10 to reset the application document or PF12 to cancel the request. A confirmation message is displayed. 6. To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 15 The Databank Subsystem How to Use the Maintenance Functions Select an EDI Transaction For Detailed Status Viewing, and Link to the Document Status Detail Screen for the Transaction The procedure to display the EDI transaction detailed status information and then link to the document status detail for the transaction is described below: 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Transaction Status function and press Enter. The Transaction Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Transaction Status screen, type the Group ID and Qualifier to be displayed and press Enter. 4. Advance the insertion point to the transaction you want to display. Type S beside the transaction you wish to display then press PF5. The Transaction Status Detail screen is displayed. 5. From the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5 to display document status detail. 6. To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. View All Change Audit Status Information for Online Changes that have been Applied to Databank Data for a Specific Partner The procedure to view all change audit status information is described below: 4 - 16 1. From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. 2. From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Change Audit Status function and press Enter. The Change Audit Status screen is displayed. 3. From the Change Audit Status screen, type the Partner ID, Qualifier, and Databank file to be displayed then press Enter. 4. To exit the display, press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide How to Use the Maintenance Functions The Databank Subsystem Functions Actions that can be performed in Databank Maintenance are identified on the first row of each screen in Databank Maintenance. Valid actions that can be performed from screens within Databank Maintenance include: Acknowledge: Used to manually acknowledge EDI data for which you expect an acknowledgment for outbound EDI databank. Delete: Used to logically delete databank information. Reset: Used to reset databank data for reprocessing. Select: Used for viewing databank information. Network: Used to manually set the Network Status for an interchange to be completed on the outbound EDI databank. Note: These actions are described further in the sections that follow each screen. User Reference Information User reference information provides a relationship link between application data and EDI data. When you need to refer to databank records, user reference information will be helpful in locating a specific record. You have the option of defining your own user reference information. Creating an application key when performing application databanking or activating the Audit Indicator flag for a segment element when performing EDI databanking, can result in user reference information. During a databank run, Sterling Gentran:Basic generates a sequential default number, referred to as a Reference Tag, for each transaction. Then, for each transaction, Sterling Gentran looks for an application key or an active Audit Indicator. If found, Sterling Gentran concatenates the data to the databank and specifies it as user reference information. If not found, Sterling Gentran uses the Reference Tag as user reference information. Sterling Gentran displays “protected” user reference information in the User Reference field on the following screens: • Transaction Status (EDIM253) • Transaction Status Detail (EDIM258) • Document Status (EDIM263) • Change Audit Status Detail (EDIM269) • Document Display (EDIM264) This section explains how to apply user reference information and the process in which Sterling Gentran performs to populate the User Reference fields. The processes vary for inbound and outbound, as well as for EDI databanking and application databanking. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 17 The Databank Subsystem How to Use the Maintenance Functions Inbound EDI Databanking For inbound EDI databanking, you can instruct Sterling Gentran to use the value specified for a segment element as user reference information by activating the Audit Indicator flag for the element. Scenario: Let’s say that you are receiving an 810 (invoice) document and you have entered an elementspecific value for each segment existing in the 810. When you activate the Audit Indicator flag for the element on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling Gentran will pass the element value from the application standard to the databank key and use the value as user reference information. See the topic “Segment Element Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information. Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is IEnnnnnnnn. When an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element screen (EDIM140), Sterling Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the User Reference information. Inbound Application Databanking On the Application Partner Reference (EDIM555) screen, you can create a user reference key by entering information that is meaningful to your organization in the Application Key field(s). After a databank run, Sterling Gentran looks for a user reference key. When Sterling Gentran finds the key, the data represented in the key is applied as user reference information. See the topic “Application Partner Reference Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information. Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is IAnnnnnnnn. When an application key is not created on the Application Partner Reference screen, Sterling Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information. 4 - 18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide How to Use the Maintenance Functions The Databank Subsystem Inbound EDI Databank Flow Figure 4.7 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when performing inbound EDI databanking. Audit Indicator First Choice: Looks for value in Element (EDI) Reference Tag Second Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (EDI) User Reference Result: If Audit Indicator, value in Element If Audit Indicator not activated, Reference Tag (EDI) User Reference Action: Passes User Reference to Sterling Gentran Mapper Figure 4.7 User Reference – Inbound EDI Processing Flow IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 19 The Databank Subsystem How to Use the Maintenance Functions Inbound Application Processing Flow Figure 4.8 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when performing inbound application databanking. Application Definition First Choice: Looks for values defined Application Key fields (EDI) User Reference Second Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (Application) Reference Tag Third Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (Application) User Reference Result: If Application Key defined, values in fields If Application Key not defined, EDI User Ref If Application Key not defined or EDI databanking not performed, Reference Tag Figure 4.8 User Reference – Inbound Application Processing Flow Note: When inbound EDI Databanking is not performed and inbound Application databanking is performed, the only value choice for user reference information is the value generated for the application Reference Tag (i.e., IAnnnnnnnn). 4 - 20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide How to Use the Maintenance Functions The Databank Subsystem Outbound Application Databanking On the Application Partner Reference (EDIM555) screen, you can create a user reference key by entering information that is meaningful to your organization in the Application Key field(s). After a databank run, Sterling Gentran looks for a user reference key. When Sterling Gentran finds the key, the data represented in the key is applied as user reference information. See the topic “Application Partner Reference Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information. Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is OAnnnnnnnn. When an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information. Outbound EDI Databanking For inbound EDI databanking, you can instruct Sterling Gentran to use the value specified for a segment element as user reference information by activating the Audit Indicator flag for the element. Scenario: Let’s say that you are sending an PO (850) document and you have entered an element-specific value for each segment existing in the PO. When you activate the Audit Indicator flag for the element on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling Gentran will pass the element value from the application standard to the databank key and use the value as user reference information. See the topic “Segment Element Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information. Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is OEnnnnnnnn. When an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element screen (EDIM140), Sterling Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 21 The Databank Subsystem How to Use the Maintenance Functions Outbound Application Processing Flow Figure 4.9 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when performing outbound application databanking. Application Definition First Choice: Looks for values defined Application Key fields (EDI) User Reference Second Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (Application) Reference Tag Third Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (Application) User Reference Result: If Application Key defined, values in fields If Application Key not defined, EDI User Ref If Application Key not defined or EDI databanking not performed, Reference Tag Figure 4.9 User Reference – Outbound Application Processing Flow Note: When outbound EDI Databanking is not performed and outbound Application databanking is performed, the only value choice for User Reference information is the value generated for the application Reference Tag (i.e., IAnnnnnnnn). 4 - 22 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide How to Use the Maintenance Functions The Databank Subsystem Outbound EDI Databank Flow Figure 4.10 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when performing outbound EDI databanking. Audit Indicator First Choice: Looks for value in Element (EDI) Reference Tag Second Choice: Looks for Sterling Gentran generated value (EDI) User Reference Result: If Audit Indicator, value in Element If Audit Indicator not activated, Reference Tag (EDI) User Reference Action: Passes User Reference to Sterling Gentran Mapper Figure 4.10 User Reference – Outbound EDI Processing Flow IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 23 The Databank Subsystem Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250 Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250 Purpose Databank Maintenance provides the online ability to directly control and view application data and EDI data that are processed by Sterling Gentran:Basic. Change Audit functions provide complete details of all online changes made by users to databank data. The Online Log display is also available within Databank Maintenance for viewing system status and exceptions. The Databank Maintenance Menu provides a list of options for selecting the Databank Maintenance functions. How to Access Access the Databank Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways: • Type 3 to select Databank Maintenance Menu from the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Databank Maintenance Menu. EDIM250 3.0 DATABANK MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. __ Enter PF1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Interchange Directory Group Directory Interchange Status Group Status Transaction Status Document Directory Document Status Change Audit Directory Change Audit Status Log Display Group Directory - Date Acknowledgments Overdue PF3=Exit PF6=Refresh PF15=Logoff Databank Maintenance functions fall into the following four general categories: 4 - 24 • EDI data related control and inquiry functions • Application document related control and inquiry functions • Change Audit related inquiry functions • Online Log display from which you can monitor system status and exceptions IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250 The Databank Subsystem Databank Maintenance Functions The following table describes the Databank Maintenance functions that can be selected from the Databank Maintenance Menu. Menu Options Description 1 Interchange Directory Lists the Interchange IDs that have EDI interchanges on the databank. 2 Group Directory Lists the Group IDs that have EDI functional groups on the databank. 3 Interchange Status Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI interchanges currently on the databank. 4 Group Status Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI functional groups within an EDI interchange. 5 Transaction Status Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI transactions within a functional group. 6 Document Directory Lists the Partner IDs for which there are application documents on the databank. 7 Document Status Enables you to maintain and change the status of application documents on the databank. 8 Change Audit Directory Lists the Partner IDs that have data on the databank to which users have applied online changes. 9 Change Audit Status Lists the Envelope Reference IDs that have data on the databank to which users have applied online changes. 10 Log Display Displays the monitor system status and exceptions. 11 Group Directory – Date Lists the Group IDs that have EDI functional groups on the databank. 12 Acknowledgment Overdue Lists the Partners that have overdue/waiting acknowledgments. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF6=Refresh Caution: Refreshes the CICS VSAM buffers after a batch update. The VSAM buffers are refreshed by closing and opening all of the databank files. All databank files are updated through a batch program. Any online changes go to a pending file and are later applied through a batch program. CICS uses buffers, or hold areas, when reading IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 25 The Databank Subsystem Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250 files. While the information you need is still available in those buffers, CICS does not re-read the file. Whether or not CICS automatically refreshes the buffers is influenced by these factors: volume of activity against the file, VSAM share options assigned to the file, number of buffers, and pool sizes. In most environments, the Refresh function is not required because normal CICS processing results in sufficient VSAM activity to refresh VSAM buffers automatically. However, if batch updates are run while the online databank is active, the CICS buffers do not show the latest information until the buffers are refreshed. Problems navigating between different levels of EDI envelopes or between directory and data screens may indicate that your databank buffers need to be refreshed. Pressing PF6 immediately interrupts all online databank users and repositions them to the Databank Maintenance Menu. Any databank online changes prior to the last save need to be re-applied after the Refresh function has completed. Closing and re-opening all of the databank files requires a few seconds to complete. Because of the impact of the Refresh function on the databank, only users with security access Level 1 are permitted to use the Refresh function. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection Type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to select and press Enter. 4 - 26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254 Purpose The Interchange Directory is used to view which Interchange IDs have EDI interchanges on the databank. This screen enables you to start the list at a specified Interchange ID/Qualifier and restrict the list to just inbound or outbound interchanges. Leaving these fields blank produces a list of all Interchange IDs for which there are interchanges on the databank. How to Access Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 1 to select Interchange Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM254 3.1_______ Intchg Part ID In/Outbound A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 _______________VENDOR-1____________ Qual _______________ _ Databank G (Gentran,Realtime) Interchange Partner ID VENDOR VENDOR-1 QCICSSEND QCISASEND XXX1 VENDOR-1 YOUR COMPANY 616094041A Qual 12 ZZ ZZ ZZ 01 TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide I/O I I I I I I I Dbk G G G G G G G Div 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 PF5=Interchg 4 - 27 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254 Relationship Mode Select EDIM254 3.1_______ Intchg - User In/Outbound A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1___________________________ Partner _______________ I Databank G (Gentran,Realtime) User VENDOR-1 1234 5000119000006 5000169 6147937000 Partner 1234 5010081000001 5010081000001 5136666666 I/O I I I I I Dbk G G G G G Div 000 000 000 000 000 TO SELECT USER/PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE USER Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Interchg PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Directory. The following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Display the Interchange Status screen for an Interchange ID on the Interchange Directory Associated with this Do this ... screen action ... Select By typing S in the A field and pressing PF5, you can select an Interchange ID from which you can view the status of interchanges for that Interchange ID. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Interchg 4 - 28 Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected. Type S in the A field of Interchange ID you want to select and press PF5. This screen displays a list of either inbound, outbound, or both inbound and outbound interchanges (as specified on the Interchange Directory) and their statuses. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254 The Databank Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Intchg Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the interchangelevel trading Partner ID to which the Interchange Directory list should begin. A partial value for the Interchange Partner ID can be entered to position the list at the selected value. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Qualifier for the interchange-level trading partner (if applicable). Field Intchg – User Partner Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the interchange-level User ID field to which the Interchange Directory list should begin. A partial value for the Interchange User ID may be entered to position the list at the selected value. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the interchange-level trading partner (if applicable). In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Interchange IDs which are inbound-only, outbound-only or both. Valid values are: I O blank Inbound only Interchange IDs Outbound only Interchange IDs Both inbound and outbound Interchange IDs Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Interchange IDs from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G R Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 29 The Databank Subsystem blank Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254 Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select an Interchange ID. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Interchange ID you want to select, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Interchange Status screen for a particular Interchange ID on the Interchange Directory, type S in the A field for the interchange you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Interchange Directory. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Interchange A 35-character Partner ID alphanumeric field that (protected) identifies the interchange. The Interchange Partner ID is the interchange-level trading partner name. Relationship Mode Field Description User A 15-character alphanumeric (protected) field that contains the interchange-level User ID. Qual (protected) Partner (protected) A 4-character field that contains the interchangelevel trading partner Qualifier, if applicable. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the interchange-level trading partner (if applicable). I/O (protected) Displays the inbound or outbound code that is defined for the Interchange Partner ID. This code designates whether the interchange was outbound or inbound. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the Interchange Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G R Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Div (protected) Displays the division code that has been associated with the Databank record. 4 - 30 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM255 The Databank Subsystem Group Directory EDIM255 Purpose The Group Directory is used to view EDI functional groups, by their group-level trading partner name and Qualifier. You can also restrict the list to inbound or outbound data, acknowledgment status types and a search limit. How to Access Access the Group Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 2 to select Group Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM255 3.2_______ GROUP DIRECTORY XXX Group Part ID VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual In/Outbound I Acknowledge Stat Databank G Search Limit A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Group Partner ID VENDOR-1 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 06/01/2011 12:00:00 _______________ _ ___ Group Qual I/O Dbk Envelope Ref I G 000000007 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Group Func. Ack ID St IN A INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 INVOIC 7 PF6=GDate 4 - 31 The Databank Subsystem Group Directory EDIM255 Relationship Mode Select EDIM255 3.2_______ Group - User In/Outbound Databank A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ GROUP DIRECTORY XXX YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner _ Acknowledge Stat G Search Limit User YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY YOUR-COMPANY Partner VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 VENDOR-1 Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1_______ _ ___ Group I/O Dbk Envelope Ref O G ( DEFERRED ) O G ( DEFERRED ) O G 000000003 O G 000000004 O G 000000005 O G 000000005 O G 000000006 O G 000000006 O G 000000006 I G 000000007 PF5=Group Func. Ack ID St RA TX TX W PO W TX W PO W RA W PO W PO W IN A PF6=GDate Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Group Status screen for a Group ID on the Group Directory Associated with this Do this ... screen action ... Select Type S in the A field next to the Group ID you want to view and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Group To select a Group ID, type S in the A field next to the selected Group ID, and press PF5. The Group Status screen for the Group ID selected is displayed. This screen displays a list of inbound or outbound functional groups (as specified on the Group Directory) and their statuses. PF6=GDate To transfer to the Group Directory – Date screen, do one of the following: • Press PF6 without selecting a Group ID. • Select a Group ID by typing S in the A (Action Code) field next to the selected Group ID and pressing PF6. 4 - 32 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM255 The Databank Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the group-level trading partner name that the Group Directory list should begin with. A partial value for the Group – Part ID can be entered. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Qualifier for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). Field Group – User Partner Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the group-level user name that the Group Directory list should begin with. A partial value for the Group – User can be entered. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups which are inbound-only, outbound-only or both. Valid values are: I O blank Inbound only functional groups Outbound only functional groups Both inbound and outbound functional groups IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 33 The Databank Subsystem Group Directory EDIM255 Acknowledge Stat A 1-character alphabetic field which can be used to restrict the list to functional groups with a specific acknowledgment status. Valid values are: A E G I N O P R U W Accepted Accepted with errors Received (EDIFACT only) Indeterminate Not required Overdue acknowledgment Partial acceptance Rejected Manually acknowledged Waiting acknowledgment Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only blank Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks Search Limit A 3-digit number used to limit the number of records that should be read for matching the acknowledge status criteria requested. This limit restricts the amount of time the system searches for matching records. Search limit is only used when using acknowledge status as a search criteria. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Group Partner ID. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S next to the selected Group Partner ID, and then press PF5. If you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Group Partner ID on the Group Directory, type S in the A field for the group you want to view. Then, press PF5. If you want to view the Group Directory – Date screen for a particular group partner ID, type S in the A field for the group you want to view, then press PF6. 4 - 34 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory EDIM255 The Databank Subsystem See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Group Directory. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group A 35-character field that Partner ID identifies the group-level (protected) partner name. Field User (protected) Qual (protected) Partner (protected) A 4-character field that contains the group-level trading partner Qualifier, if applicable. Relationship Mode Description A 15-character field that identifies the group-level user name. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). I/O (protected) Displays the inbound or outbound code. This code designates whether the functional group for the Group Partner ID was outbound or inbound. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the functional group is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Group Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the functional group envelope reference identification for the functional group being displayed. Func. ID (protected) Displays the functional identification (e.g., PO, IN, or FA) for the Group Partner ID displayed. Ack St (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the functional group displayed. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors G Received (EDIFACT only) I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 35 The Databank Subsystem Group Directory – Date EDIM25A Group Directory – Date EDIM25A Purpose The Group Directory – Date is used to view EDI functional groups by their group-level trading partner name and Qualifier. You can also restrict the list to inbound or outbound data, date, and a search limit. How to Access Access the Group Directory – Date screen in either of these two ways: • Type 11 to select Group Directory – Date from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.11 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Directory – Date screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM25A 3.11______ Group Part ID In/Outbound From Date...: To Date.....: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ GROUP DIRECTORY - DATE VENDOR-1___________________________ I Databank G __________ __________ Group Partner ID VENDOR-1 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 VENDOR-5 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual _______________ Search Limit ___ Group Qual I/O Dbk Envelope Ref I G 000000007 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 I G 00000000000155 TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 36 XXX PF5=Group Date 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 PF6=GDir IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory – Date EDIM25A The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM25A 3.11______ Group - User In/Outbound From Date...: To Date.....: A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ User YOUR YOUR YOUR YOUR YOUR GROUP DIRECTORY - DATE ___________________________________ _ Databank G __________ __________ COMPANY COMPANY COMPANY COMPANY COMPANY Partner THEIR COMPANY VENDOR-1 VENDOR-2 VENDOR-3 VENDOR-4 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner _______________ Search Limit ___ Group I/O Dbk Envelope Ref I G 000000007 O G 000000001 O G 000000001 O G 000000001 O G 000000001 TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE USER Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF5=Group Date 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 PF6=GDir Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Directory – Date screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Group Status screen for a Group ID on the Group DirectoryDate Associated with this Do this ... screen action ... Select Type S in the A field next to the Group ID you want to view and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Group To select a Group ID, type S in the A field next to the selected Group ID, and press PF5. The Group Status screen for the Group ID selected is displayed. This screen displays a list of inbound or outbound functional groups (as specified on the Group Directory) and their statuses. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 37 The Databank Subsystem PF6=GDir Group Directory – Date EDIM25A To transfer to the Group Directory screen, do one of the following: • Press PF6 without selecting a Group ID. • Select a Group ID by typing S in the A (Action Code) field next to the selected Group ID and pressing PF6. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the group-level trading partner name that the Group Directory list should begin with. A partial value for the Group – Part ID can be entered. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Qualifier for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). Field Group – User Partner Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the group-level user name that the Group Directory list should begin with. A partial value for the Group – User can be entered. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups which are inbound-only, outbound-only or both. Valid values are: I O blank 4 - 38 Inbound only functional groups Outbound only functional groups Both inbound and outbound functional groups IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Directory – Date EDIM25A The Databank Subsystem Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only blank Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks Search Limit A 3-digit number used to limit the number of records that should be read for matching the acknowledge status criteria requested. This limit restricts the amount of time the system searches for matching records. Search limit is only used when using acknowledge status as a search criteria. From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that indicates the date you want the list of groups to start with. Type the date in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY. If a date is not entered for this field, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date used for the search is the output date. To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that indicates the date you want the list of groups to end with. Type the date in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date used for the search is the output date. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Group Partner ID. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S next to the selected Group Partner ID, and then press PF5. If you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Group Partner ID on the Group Directory-Date screen, type S in the A field for the group you want to view. Then, press PF5. If you want to view the Group Directory screen for a particular Group Partner ID, type S in the A field for the group you want to view, then press PF6. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Group Directory. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 39 The Databank Subsystem Group Directory – Date EDIM25A Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group A 35-character field that Partner ID identifies the group-level (protected) partner name. Relationship Mode Field Description User A 15-character field that (protected) identifies the group-level user name. Qual (protected) Partner (protected) A 4-character field that contains the group-level trading partner Qualifier, if applicable. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the interchange-level trading partner (if applicable). I/O (protected) Displays the inbound or outbound code. This code designates whether the functional group for the Group Partner ID was outbound or inbound. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the functional group is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Group Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the functional group envelope reference identification for the functional group being displayed. Date For inbound groups, this field displays the date the group was loaded onto the databank. For outbound groups, this field displays the output date for the group. The date is in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY. 4 - 40 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 Purpose The Interchange Status screen displays a list of interchanges and their status for a specified Interchange Partner ID. Several selection fields are available for specifying which interchanges to list. How to Access Access the Interchange Status screen in any one of the following ways: • Type 3 to select Interchange Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type S in the A field next to the Interchange ID on the Interchange Directory and press PF5. • Type 3.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Acknowledge Select Delete Reset Network EDIM251 3.3_______ INTERCHANGE STATUS Intchg Part ID. : Name . . . . . : From Date . . . : To Date . . . . : Status - Network: In/Outbound . . : XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual _______________ TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN __________ Time _____ Division 000 __________ Time _____ _ Ack _ Int Env Ref: ______________ I Databank G Rec Interchange A Stat Envelope Ref _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 Date 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Time 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 Group Count 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 Char Count 0000006392 0000006392 0000006392 0000006552 0000006552 0000006392 0000006392 PF3=Exit PF4=Dir IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Status Ack Net Comm I/O Dbk N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G PF5=Group PF6=Next ID PF14=Dtl 4 - 41 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 Relationship Mode Acknowledge Select Delete Reset Network EDIM251 3.3_______ INTERCHANGE STATUS XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Intchg - User ___________________________________ Partner _______________ Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN From Date . . . : __________ Time _____ Division 000 To Date . . . . : __________ Time _____ Status - Network: _ Ack _ Int Env Ref: ______________ In/Outbound . . : I Databank G Rec Interchange A Stat Envelope Ref _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 _ 000000005 Date 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Time 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 12:00 Group Count 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 PF3=Exit PF4=Dir Char Count 0000006392 0000006392 0000006392 0000006552 0000006552 0000006392 0000006392 Status Ack Net Comm I/O Dbk N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G N I G PF5=Group PF6=Next ID PF14=Dtl Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Status screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Associated with this screen action ... Do this ... Manually acknowledge an interchange Acknowledge Type A in the A field next to the desired Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Display the Group Status screen Select Type S in the A field next to the desired Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press PF5. Delete an interchange Delete Type D in the A field next to the desired interchange and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Reset an interchange for reprocessing Reset Type R in the A field next to the desired interchange and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Manually update an interchange network status to complete Network Type N in the A field next to the Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Note: The above transactions must be applied by: Inbound: Executing EBDI001 with the global parameter INBOUND EDI DATABANKING REPROCESS. Outbound: Executing EDID205. 4 - 42 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 The Databank Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Displays the Interchange Display screen. The EDI data for the Interchange Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed. PF4=Dir Displays the Interchange Directory. PF5=Group Displays the Group Status screen. The functional groups for the Interchange Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed. PF6=Next ID Displays the interchanges for the next Interchange ID on the databank. PF14=Dtl Displays the Interchange Status Detail screen. Status detail information for the Interchange Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field is displayed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Intchg Part ID A 35-character alphanumeric field used to advance to an interchange-level Partner ID that you want to review. When this field is left blank, the list of interchanges starts with the first found interchange on the databank. Field Group – User IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field used to advance to an interchangelever user identification that you want to review. When this field is left blank, the list of interchanges starts with the first interchange on the databank. 4 - 43 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Qual (Partner) Field A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). If this field is left blank, the first qualifier value for the Interchange Partner ID is listed. Partner Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). Name (protected) A description of the Interchange ID using the Partner subsystem. From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of interchanges to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound interchanges, the date used for the search is the date the interchange was loaded. For outbound interchanges, the date used for the search is the output date. From Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of interchanges to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. Note: For inbound interchanges, the time used for the search is the time the interchange was loaded. For outbound interchanges, the time used for the search is the output time. Division (protected) A 3-character alphanumeric field that contains the division defined to the partner profile, which was used to process the interchange. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information about division access. To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of interchanges to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound interchanges, the date used for the search is the date the interchange was loaded. For outbound interchanges, the date used for the search is the output date. 4 - 44 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 The Databank Subsystem To Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of interchanges to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. Note: For inbound interchanges, the time used for the search is the time the interchange was loaded. For outbound interchanges, the time used for the search is the output time. Status – Network A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which Network Status type should be used to build the list. If this field is left blank, all Network Status types are displayed. Valid values are: E N P R S U W Errors were encountered during network processing As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this interchange, network tracking is not performed for this interchange. Partner has picked up the interchange Network has received the interchange Network has sorted (processed) the interchange User has manually set to a network completed status Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network Ack A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be used to build the list. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment Status types are displayed. Valid values are: A G I N O R U W Accepted Received (EDIFACT only) Indeterminate Not required Overdue acknowledgment Rejected Manually acknowledged Waiting acknowledgment Int Env Ref A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the Interchange Envelope Reference that should be used to build the list. If this field is left blank, all interchange records will be displayed regardless of the Interchange Envelope Reference ID. In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the list to Interchange IDs which are inboundonly, outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, both inbound and outbound interchanges are listed. Valid values are: I O Inbound only Interchange IDs Outbound only Interchange IDs IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 45 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the list to Interchange IDs that are from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G R blank Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type the letter next to the selected interchange envelope reference ID. Then, press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Interchange Envelope Reference ID on the Interchange Status screen, type S in the A field for the interchange you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Interchange Status screen. Rec Stat (protected) Displays the last online action performed against the interchange. Valid values are: D has been marked for deletion A has been manually acknowledged N has been manually set to Network completed status R has been reset for reprocessing B has been bypassed (review change audit for more information) P has been partially applied (review change audit for more information) Interchange Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange. Date (protected) For inbound interchanges, displays the date the interchange was loaded onto the databank. For outbound interchanges, displays the output date for the interchange. The date has the format MM/DD/YYYY. Time (protected) For inbound interchanges displays, the time the interchange was loaded onto the databank. For outbound interchanges, displays the output time for the interchange. The time has the format HH:MM. Group Count (protected) Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange. Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters within the interchange. 4 - 46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Screen EDIM251 The Databank Subsystem Status Ack (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are: A Accepted I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Status Net (protected) Displays the current network status for the interchange. Valid values are: E N Errors were encountered during network processing As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this interchange, network tracking is not performed for this interchange. Partner has picked up the interchange Network has received the interchange Network has sorted (processed) the interchange User has manually set to a network completed status Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network P R S U W Status Comm (protected) If the Sterling Gentran:Plus product is installed, this field displays the first five VSAM Batch Status flags for the interchange. See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide for further information about status flags. I/O (protected) Displays the direction of the interchange. Valid values are: I O Inbound Outbound Dbk (protected) Displays whether the Interchange ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G R Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 47 The Databank Subsystem Group Status Screen EDIM252 Group Status Screen EDIM252 Purpose The Group Status screen displays a list of groups and their status for a Group Partner ID. Several selection fields are available for specifying which groups to list. How to Access Access the Group Status Screen in any one of the following ways: • Type 4 to select Group Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type S in the A field next to the Group ID on the Group Directory and press PF5. • Type 3.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Note: If you navigate to the Group Status screen from the Interchange Status screen, and the selected interchange has been duplicated on the databank, the system displays only groups for the selected interchange. If you navigate directly to the Group Status screen and select an interchange that is duplicated on the databank, the system displays duplicate groups. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Acknowledge Select Delete EDIM252 3.4_______ Intchg Part ID Int. Env. Ref : Group Part ID. . Group Name . . : Func Group ID. : From Date . . : To Date . . . : Acknowldge Stat: GROUP STATUS XXX YOUR_COMPANY_______________________ 000000023_____ GSSENDER___________________________ ______ __________ __________ N Time Time _____ _____ 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual ZZ_____________ Qual _______________ Division Loaded In/Outbound 000 06/01/2011 12:00 I Databank G Rec Func Group Transactions Char. Acknowledged A Stat ID Envelope Ref Count Acptd Count Date Time St _ BF 000000008 000002 000002 0000003448 N _ _ _ _ _ END OF GROUPS Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg PF5=Trans PF6=Nx Gr ID PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 48 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Status Screen EDIM252 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Acknowledge Select Delete EDIM252 3.4_______ Int - User . . . Int. Env. Ref Group - User Group Name . . : Functional ID From Date . . . To Date . . . . Acknowledge Stat GROUP STATUS XXX YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner (__DEFERRED__) YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner ______ __________ __________ _ Time Time _____ _____ 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1_______ VENDOR-1_______ Division: 000 Output: In/Outbound O Databank Rec Func Group Transactions A Stat ID Envelope Ref Count Acptd _ PO ( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000 _ RA ( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000 _ TX ( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000 _ _ _ END OF GROUPS Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Char. Acknowledged Count Date Time 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000 PF5=Trans G St PF6=Nx Gr ID Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Status screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Manually acknowledge a functional group Associated with this screen action ... Acknowledge Do this ... Type A in the A field next to the desired Group Envelope Reference ID and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Display the Transaction Status screen Select Type S in the A field next to the Group Envelope Reference ID for which functional group you want to view. Then, press PF5. Delete a group ID Delete Type D in the A field next to the desired Group Partner ID and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 49 The Databank Subsystem Group Status Screen EDIM252 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Displays the Group Display screen. The EDI data for the Group Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed. PF4=Dir Displays the Group Directory. OR PF4=Interchg Displays the Interchange Status. PF5=Trans Displays the Transaction Status screen. The transactions for the Group Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field is displayed. PF6=Nx Gr ID Displays the groups for the next Group Partner ID on the databank. PF10=Ack Manually acknowledges the selected functional group. The system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the Acknowledge action. PF11=Del The Delete function key is displayed when a Delete action is requested. The system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the request. For further information on Databank Maintenance and available options, refer to the Databank Utility Programs and Reports chapter in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 50 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Status Screen EDIM252 The Databank Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Intchg Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the interchange identification for which you want to view groups. If this field is left blank, the list of groups starts with the first interchange on the databank. Relationship Mode Field Description Int – User A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the interchange identification for which you want to view groups. If this field is left blank, the list of groups starts with the first interchange on the databank. Qual (Partner) Partner A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). If this field is left blank, the first qualifier value for the Interchange Partner ID is listed. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). Int. Env. Ref A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the interchange envelope reference identification for which you want to view functional groups. If this field is left blank, the first Interchange Envelope Reference ID for the Interchange Partner ID is displayed. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the group identification for which you want to view Functional Groups. If this field is left blank, the list of groups starts with the first group on the databank for the Interchange ID being displayed. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Group Partner ID (if applicable). If this field is left blank, the first qualifier value for the Group Partner ID is listed. Field Group – User Partner IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Relationship Mode Description A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the group partner identification for which you want to view functional groups. If this field is left blank, the list of groups starts with the first interchange on the databank. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the group partner identification for the interchange. 4 - 51 The Databank Subsystem Group Status Screen EDIM252 Group Name (User/Part) (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the Group Partner ID, using partner maintenance. Func(tional Group) ID A 6-character alphanumeric value that contains the functional group identification that you want used to limit the search for functional groups. From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of groups to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date used for the search is the output date. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the group being displayed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. From Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of groups to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. Note: For inbound groups, the time used for the search is the time the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the time used for the search is the output time. To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of groups to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date used for the search is the output date. To Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of groups to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and time. Note: For inbound groups, the time used for the search is the time the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the time used for the search is the output time. 4 - 52 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Status Screen EDIM252 The Databank Subsystem Loaded For inbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups were loaded into the databank. For outbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups were processed through the databank (output). Acknowledge Stat A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be used to search for functional groups. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment status types are displayed. Valid values are: A E G I N O P R U W Accepted Accepted with errors Received (EDIFACT only) Indeterminate Not required Overdue acknowledgment Partial acceptance Rejected Manually acknowledged Waiting acknowledgment In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Group IDs which are inbound-only, outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, any Inbound functional groups and outbound functional groups are listed. Valid values are: I Inbound only Group IDs O Outbound only Group IDs Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Group IDs that are from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G R blank Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type the letter next to the selected functional group ID, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Transaction Status screen for a particular functional group on the Group Status screen, type S in the A field for the functional group you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Group Status screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 53 The Databank Subsystem Group Status Screen EDIM252 Rec Stat (protected) Displays the last online action performed against the Group. Valid values are: D has been marked for deletion A has been manually acknowledged R has been reset for reprocessing B has been bypassed (review change audit for more information) P has been partially applied (review change audit for more information) Func ID (protected) Displays the functional identification for the functional group. Group Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the group envelope reference identification for the Group. Transactions Count (protected) Displays the number of transaction sets in the functional group. Transactions Acptd (protected) Displays the transaction sets which were accepted according to functional acknowledgment processing. Char. Count (protected) Displays the number of characters in the functional group. Acknowledged Date (protected) For inbound functional groups field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was generated for the group received. For outbound functional groups this field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was received for the group sent. Acknowledged Time (protected) For inbound functional groups, this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment was generated for the group received. For outbound functional groups this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment was received for the functional group sent. Acknowledged St (protected) For inbound functional groups, this field displays the status set by the Editor during compliance checking. This status is passed to your partner in the returned acknowledgment. For outbound functional groups this field displays the acknowledgment status returned by your partner for this functional group. Valid values are: A E I N O P R U W 4 7 8 4 - 54 Accepted Accepted with errors Indeterminate Not required Overdue acknowledgment Partial acceptance Rejected Manually acknowledged Waiting acknowledgment Rejected (EDIFACT only) Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) Received (EDIFACT only) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 Purpose The Transaction Status screen displays a list of transaction sets and their status for a specified Group. Several selection fields are available for specifying which transactions to list. How to Access Access the Transaction Status screen in either of these two ways: • Type 5 to select Transaction Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Note: If you navigate to the Transaction Status screen from the Group Status screen, and the selected group has been duplicated on the databank, the system displays only transactions for the selected group. If you navigate directly to the Transaction Status screen and select a group that is duplicated on the databank, the system displays duplicate transactions. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Acknowledge Select Delete EDIM253 3.5_______ Group Part Group Name Group Env. From Date To Date . Acknowldge ID. : . . : Ref : . . : . . : Stat: TRANSACTION STATUS XXX VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual: TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN 000000007_____ Division: __________ Time: _____ Loaded: __________ Time: _____ In/Outbound: _ Envelope Ref: Rec Transaction User A Stat Set Envelope Ref Reference _ 810 000070001 INV01 _ 810 000070002 INV02 _ 810 000070003 INV03 _ 810 000070004 INV04 _ 810 000070005 INV05 _ 810 000070006 INV06 _ _ END OF TRANSACTIONS PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 06/01/2011 12:00:00 _______________ 000 06/01/2011 12:00 I Databank: G ______________ Acknowledged Date Time St 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A PF5=Detail PF6=Nx Gr ID 4 - 55 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 Relationship Mode Acknowledge Select Delete EDIM253 3.5_______ Group - User . : Group Name . . : Group Env. Ref : From Date . . : To Date . . . : Acknowldge Stat: TRANSACTION STATUS XXX YOUR_COMPANY_______________________ Partner: YOUR COMPANY NAME THEIR COMPANY 000000007_____ Division: __________ Time: _____ Loaded: __________ Time: _____ In/Outbound: _ Envelope Ref: Rec Transaction User A Stat Set Envelope Ref Reference _ 810 000070001 INV01 _ 810 000070002 INV02 _ 810 000070003 INV03 _ 810 000070004 INV04 _ 810 000070005 INV05 _ 810 000070006 INV06 _ _ END OF TRANSACTIONS PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 06/01/2011 12:00:00 THEIR_COMPANY__ NAME 000 06/01/2011 12:00 I Databank: G ______________ Acknowledged Date Time St 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A 06/01/2011 12:00 A PF5=Detail PF6=Nx Gr ID Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Status screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Manually acknowledge a transaction for which an acknowledgment is not expected 4 - 56 Associated with this screen action ... Acknowledge Do this ... Type A in the A field next to the desired transaction envelope reference ID and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. View the Transaction Status Detail screen for a transaction Select Type S in the A field next to the transaction envelope reference ID for which you want to view. Then, press PF5. Delete a transaction Delete Type D in the A field next to the desired transaction set and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 The Databank Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Group Displays the Group Display screen. PF2=Data Displays the Transaction Display screen.The EDI data for the Transaction Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed. PF5=Detail Displays the Transaction Status Detail screen. All processing and status information regarding the selected transaction set is displayed. PF6=Nx Gr ID Displays the next Group ID on the databank. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Group Part A 35-character ID alphanumeric field that contains the group identification for which you want to view transactions. If left blank the list of Transactions starts with the first Group ID on the databank. Qual (Partner) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Group ID (if applicable). If left blank the first qualifier value for the Group ID is listed. Field Group – User Partner IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the interchange identification for which you want to view groups. If this field is left blank, the list of groups starts with the first interchange on the databank. A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the group-level trading partner (if applicable). 4 - 57 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 Group Name (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the group identification using Partner Maintenance. Group Env. Ref A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the group envelope reference identification for which you want to view transactions. If left blank, the first Group Envelope Reference ID for the Group ID is displayed. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the transactions being listed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of transactions to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound transactions, the date used for the search is the date the transaction was loaded. For outbound transactions, the date used for the search is the output date. From Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of transactions to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. Note: For inbound transactions, the time used for the search is the time the transaction was loaded. For outbound transactions, the time used for the search is the output time. Loaded For inbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups were loaded into the databank. For outbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups were processed through the databank (output). To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of transactions to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. Note: For inbound transactions, the date used for the search is the date the transactions was loaded. For outbound transactions, the date used for the search is the output date. 4 - 58 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 The Databank Subsystem To Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of transactions to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and time. Note: For inbound transactions, the time used for the search is the time the transaction was loaded. For outbound transactions, the time used for the search is the output time. In/Outbound (required) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select transactions which are inbound-only, outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, any inbound transactions are listed for the specified Partner. If no inbound transactions are found, outbound transactions are listed. Valid values are: I Inbound only Transaction IDs O Outbound only Transaction IDs Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to select transactions that are from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only blank Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks Acknowledge Stat A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be used to search for transactions. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment Status types are displayed. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors G Received (EDIFACT only) I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment Envelope Ref A 14-character alphanumeric field used to restrict the screen display to show only transactions with the specified Envelope Reference ID. If this field is left blank, the system displays transactions with any Envelope Reference IDs. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected transaction, and then press PF5. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 59 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 For example, if you want to view the Transaction Status Detail screen for a particular transaction envelope reference ID on the Transaction Status screen, type S in the A field for the transaction you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Transaction Status screen. Rec Stat (protected) Displays the last online action performed against the transaction. Valid values are: A= transaction has been manually acknowledged D= transaction has been marked for deletion B= transaction has been bypassed (review change audit for more information Set (protected) Displays the EDI transaction set identification for the transaction. Transaction Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the transaction envelope reference ID for the transaction. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the transaction. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Acknowledged Date (protected) For inbound transactions, this field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was generated for the transaction received. For outbound transactions this field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was received for the transaction sent. Acknowledged Time (protected) For inbound transactions, this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment was generated for the transaction received. For outbound transactions this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment was received for the transaction sent. Acknowledged St (protected) For inbound transactions, this field displays the status generated by the Editor during compliance checking. For outbound transactions, this field displays the status your partner has returned for the transaction in a functional acknowledgment. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment R Rejected P Partial acceptance U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 4 - 60 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Screen EDIM253 8 The Databank Subsystem Received (EDIFACT only) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 61 The Databank Subsystem Document Directory EDIM262 Document Directory EDIM262 Purpose The Document Directory displays a list of Partner IDs for which there are application documents on the databank. Each entry displayed on the list indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. From this screen, Document Status information can be displayed for a Partner ID's documents. How to Access Access the Document Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 6 to select Document Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Document Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM262 3.6_______ Partner ID In/Outbound DOCUMENT DIRECTORY ___________________________________ Qual ____ _ Databank _ (Gentran, Realtime) A Partner Qual _ VENDOR-1 _ VENDOR-1 _ VENDOR-2 _ VENDOR-3 _ VENDOR-4 _ VENDOR-4 _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN “S” BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 62 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 I/O I O O O O O Dbk G G G R G R PF5=Doc IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Directory EDIM262 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM262 3.6_______ User . . . In/Outbound DOCUMENT DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR-COMPANY_________________ Partner VENDOR-1_____ _ Databank G (Gentran, Realtime) A User Partner _ _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd I/O I O O O I I I I I O I I Dbk G G G G G G G G G G G G PF5=Doc Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Document Status screen for the Partner ID selected on the Document Directory Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the Partner ID for which you want to view. Then, press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Doc Displays the Document Status screen. Documents for the Partner ID selected in the A field is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 63 The Databank Subsystem Document Directory EDIM262 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID (User) A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to just inbound documents or outbound documents. If left blank the list includes both inbound and outbound documents. Valid values are: I O Inbound documents only Outbound documents only Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to documents from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G R blank 4 - 64 Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Directory EDIM262 The Databank Subsystem A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected Partner ID, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Document Status screen for a particular Partner ID on the Document Directory, type S in the A field corresponding to the partner whose document status you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Document Directory. Partner (User) (protected) Displays the trading partner identification (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user identification (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) Displays the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). I/O (protected) Displays the inbound or outbound code for the direction of the documents that belong to the Partner ID listed. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G R Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 65 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Screen EDIM263 Document Status Screen EDIM263 Purpose The Document Status screen displays a list of all documents for a Profile ID. Various selection fields are available to you for selecting which documents should be listed. Each of these fields are described in more detail in Field Descriptions. How to Access Access the Document Status screen in either of these two ways: • Type 7 to select Document Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Document Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select Delete Reset EDIM263 3.7_______ Partner ID . . Appl Data ID User Reference In/Outbound From Date . . To Date . . . Rec Appl A Stat Data ID _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual _______________ ____________ _____________________________________________ _ Databank G __________ Time _____ __________ Time _____ User Reference REF:IA00000001 REF:IA00000002 REF:IA00000003 REF:IA00000004 REF:IA00000005 REF:IA00000006 REF:IA00000007 REF:IA00000008 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 66 DOCUMENT STATUS Date I/O Dbk 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=Detail PF6=Nx Pr ID IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Screen EDIM263 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select Delete Reset EDIM263 3.7_______ User . . . . . Appl Data ID User Reference In/Outbound From Date . . To Date . . . DOCUMENT STATUS XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner VENDOR-1_______ ____________ _____________________________________________ _ Databank G __________ Time _____ __________ Time _____ Rec Appl A Stat Data ID _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE _ INVFILE User Reference INV01 INV01 INV01 INV01 INV01 INV01 INV01 INV01 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Date I/O Dbk 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G 06/01/2011 I G PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=Detail PF6=Nx Pr ID Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Status screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Document Status Detail screen for the document displayed Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the document for which you want to view, and then press PF5. Delete a document Delete Type D in the A field next to the document that is to be deleted and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. Reset a document for reprocessing Reset Type R in the A field next to the desired document and press Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete the request. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 67 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Screen EDIM263 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Displays the Document Display screen. The application data for the document selected in the A field are displayed. PF4=Dir Displays the Interchange Directory. PF5=Detail Displays the Document Status Detail screen. All processing and status information regarding the selected document is displayed. PF6=Nx Pr ID Displays documents for the next Profile ID on the databank. PF10=Updt The Update function key is displayed when a Reset action is requested. The system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the requested action. PF11=Del The Delete function key is displayed when a Delete action is requested. The system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the request. For further information on Databank Maintenance and available options, refer to the Databank Utility Programs and Reports chapter in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID (User) A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). 4 - 68 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Screen EDIM263 The Databank Subsystem Qual (Partner) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Appl Data ID A 12-character alphanumeric field entered to restrict the list to one application data identification for listing documents. User Reference A 45-character field to restrict the list to documents with the specified user reference information. If this field is left blank, the system displays documents with any user reference information. In/Outbound A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to just inbound documents or outbound documents. If left blank, the list includes both inbound and outbound documents. Valid values are: I O Inbound documents only Outbound documents only Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list of documents from the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only blank Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime databanks From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of documents to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. When searching for inbound documents, use the date for which documents were loaded. When searching for outbound documents, use the date for which the documents were processed (output date). From Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of documents to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. When searching for inbound documents, use the time for which documents were loaded. When searching for outbound documents, use the time for which the documents were processed (output date). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 69 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Screen EDIM263 To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of documents to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. When searching for inbound documents, use the date for which documents were processed (output date). When searching for outbound documents, use the date for which the documents were loaded. To Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of documents to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. When searching for inbound documents, use the time for which the documents were processed (output time). When searching for outbound documents, use the time for which the documents were loaded. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to specify an action to be performed against the entry corresponding to the A field. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions you can initiate using this field. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected document, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Document Status Detail screen for the document displayed, type S in the A field for the document you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions you can perform on the Document Status screen. Rec Stat (protected) Displays the last action performed for the document. Valid values are: D has been marked for deletion R has been reset for reprocessing E has been edited Appl Data ID (protected) Displays the application data identification for the document. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Date (protected) Displays the load date for inbound documents and the output date for outbound documents. I/O (protected) Displays the inbound or outbound code for the direction of the documents that belong to the Partner ID being listed. 4 - 70 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Screen EDIM263 The Databank Subsystem Dbk (protected) Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic databank R Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 71 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Directory EDIM268 Change Audit Directory EDIM268 Purpose The Change Audit Directory lists all Partner IDs that contain change information. How to Access Access the Change Audit Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 8 to select Change Audit Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Change Audit Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM268 3.8_______ Partner ID Databank CHANGE AUDIT DIRECTORY 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ___________________________________ Qual _______________ 1 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE) A Partner ID Qual _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN “S” BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 72 XXX PF5=Chg Aud IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Directory EDIM268 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM268 3.8_______ User . . Databank CHANGE AUDIT DIRECTORY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ___________________________________ Partner _______________ 1 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE) A User Partner _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 _ YOUR-COMPANY VENDOR-1 TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF5=Chg Aud Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Change Audit Directory. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Change Audit Status screen for the Partner ID selected Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the Partner ID for which you want to view, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Chg Aud Displays the Change Audit Status screen. For EDI data, a list of Envelope Reference IDs is displayed. For application data, a list of User References is displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 73 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Directory EDIM268 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID (User) A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Databank A 1-character numeric field used to specify the type of databank change data to list. Specify one of the following values in this field: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 - 74 (IE) Inbound EDI data. (IA) Inbound application data. (OA) Outbound application data. (OE) Outbound EDI data. (RIE) Inbound EDI data. (RIA) Inbound application data. (ROA) Realtime outbound application data. (ROE) Realtime outbound EDI data. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Directory EDIM268 The Databank Subsystem A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected Partner ID, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Change Audit Status screen for a particular Partner ID on the Change Audit Directory, type S in the A field for the partner you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Change Audit Directory. Partner ID (User) (protected) Displays the trading partner identification (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user identification (Relationship mode) for which there is Change Audit information. Qual (Partner) (protected) Displays the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 75 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 Purpose The Change Audit Status screen displays all online changes made to application and EDI data on the databanks. The display is by EDI Envelope Reference IDs for EDI data, and User References for application data. How to Access Access the Change Audit Status screen in either of these two ways: • Type 9 to select Change Audit Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Change Audit screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM269 3.9_______ Partner ID Databank From Date To Date CHANGE AUDIT STATUS 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1__________________________ Qual ____ 4 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE) __________ Time _____ __________ Time _____ Envelope Reference IDs A Interchange Group Transaction _ PONUMBER-001 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ END OF CHANGE AUDIT RECORDS Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 76 XXX Ref Tag OA00000001 PF5=Detail Date Cd 06/01/2011 PF6=Nx Pr ID IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM269 3.9_______ User . . . Databank From Date To Date A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ CHANGE AUDIT STATUS XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 VENDOR-1__________________________ Partner _______________ 3 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE) __________ Time _____ __________ Time _____ User Reference PONUMBER-001 PONUMBER-001 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 NUMBER-011 PONUMBER-001 Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Ref Tag OA00000037 OA00000277 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00000170 OA00001094 PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=Detail Date Cd 06/01/2011 R 06/01/2011 E 06/01/2011 E 06/01/2011 E 06/01/2011 R 06/01/2011 E 06/01/2011 R 06/01/2011 E 06/01/2011 R 06/01/2011 E PF6=Nx Pr ID Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Change Audit Status screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Displays the Change Audit Status Detail screen for the entry selected Associated with Do this ... this screen action ... Select Type S in the A field next to the desired Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Displays the Interchange Directory. PF5=Detail Displays the Change Audit Status Detail screen. All change activity related to the selected entry can be viewed from the Change Audit Status Detail screen. PF6=Nx Pr ID Displays Change Audit information for the next Partner ID on the Change Audit file. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 77 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID (User) A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Databank A 1-character numeric field that contains what type of databank data has had online changes applied. Type one of the following values: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 - 78 (IE) Inbound EDI data. (IA) Inbound application data. (OA) Outbound application data. (OE) Outbound EDI data. (RIE) Inbound EDI data. (RIA) Inbound application data. (ROA) Realtime outbound application data. (ROE) Realtime outbound EDI data. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 The Databank Subsystem From Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of change audit information to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. The date listed is the Update Online date. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. From Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of change audit information to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. The time listed is the Update Online time. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time. To Date A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of change audit information to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. The date listed is the Update Online date. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date. To Time A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of change audit information to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. The time listed is the Update Online time. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and time. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected User Reference ID, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Change Audit Status Detail screen for the change audit displayed, type S in the A field for the user reference you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Change Audit Status screen. Envelope Reference IDs (protected) Displayed for EDI data only. The fields displayed are Interchange, Group or Transaction. User Reference (protected) Displayed for application data only. This field displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 79 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269 Ref Tag (protected) Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction/ document. The inbound EDI databank reference number tag is IEnnnnnnnn. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Date (protected) Displays the date the record was updated. Cd (protected) Displays the code for the type of update performed. Valid values are: D E M N R 4 - 80 Delete Edited Manually Acknowledged Network Reprocess IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD The Databank Subsystem Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD Purpose The Online Log Display screen displays the Online Log file and allows you to monitor any exception situations that are encountered by the background CICS tasks in Sterling Gentran:Basic. The Online Log Display screen displays data the same way as a console log: The most recent entries are displayed at the bottom of the screen. As new entries are added to the file, the display scrolls upward. This screen only displays log messages generated by applications in the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. To view messages generated by the Sterling Gentran:Control, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, or Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint systems, use the Online Log Display screen for the corresponding system. How to Access Access the Online Log Display screen in either of these two ways: • Type 10 to select Log Display from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.10 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Online Log Display screen. EDIMOLD 3.10______ ONLINE LOG DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Filters====> Errors Only: _ Program Only: ________ Position Task # TranID Time Date Criteria===> _______ ____ ________ __________ Max Count 3000 TASK TRAN TIME DATE TERM PROGRAM ERROR CODE 06/01/2011 0002 EDIX000 EDI-44500-F 16 00206 EDI 12:00:00 DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI 00326 EDI 12:00:00 06/01/2011 0002 EDIX000 EDI-44500-F 16 DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI 00849 EDI 12:00:00 06/01/2011 0002 EDIX000 EDI-44500-F 16 DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI 06/01/2011 0002 EDIX000 EDI-44500-F 16 01312 EDI 12:00:00 DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI 01634 EDIP 12:00:00 06/01/2011 EDIBOBI EDI-10006-F 16 ERROR READING FILE: EDIRJCL, EIBRCODE: 0D==> DISABLED, EIBFN: 0602==> READ 06/01/2011 EDIBOBI EDI-10006-F 16 01692 EDIP 12:00:00 ERROR READING FILE: EDIRJCL, EIBRCODE: 0D==> DISABLED, EIBFN: 0602==> READ Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 81 The Databank Subsystem Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 4 - 82 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD The Databank Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Filters (optional) Filters restrict error and message display for specific values. If you enter values in combination with Position Criteria, the Position Criteria is processed first. When values are not entered, the filters are not active. Errors Only (optional) A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates whether errors are to be displayed. Errors are displayed starting with the last error message on the screen and processing backwards through a file. If no error message is currently on the screen, error messages are displayed as they are found – processing backwards through the file. PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd may be used to scroll through error messages. When used in conjunction with the Program Only filter, errors are displayed for the specified program entered. Valid values are: Y Only severe errors and fatal errors are displayed (i.e., error values, E – Error, F – Fatal error, S – Severe error). N All log information is displayed. Space All log information is displayed. Program Only (optional) An 8-position alphanumeric field that limits the display to the specified program. Valid values are any Sterling Gentran:Basic program or the value “No Name”. After a valid value is entered, only messages for the specified program are displayed. Messages for the specified program are displayed starting with the last message on the screen and processing backwards through the file. If no message is currently displayed, messages are displayed for that program as they are found – processing backwards through the file. PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd may be used to scroll through the messages for the program. When used in conjunction with the Errors Only Filter, error messages are displayed for the specified program. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 83 The Databank Subsystem Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD Position Criteria (optional) A group of five fields that are used to position the display of the Online Log file at a specific point in the file, based on the criteria in these fields. You can use any combination of position criteria, or leave the fields blank. When you do not specify position criteria (all five fields are blank), the last (most recent) record in the file is the last entry on the screen. When you press Enter, the system searches for log entries matching the position criteria, beginning with the last record on the Online Log file. When you press either PF7 or PF8, the system searches for entries, beginning with the last record displayed on the screen. Task # (optional) A 7-digit numeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the most recent entry of a specific CICS task number. Valid values are any valid CICS task number. The system searches for an exact match of the task number in this field. TranID (optional) A 4-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the most recent entry of a specific CICS transaction ID. Valid values are any valid CICS transaction ID. Some of the primary Sterling Gentran transaction IDs are: EDI EDID EDIP Main Terminal Transaction Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Scanner Sterling Gentran:Basic Online Batch Initiator Time (optional) An 8-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The list begins with entries where the Time field is equal to or less than this value. The time is formatted in the 24-hour format, HH:MM:SS. Date (optional) A 10-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The list begins with entries where the Date field is equal to or less than this value. The date is formatted MM/DD/YYYY. Max Count (required) A 4-position numeric field used to indicate the maximum number of Online Log file entries to read during a search for position criteria. When this screen is initially displayed, the Max Count field contains the default value as defined on the Configuration Maintenance screen (EDIM231) for Record Type 0, the Online Options. If no records are found that match the selection criteria, the message EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT is displayed. You can either press PF7 or PF8 to continue the search or increase the value in the Max Count field. An extremely large number in this field may slow down response time. Task (protected) A 7-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS task number of the task issuing the log entry. Tran (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS Transaction ID of the task issuing the log entry. 4 - 84 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD The Databank Subsystem Time (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the current time of the task issuing the log entry. The time format is HH:MM:SS. Date (protected) A 10-position alphanumeric field that displays the current date of the task issuing the log entry. The date format is MM/DD/YYYY. Term (protected) A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the Terminal ID of the task issuing the log entry. If this field is blank, the task was executed in background CICS. Program (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the Sterling Gentran program issuing the log entry. Error Code (protected) A 14-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/information number, severity indicators, and completion code generated by the task issuing the log entry. The valid format is: EDI-XXXXX-Y ZZ Where: EDI-XXXXX is the message number Y is the severity indicator ZZ is the return code value See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide for information about the indicated message. Severity indicator values are: I Informational – usually trace messages. T Trace – produced by the Trace facility. W Warning – some action may be required. E Severe error – controlled termination of processing. F Fatal error – results in immediate termination of processing. Return code values are: 00 Normal – no warnings or errors occurred. 04 Warning – at least one warning level occurred. 08 Error – invalid data was encountered – some action may be required. 12 Severe error – processing was terminated. 16 Fatal error – processing was terminated. See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide for more information on these codes. Error Message (protected) A 74-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/informational message generated by the task issuing the log entry. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 85 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 Purpose The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen is used to view EDI interchanges on the Acknowledgment Overdue File. There is a file for Sterling Gentran:Basic and a different file for Sterling Gentran:Realtime. EDID510 (Acknowledgment Reconciliation) and EDIR515 (Realtime Acknowledgment Reconciliation) create the Acknowledgment Overdue files when processing in Monitor mode. The Acknowledgment Overdue files contain a copy of the Outbound EDI databank records that have an acknowledgment status of overdue or waiting. Note: The creation of the Acknowledgment Overdue files is a configurable option. See chapter 5 in the Sterling Gentran:Basic User Guide for Configuration Maintenance for Record Type 2 and for more information about the system configuration. See chapter 5 in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide, for EDID510, or chapter 5 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Realtime® for z/OS® Technical Reference Guide for EDIR515, or for more Information about the Acknowledgment Overdue file. The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory screen allows you to start the list at a specified Partner profile, restrict the list to just overdue or waiting interchanges and restrict the list to just Sterling Gentran or Sterling Gentran:Realtime information. Leaving these fields blank produces a list of all IDs for which there are records on the Acknowledgment Overdue files. How to Access Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 13 to select Acknowledgment Overdue Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 3.13 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. 4 - 86 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 The Databank Subsystem Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM240 3.12______ Partner ID Databank G Status _ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ___________________________________ Qual _______________ (Gentran,Realtime) Monitor Date: G 06/01/11 R (Overdue,Waiting) Time: 12:00:00 Partner ID QCICSSEND QCISASEND QCUNASEND QCUNBSEND QCSCHSEND QCSTXSEND QCXXXSEND VENDOR-1 VENDOR-2 VENDOR-3 Qual TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Dbk G G G G G G G G G G Status O W W W W O O O O O Div 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 PF5=Details Relationship Mode Select EDIM240 3.12______ User Databank Status A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ G _ ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ___________________________________ Partner _______________ (Gentran,Realtime) Monitor Date: G 06/01/11 R (Overdue,Waiting) Time: 12:00:00 User YOUR COMPANY YOUR COMPANY YOUR COMPANY Partner QCICSSEND QCISASEND QCUNASEND TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Dbk G G G Status O W W Div 000 000 000 PF5=Details 4 - 87 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory. The following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Display the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen for a Partner on the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Associated with this screen Do this ... action ... Select By typing S in the A field and pressing PF5, you can select a Partner from which you can view the acknowledgment details for that Partner. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Details Displays the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen for the Partner selected. Type S in the A field of Partner you want to select and press PF5. This screen displays a list of either overdue or waiting interchanges, or both overdue and waiting interchanges. Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 88 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 Partner/Qualifier Mode The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Partner ID A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading Partner ID to which the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory list should begin. A partial value for the Partner ID can be entered to position the list at the selected value. User A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the User ID field to which the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory list should begin. A partial value for the User ID may be entered to position the list at the selected value. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Qualifier for the trading partner (if applicable). Partner A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the trading partner (if applicable). Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to display partners from the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment overdue file, or both. Valid values are: G R blank Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file only Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file only Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue files Monitor Date (Sterling Gentran) (protected) Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file was created if present. (Monitor Date Realtime) (protected) Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file was created if present. Status A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the records from the Acknowledgment Overdue file that are displayed on the screen Valid values are: O W blank Overdue status only Waiting status only Both Overdue and Waiting status. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 89 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240 (Monitor) Time (Sterling Gentran) (protected) Displays the time that the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file was created if present. (Monitor Time Realtime) (protected) Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file was created if present. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Partner Profile. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Partner you want to select, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen for a particular Partner on the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory, type S in the A field for the partner you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic "Function Key Descriptions" in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory. Partner/Qualifier Mode Relationship Mode Description Field Description Field Partner ID (protected) A 35-character alphanumeric field that identifies the partner ID. User (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the User ID. Qual (protected) A 4-character field that contains the trading partner Qualifier, if applicable. Partner (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID, if applicable. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file. Valid values are: G Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue File R Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue File Status (protected) Displays the acknowledgment status. Valid values are: O W Overdue Waiting Div (protected) Displays the division code that has been associated with the Databank record. 4 - 90 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 Purpose The Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen is used to view the details about EDI interchanges on the Acknowledgment Overdue File. This screen displays the interchange, group and transaction information for overdue/waiting acknowledgments for the indicated partner profile. The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory screen allows you to enter a specific Partner profile, restrict the list to just overdue or waiting interchanges and restrict the list to just Sterling Gentran or Sterling Gentran:Realtime information. Leaving these fields blank produces a list of all records found for the specified partner profile for which there are records on the Acknowledgment Overdue files. Intchg Env Ref, Group Env Ref and Trans Env Ref fields can be used to position down into the display list. How to Access Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways: • Type S in the A field next to the Partner ID on the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory and press PF5. • Type 3.13.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screens for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM241 3.12.1____ ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE DETAIL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner ID Databank Status VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual _______________ G (Gentran,Realtime) _ (Overdue,Waiting) *---------** CONTACT INFORMATION ** ---------* | Name: TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY | | Contact: | | Phone: | Monitor Date Time | E-Mail: TRADING_PARTNER@STERCOMM.COM | G 06/01/11 12:00:00 *--------------------------------------------* R 06/01/11 12:00:00 Sent Ack Expected A Type Envelope Ref Func Id/User Ref Date Time Date Time Dbk Sts _ G 000000001 SC 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ G 000000046 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ T 000000046 PO-NUMBER-001 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ G 000000049 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ T 000000049 PO-NUMBER-002 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ G 000000050 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ T 000000050 PO-NUMBER-003 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Details PF6=Nxt Part PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 91 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 Relationship Mode Select EDIM241 3.12.1____ ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE DETAIL XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 User Databank Status YOUR COMPANY_______________________ Partner VENDOR-1____ G (Gentran,Realtime) _ (Overdue,Waiting) *---------** CONTACT INFORMATION ** ---------* | Name: TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY | | Contact: | | Phone: | Monitor Date Time | E-Mail: TRADING_PARTNER@STERCOMM.COM | G 06/01/11 12:00:00 *--------------------------------------------* R 06/01/11 12:00:00 Sent Ack Expected A Type Envelope Ref Func Id/User Ref Date Time Date Time Dbk Sts _ G 000000001 SC 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ G 000000046 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ T 000000046 PO-NUMBER-001 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ G 000000049 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G W _ T 000000049 PO-NUMBER-002 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ G 000000050 PO 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O _ T 000000050 PO-NUMBER-003 06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G O TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Details PF6=Nxt Part PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory. The following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... Display the appropriate databank status screen EDIX251, EDIX252, or EDIX253 for the selected record Partner on the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen. Associated with this screen Do this ... action ... Select By typing S in the A field and pressing PF5, you can select a Partner from which you can view the outbound databank status information for that record. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Status 4 - 92 Transfers control to the appropriate databank status screen EDIX251, EDIX252 or EDIX253 based on the record selected. Interchange record will transfer to EDIX251 Interchange Status, Group record will transfer to EDIX252 Group status, and Transaction record will transfer to EDIX253 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status. Type S in the A field of record you want to select and press PF5. PF6=NxtPart Displays the Acknowledgment Overdue detail for the next partner on the file. Field Decriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Field Description Field Partner ID A 35-character User alphanumeric field to indicate the trading Partner ID to use to display Acknowledgment Overdue Details. Qual A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Qualifier for the trading partner (if applicable). Relationship Mode Description A 15-character alphanumeric field to indicate the User ID to use to display Acknowledgment Overdue Details. Partner A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the Partner ID for the trading partner (if applicable). Databank A 1-character alphabetic field used to display partners from the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file, or both. Valid values are: G R blank Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file only Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file only Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue files IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 93 The Databank Subsystem Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 Status A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the records from the Acknowledgment Overdue file that are displayed on the screen. Valid values are: O W blank Overdue status only Waiting status only Both Overdue and Waiting status (Contact Information) Name (protected) The 35-position alphanumeric field containing the trading partner's business name. This name is found of the Partner Name and Address Record. (Contact Information) Contact (protected) A 30-position alphanumeric field containing the name of a personal contact at this trading partner's office. This information comes from the partner name and address record. (Contact Information) Phone (protected) Four alphanumeric fields that contain the trading partner's telephone number (area code - 3 positions, number - 7 positions, and internal extension - 4 positions). This information comes from the partner name and address record. (Contact Information) Intl Dial Code (protected) A 3-position numeric field that contains the trading partner's international dial code (must be numeric). This information comes from the partner name and address record. (Contact Information) E-mail (protected) A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains the e-mail address for the trading partner. This information comes from the partner name and address record. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Partner Profile. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Partner you want to select, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Interchange Status screen for a particular Partner on the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen, type S in the A field for the Envelope Ref you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic "Function Key Descriptions" in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail. Type (protected) A 1-character alphabetic field that identifies the type of information that is being displayed. Valid values are: I G T 4 - 94 Interchange Group Transaction IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241 The Databank Subsystem Envelope Ref (protected) Displays the envelope reference identification for the Overdue/waiting record that is being displayed. If Type is I then this field will display the Interchange Envelope Reference Number. If Type is G then this field will display the Group Envelope Reference Number. If Type is T then this field will contain the Transaction Envelope reference number. Func ID/User Ref (protected) Displays the functional identification for Group records or the User Reference field for the Transaction records. Sent Date (protected) Displays the output date for the interchange. The date has the format MM/DD/YY. Sent Time (protected) Displays the output time for the interchange. The time has the format HH:MM. Ack Expected Date (protected) Displays the date that the acknowledgment was/is expected. The date has the format MM/ DD/YY. Ack Expected Time (protected) Displays the time that the acknowledgment was/is expected. The time has the format HH:MM. Dbk (protected) Displays whether the Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file. Valid values are: G R Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue File Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue File Status (protected) Displays the acknowledgment status. Valid values are: O W Overdue Waiting IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 95 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 Purpose The Interchange Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for an outbound interchange. This includes any available status information from communications and the network that processed the interchange. This screen displays information differently depending on the direction of the interchange. Therefore, the details for this screen have been split into two subsections: one section of the screen is displayed for outbound interchanges and the second section of the screen is displayed for inbound interchanges. How to Access Access the Interchange Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the Interchange Status screen and pressing PF14. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status Detail (outbound) screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM271 __________ INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1 Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - ABC COMPUTER COMPAN Int. Env. Ref : 000000004 Databank Run# XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual : Duplicate : No : 00000001 Output . . . . : 06/01/2011 Acknowledged : Networked . . : 06/01/2011 12:00 I/O Databank DBK Retention Days Acknowledge Status : Outbound : GENTRAN : : N 12:00 Group Count : 000001 Character Count : 000001744 Enter PF1=Help 4 - 96 PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM271 __________ INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL Int - User . . : YOUR-COMPANY Name . . . . . : Int. Env. Ref : 000000493 Databank Run# : 00000051 Output . . . . : 06/01/2011 Acknowledged : Networked . . : 12:00 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner :VENDOR-1 Duplicate : No Network I/O Databank DBK Retention Days Acknowledge Status Network Status : : : : : : Outbound Gentran N N Group Count : 000001 Character Count : 0000001748 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4 Interchg Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected. Sterling Gentran:Plus Installed PF5 Comm Transfers control to the Communications Maintenance Interchange Detail screen if the Sterling Gentran:Plus product has been installed. This allows you to view the interchange data on the actual CONNECT VSAM Queues, and subsequently return to the Interchange Status Detail Screen. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 97 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 Intchg Partner ID (Int – User) (protected) A 1- to 35-character alphanumeric field displaying the interchange identification to which this interchange is associated. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Name (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the Interchange ID using Partner Maintenance. Int. Env. Ref (protected) Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange. Duplicate (protected) Indicates whether the interchange is a duplicate of a previously processed interchange. Valid values are: Yes Yes, this is a duplicate interchange No No, this is not a duplicate interchange Databank Run# (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the interchange by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the interchange was loaded. Network (protected) The name of the network that processed this interchange (if applicable), as specified in the trading partner profile. I/O (protected) Displays whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Output (Outbound only) (protected) Displays the date and time the interchange was output from the translation system. DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this interchange will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank 4 - 98 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 The Databank Subsystem Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1 (EDIM83B) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field on the Outbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM864) screen will be used determine if the interchange should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Acknowledged (protected) Displays the date and time acknowledgment reconciliation was performed against the transaction. Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors I Indeterminate N No acknowledgment processing O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually Acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Networked (protected) Displays the date and time that network reconciliation was performed against the transaction. Network Status (protected) Displays the network status for the interchange. Valid values are: E Error on receive, sorting, or pickup N Network tracking not active P Picked Up R Received S Sorted (processed) U Manual network complete W Waiting Group Count (protected) Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange. Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters found within the interchange. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 99 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271 COMMUNICATIONS FIELDS (displayed only if Sterling Gentran:Plus is installed) Batch# (protected) Displays the Batch Number assigned to the interchange by CONNECT. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® User Guide for further information regarding this field. VSAM Batch St (protected) Displays the VSAM Batch Status of the interchange. Refer to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® User Guide for further information regarding this field. NETWORK ERROR INFORMATION FIELDS (displayed only if an error occurs) Errors (protected) Displays the number of errors the network encountered processing the interchange. First Error (protected) Provides network information about the first error encountered by the network for the interchange. 4 - 100 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271 Purpose The Interchange Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for an inbound interchange. How to Access Access the Interchange Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the Interchange Status screen and pressing PF14. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM271 __________ INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1 Name . . . . . : Int. Env. Ref : 000000005 Databank Run# XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual : Duplicate : Yes : 00000006 I/O : Inbound Loaded . . . . : 06/01/2011 Edited . . . . : 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 Databank : Gentran DBK Retention Days : Acknowledge Status : N Group Count : 000001 Character Count : 0000006330 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 101 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271 Relationship Mode EDIM271 __________ INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL Int - User . . : YOUR-COMPANY Name . . . . . : Int. Env. Ref : 000000005 Databank Run# XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner :VENDOR-1 Duplicate : No : 00000041 I/O : Inbound Loaded . . . . : 06/01/2011 Edited . . . . : 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 Databank : Gentran DBK Retention Days : Acknowledge Status : N Group Count : 000001 Character Count : 0000006330 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4 Interchg Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 102 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271 The Databank Subsystem Intchg Part ID (Int – User) (protected) A 1- to 35-character alphanumeric field displaying the interchange identification to which this interchange is associated. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Name (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner Maintenance. Int. Env. Ref (protected) Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange. Duplicate Indicates whether the interchange is a duplicate of a previously processed interchange. Valid values are: Yes Yes, this is a duplicate interchange No No, this is not a duplicate interchange Databank Run# (protected) Display the Databank Run number which was assigned to the interchange by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the interchange was loaded. I/O Displays whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Loaded (Inbound only) (protected) Displays the date and time the interchange was loaded to the translation system. DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this interchange will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 103 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271 EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1 (EDIM834) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on the Inbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM865) screen will be used determine if the interchange should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Edited (Inbound only) (protected) Display the date and time the interchange was processed by the inbound Editor. Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors I Indeterminate N No acknowledgment processing O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually Acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Group Count (protected) Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange. Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters found within the interchange. 4 - 104 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 Purpose The Interchange Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for an interchange. The Interchange Display screen is accessed from the Interchange Status screen. This screen is utilized only if using message store. How to Access Access the Interchange Display screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the Interchange Status screen and pressing PF2. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Interchange Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM256 __________ INTERCHANGE DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Intchg Part ID Name . . . . . Int. Env. Ref. Stat - Network A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ : : : : VENDOR-1 TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN 000000002 N Ack : N Qual : Group Count : 000001 I/O : Outbound Databank : Gentran Search : ______________ *ZZ*STERLING SFW *ZZ*XYZ COMPUTERS *030127 ISA*00* *00* *1458*?*00403*000000002*0*T*+; GS*PO*STERLING*XYZ*20030127*1458*1*X*004030; ST*850*000000001; BEG*00*NE*PONUMBER-001**20010102; DTM*010*19950105; N1*BT*IBM INC.*1*987654321; N3*4600 LAKEHURST COURT; N4*COLUMBUS*OH*430170760; PER*BD**TE*614-793-7000; N1*VN*XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY*1*121212121; Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Seg PF6=Search 4 - 105 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 Relationship Mode Select EDIM256 __________ INTERCHANGE DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Intchg - User .: YOUR COMPANY Name . . . . . : YOUR COMPANY NAME Int. Env. Ref. : 000000005 Stat - Network : Ack : N A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Partner : THEIR COMPANY THEIR COMPANY NAME Group Count : 000001 I/O : Inbound Databank : Gentran Search : ______________ *ZZ*5136666666 *ZZ*6147937000 *010105 ISA*00* *00* *1200*:*00403*000000005*0*P*>? GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030? ST*810*000070001? BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? REF*SL*124? Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg PF5=Seg PF6=Search Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Segment Display screen for the segment selected. Associated with this screen Do this ... action ... Select Type S in the A field next to the desired segment and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Interchg Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected. PF5=Seg The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the interchange data displayed. PF6=Search The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to search for the specified value in the EDI data records. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 4 - 106 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 The Databank Subsystem Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway searches of large interchanges. When the search fails to find the search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Interchange ID (Int – User) (protected) Displays the 35-character alphanumeric interchange identification associated with the interchange. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Name (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner Maintenance. Int. Env. Ref (protected) Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange. Group Count (protected) Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 107 The Databank Subsystem Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 Status – Network (protected) Displays the current network status for the interchange. Valid values are: E N P R S U W Errors were encountered during network processing As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this interchange, network tracking was not performed for this interchange. Partner has picked up the interchange Network has received the interchange Network has sorted (processed) the interchange User has manually set to a network completed status Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network Status – Ack (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are: A E I N O P R U W + 7 8 Accepted Accepted with errors Indeterminate Not required Overdue acknowledgment Partial acceptance Rejected Manually acknowledged Waiting acknowledgment Rejected (EDIFACT only) Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) Received (EDIFACT only) I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Realtime Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Search A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway searches of large interchanges. When the search fails to find the search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED 4 - 108 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Interchange Display Screen EDIM256 The Databank Subsystem MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment, type S in the A field for the segment you want to view, and then press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Interchange Display screen. EDI Interchange Data (protected) Displays up to 11 lines of interchange data, one segment per line. Segments greater than 76 characters are continued on the next display line. You may scroll backward and forward through the segments within the interchange using the PF7 and PF8 keys. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 109 The Databank Subsystem Group Display Screen EDIM257 Group Display Screen EDIM257 Purpose The Group Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for a functional group. The Group Display screen is accessed from the Group Status screen. This screen is utilized only if using message store. How to Access Access the Group Display screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the Group Status screen and pressing PF2. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Group Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM257 __________ GROUP DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1 Qual : Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN Int. Env. Ref : 000000005 Group Part ID. : VENDOR-1 Qual : Group Env. Ref : 000000007 Transaction Count : 000006 Ack Status . . : A Transactions Accepted : Search . . . . : ______________ I/O : Inbound A Databank : Gentran _ GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030? _ ST*810*000070001? _ BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001? _ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? _ NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? _ NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? _ NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? _ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? _ REF*SL*124? Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 4 - 110 PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF5=Seg PF6=Search IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Display Screen EDIM257 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode Select EDIM257 __________ GROUP DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Intchg - User. : YOUR COMPANY Partner : THEIR COMPANY Name . . . . . : YOUR COMPANY NAME THEIR COMPANY NAME Int. Env. Ref : 000000005 Group - User : YOUR COMPANY Partner : THEIR COMPANY Group Env. Ref : 000000007 Transaction Count : 000006 Ack Status . . : A Transactions Accepted : Search . . . . : ______________ I/O : Inbound A Databank : Gentran _ GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030? _ ST*810*000070001? _ BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001? _ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? _ NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? _ NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? _ NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? _ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? _ REF*SL*124? Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Group PF5=Seg PF6=Search Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Segment Display screen for the segment selected. Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the desired segment and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Group Displays the Group Display screen. PF5=Seg The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the group data displayed. PF6=Search The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to search for the specified value in the EDI data records. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 111 The Databank Subsystem Group Display Screen EDIM257 searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Interchange ID (Int – User) (protected) Displays the 35-character alphanumeric interchange identification associated with the interchange. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Interchange ID (if applicable). Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID field (Relationship mode). Name (protected) Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner Maintenance. Int. Env. Ref (protected) Provides the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange. Group ID (Group – User) (protected) Displays the group (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) identification associated with the group. 4 - 112 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Group Display Screen EDIM257 The Databank Subsystem Qual (Partner) (protected) A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Group ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Group Env. Ref (protected) Displays the group envelope reference identification for the group. Transaction Count (protected) Displays the number of transactions within the group. Ack Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the group. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Search A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. Transactions Accepted (protected) Displays the number of transaction sets which were accepted according to Accepted functional acknowledgment processing. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the group is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 113 The Databank Subsystem Group Display Screen EDIM257 Databank (protected) Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment, type S in the A field for the segment you want to view, and then press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Group Display screen. EDI Group Data (protected) Displays up to 9 lines of group data, one segment per line. Segments greater than 76 characters are continued on the next display line. You may scroll backward and forward through the segments within the group using the PF7 and PF8 keys. 4 - 114 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 Purpose The Transaction Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for a single transaction on the databank. This screen displays information differently depending on the direction of the transaction. Therefore, the details for this screen have been split into two subsections: one section of the screen is displayed for outbound transactions and the second section of the screen is displayed for inbound transactions. How to Access Access the Transaction Status Detail screen in any one of the following ways: • Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF5. • Press PF14 on the Transaction Display screen. • Press PF5 on the Document Status Detail screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status Detail (outbound) screen for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM258 __________ TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL Transaction ID : Trans. Env Ref : Transaction Set: User Reference : VENDOR-1 000000199 850 PONUMBER-001 Orig. DB Run # : Last DB Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Mapped . . . . : Edited . . . . : Output . . . . : Acknowledged : 00000005 00000007 OE00000009 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Division: 000 Network: I/O: Outbound Databank: GENTRAN Acknowledge Status: N 12:00 12:00 12:00 DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Enter PF1=Help XXX Character Count: 0000001563 Test/Prod: Test PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Trans IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Doc 4 - 115 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 Relationship Mode EDIM258 __________ TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL Trans - User : Trans. Env Ref : Transaction Set: User Reference : YOUR-COMPANY 000000001 819 0087 Orig. DB Run # : Last DB Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Mapped . . . . : Edited . . . . : Output . . . . : Acknowledged : 00000060 00000060 OE00000159 Y 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 00/00/0000 Update . . . . : Update User ID : Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner: VENDOR-1 Division: 000 Network: I/O: Outbound Databank: GENTRAN Acknowledge Status: N 12:00 12:00 00:00 DBK Retention Days: Character Count: 0000000222 Test/Prod: Prod PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Doc Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Transfers to the Databank Transaction Display (EDIM259). The EDI segments for the current transaction are displayed. PF4=Trans Returns to the Transaction Status screen. PF5=Doc Switches to the Document Status Detail screen for the transaction being viewed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 116 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 The Databank Subsystem Trans – Part ID (Trans – User) (protected) Displays the 35-character alphanumeric Transaction ID associated with the transaction. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Transaction ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Transaction ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Trans. Env Ref (protected) Displays a 14-character alphanumeric reference number from the transaction's envelope. Transaction Set (protected) Displays the EDI set identifier for the transaction. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the transaction being displayed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the transaction. See the topic “User Reference” in this chapter for more information. Orig DB Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the transaction. Network (protected) Displays the network as defined on the Partner ID that was used to process this transaction. Last DB Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic the last time the data was processed. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 117 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 Reference Tag (protected) Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction. Databank (protected) Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Reported Status (protected) Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound transactions. This value indicates whether EDI Databank Inquiry report (EDID550) was run. Valid values are: Y Reported N Not reported Space Not reported Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Mapped (protected) Displays the date and time the transaction was last mapped. The format is MM/DD/ YYYY HH:MM. Edited (protected) Displays the date and time the transaction was last processed by the Editor. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Output (protected) Displays the date and time the transaction was last output. This date and time may be set by either the outbound Editor or the Outbound Extract program. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Acknowledged (protected) Displays the date and time acknowledgment reconciliation was performed against the transaction. 4 - 118 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258 The Databank Subsystem DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this transaction will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1 (EDIM83B) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field on the Outbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM864) screen will be used determine if the transaction should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Update (protected) Displays the last online update action which was performed against the transaction. Valid values are: Delete has been marked for deletion Acknowledged has been manually acknowledged Bypassed has been bypassed Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters in the transaction. Update User ID (protected) Displays the three initials of the User ID that performed the update. Test/Prod (protected) Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner profile that was used to process the transaction. For outbound documents this value is used to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 119 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 Purpose The Transaction Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for a transaction on the databank. How to Access Access the Transaction Status Detail screen in any one of the following ways: • Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF5. • Press PF14 on the Transaction Display screen. • Press PF5 on the Document Status Detail screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM258 __________ TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL Transaction ID : Trans. Env Ref : Transaction Set: User Reference : VENDOR 000070001 810 INV01 Orig. DB Run # : Last DB Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Loaded . . . . : Edited . . . . : 00000005 00000005 IE00000162 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 4 - 120 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Division: 000 12:00 12:00 I/O: Databank: Acknowledge Status: Sequence Status: Envelope Status: Compliance Status: DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data XXX Inbound GENTRAN N 00 00 00 Character Count: 0000001011 Test/Prod: Envelope: Prod PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Doc IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM258 __________ TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL Trans - User : Trans. Env Ref : Transaction Set: User Reference : YOUR-COMPANY 000070001 810 INV01 Orig. DB Run # : Last DB Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Loaded . . . . : Edited . . . . : 00000041 00000041 IE00000169 Y 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner: VENDOR-1 Division: 000 I/O: Databank: Acknowledge Status: Sequence Status: Envelope Status: Compliance Status: DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data XXX Inbound GENTRAN A 00 00 00 Character Count: 0000001011 Test/Prod: Test Envelope: Prod PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Doc Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Transfers to the Databank Transaction Display (EDIM259). The EDI segments for the current transaction are displayed. PF4=Trans Returns to the Transaction Status screen. PF5=Doc Switches to the Document Status Detail screen for the transaction being viewed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 121 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 Transaction ID (Trans – User) (protected) Displays the 35-character alphanumeric Transaction ID associated with the transaction. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 35-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Transaction ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Trans. Env Ref (protected) Displays a 14-alphanumeric reference number from the transaction's envelope. Transaction Set (protected) Displays the EDI set identifier for the transaction. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the transaction being displayed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the transaction. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Orig. DB Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the transaction. Last DB Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic the last time the data was processed. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Reference Tag (protected) Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction. 4 - 122 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 The Databank Subsystem Databank (protected) Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Reported Status (protected) Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound transactions. This value indicates whether EDI Databank Inquiry report (EDID550) was run. Valid values are: Y Reported N Not reported Space Not reported Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are: A Accepted E Accepted with errors N Not required R Rejected 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Loaded (protected) Displays the date and time the transaction was loaded onto the databank. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Sequence Status (protected) Displays the functional group Envelope Reference ID error checking indicator. Valid values are: 00 No errors 04 Sequence errors detected Edited (protected) Displays the date and time the transaction was last processed by the Editor. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Envelope Status (protected) Displays the highest validation error the inbound Editor encountered while processing the envelopes. Valid values are: 00 No errors were encountered in the document. 04 One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors) were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or more errors (other than unknown user or unknown partner) were encountered in processing the Functional Group Envelope. 08 No Partner/Qualifier or User/Partner was found corresponding to the sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group, or the segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to be in error. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 123 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258 Compliance Status (protected) Displays the highest validation error the inbound Editor encountered while processing the documents. 00 No errors were encountered in the document. 04 One or more element errors were detected. 08 One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered. 12 The transaction set was incomplete. DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this transaction will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1 (EDIM834) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on the Inbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM865) screen will be used determine if the transaction should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Update (protected) Displays the last online update action which was performed against the transaction. Valid values are: M Manually Acknowledged D Marked for delete Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters in the transaction. Update User ID (protected) Displays the initials of the User ID that performed the update. Test/Prod (protected) Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner profile that was used to process the transaction. For outbound documents this value is used to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope. Envelope (protected) Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is determined, if possible, from the Interchange envelope for this transaction. Otherwise, this is set from the partner profile. 4 - 124 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Display Screen EDIM259 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Display Screen EDIM259 Purpose The Transaction Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for a transaction. How to Access Access the Transaction Display screen in either of these two ways: • Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF2. • Press PF2 in the Transaction Status Detail screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Transaction Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM259 __________ Group ID . Group Name Group Env. Trans. Set Trans. Env A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . . Ref . . Ref : : : : : TRANSACTION DISPLAY VENDOR-1 TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN 000000001 850 000000001 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual : Ack Status I/O Databank Search : : : : W Outbound Gentran ______________ ST*850*000000001; BEG*00*NE*PONUMBER-001**20010102; DTM*010*19950105; N1*BT*IBM INC.*1*987654321; N3*4600 LAKEHURST COURT; N4*COLUMBUS*OH*430170760; PER*BD**TE*614-793-7000; N1*VN*XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY*1*121212121; N3*1212 E. MAIN ST.; N4*CINCINATTI*OH*430159876; Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Trans IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Seg PF6=Search PF14=Dtl 4 - 125 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Display Screen EDIM259 Relationship Mode Select EDIM259 __________ Group - User Group Name . . Group Env. Ref Trans. Set . . Trans. Env Ref A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ : : : : : TRANSACTION DISPLAY YOUR COMPANY YOUR COMPANY NAME 000000007 810 000070001 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner : THEIR COMPANY THEIR COMPANY NAME Ack Status I/O Databank Search : : : : A Inbound Gentran ______________ ST*810*000070001? BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? NTE** TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW? NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID? NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.? NTE**-------------------------------------------------------? REF*SL*124? REF*DP*00547? REF*BC*CONTRACT42? Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Seg PF6=Search PF14=Dtl Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Segment Display screen for the segment selected Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the desired segment and press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Display screen. PF5=Seg The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the transaction data displayed. PF6=Search The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to search for the specified value in the EDI data records. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the 4 - 126 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Transaction Display Screen EDIM259 The Databank Subsystem search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. PF14=Dtl Displays the Transaction Status Detail screen for the transaction displayed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Group ID (Group – User) (protected) Displays the 35-character alphanumeric identification for the group associated with the transaction. Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 35-character User ID field (Relationship mode). Qual (Partner) (protected) A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Group ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Group Name (protected) Displays the group identification defined using Partner Maintenance. Group Env. Ref (protected) Displays the group envelope reference identification for the group associated with the transaction. Trans. Set (protected) Displays the EDI set identification for the transaction. Ack Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are: A E I N Accepted Accepted with errors Indeterminate Not required IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 127 The Databank Subsystem Transaction Display Screen EDIM259 O Overdue acknowledgment P Partial acceptance R Rejected U Manually acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment 4 Rejected (EDIFACT only) 7 Acknowledged (EDIFACT only) 8 Received (EDIFACT only) Trans. Env. Ref (protected) Displays the transaction envelope reference identification for the transaction. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Realtime Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Search A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record. Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0 Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the search criteria within the specified number of segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search; otherwise it stops. A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in which that action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment, type S in the A field for the segment you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions you can perform for the Transaction Display screen. EDI Transaction Data (protected) Displays up to ten lines of transaction data, one segment per line. Segments greater than 76 characters are continued on the next display line. You can scroll backward and forward through the segments within the transaction using the PF7 and PF8 keys. 4 - 128 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Display Screen EDIM260 The Databank Subsystem Segment Display Screen EDIM260 Purpose The Segment Display screen views a segment selected from the Interchange, Group, or Transaction Display screen. How to Access Access the Segment Display screen in any of these three ways: • Type S to select the desired segment from the Interchange Display screen and press PF5. • Type S to select the desired segment from the Group Display screen and press PF5. • Type S to select the desired segment from the Transaction Display screen and press PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Segment Display screen for character mode. Select EDIM260 __________ SEGMENT DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 I/O . . . . . . . . . . . : Outbound Databank . . . . . : Gentran Version ID. . . . . . . . : 004030______ Agency . . . . . . : X__ Transaction ID. . . . . . : 850 Rel. . . . . . . . : Segment ID. . . . . . . . : N1_ Segment Version. . : 00 Ele Sub Rep A Seq Ele Nbr Description Element Data _ 001 000 ENTITY IDENTIFIER CODE VN _ 002 000 NAME XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY _ 003 000 IDENTIFICATION CODE QUALIFIE 1 _ 004 000 IDENTIFICATION CODE 121212121 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ END OF ELEMENTS Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex PF3=Exit PF4=Trans PF5=Ele Def PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 129 The Databank Subsystem Segment Display Screen EDIM260 The following example illustrates the Segment Display screen for hexadecimal mode. Select EDIM260 __________ I/O . . . . Version ID. Transaction Segment ID. Ele Sub A Seq Ele _ 001 000 . . . . . . ID. . . . . Rep Nbr . . . . SEGMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . : : : : Outbound 004030______ 850 N1_ XXX Databank . . . . Agency . . . . . Rel. . . . . . . Segment Version. . . . . : Gentran : X__ : : 00 Description ENTITY IDENTIFIER CODE Element Data VN ED 55 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY EEE4CDDDEECD4CDDDCDE 78903647435903647158 _ 002 000 NAME _ 003 000 IDENTIFICATION CODE QUALIFIE 1 F 1 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Trans 06/01/2011 12:00:00 PF5=Ele Def Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segment Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Data Element Display screen for the data element selected Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the element for which you want to view, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Hex Displays the element data in hexadecimal mode. PF2=Chars Displays the element data in character mode. Note: The value for the PF2 key changes based on the current display mode. 4 - 130 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Segment Display Screen EDIM260 PF4=Interchg Displays the Interchange Display screen. PF4=Group Displays the Group Display screen. PF4=Trans Displays the Transaction Display screen. The Databank Subsystem Note: The value for the PF4 key changes, based on the screen from which you navigated to the Segment Display screen. PF5=Ele Def The Element Definition function key is used to select an EDI data element from the segment data displayed and view the element on the Element Display screen. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. I/O (protected) An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates direction of data being displayed. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound document Outbound Outbound document Databank (protected) An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates in which databank data are stored. Valid values are: Gentran Realtime Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Version ID A 12-position alphanumeric field used to identify the standard version associated with the segment being displayed. Agency A 3-position alphabetic field used to locate the agency associated with the Version ID. Transaction ID (protected) Displays the EDI set identification for the transaction. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 131 The Databank Subsystem Segment Display Screen EDIM260 Rel (ANA TRADACOMS version only) A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID. Segment ID A 3-position alphanumeric field used to locate a segment identifier. Segment Version A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment. This field initially displays using a default segment version of zero; however, you can type a version to display new segment version information on the screen. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select an element. Type S next to the selected Element, and then press PF5 to display the Data Element Display. Ele Seq (protected) A 3-position numeric field that displays the element sequence number of the data element within the segment. Sub Ele (protected) A 3-position numeric field that displays the sub-element sequence number if the data element is part of a group element. Rep Nbr (protected) A 3-position numeric field displaying the repeat number for a data element. Description (protected) A 28-position alphabetic field that contains the element description from the dictionary file. Element Data (protected) A 31-position alphanumeric field that contains the first 31 characters of the data element within the segment as found in the EDI databank. Use the PF2 key to toggle between the character and hexadecimal display modes. 4 - 132 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Element Display Screen EDIM261 The Databank Subsystem Data Element Display Screen EDIM261 Purpose The Data Element Display screen is used to view a data element selected from a segment. How to Access Access the Data Element Display screen by typing S to select the desired element on the Segment Display screen and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Data Element Display screen for character mode. EDIM261 __________ I/O . . . . . . . . . Version ID. . . . . . Element ID. . . . . . Description . . . . . Repeating Occurrence. DATA ELEMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . : : : : : Outbound 004030 93 NAME Minimum Length. . . . . . : 001 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Databank . . . . . : Gentran Agency . . . . . . : X Element Version. . : 00 Element Type . . . : AN Maximum Length . . : 00060 Composite Code Definition : Element Data. . . . . . . : XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex PF3=Exit PF4=Seg IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 133 The Databank Subsystem Data Element Display Screen EDIM261 The following example illustrates the Data Element Display screen for hexadecimal mode. EDIM261 __________ I/O . . . . . . . . . Version ID. . . . . . Element ID. . . . . . Description . . . . . Repeating Occurrence. DATA ELEMENT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . : : : : : Outbound 004030 93 NAME Minimum Length. . . . . . : 001 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Databank . . . . . : Gentran Agency . . . . . . : X Element Version. . : 00 Element Type . . . : AN Maximum Length . . : 00060 Composite Code Definition : Element Data. . . . . . . : XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY EEE4CDDDEECD4CDDDCDE 78903647435903647158 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars PF3=Exit PF4=Seg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Hex Displays the element data in hexadecimal mode. PF2=Chars Displays the element data in character mode. Note: The value for the PF2 key changes based on the current display mode. PF4=Seg The Segment function key is used to return to the Segment Display screen. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 134 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Data Element Display Screen EDIM261 The Databank Subsystem I/O (protected) An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates direction of data being displayed. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound document Outbound Outbound document Databank (protected) An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates in which databank data are stored. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Version ID (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the standard version associated with the element being displayed. Agency (protected) A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID. Element ID (protected) A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the data element ID as defined by the standard. Element Version (protected) A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element. Description (protected) A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains the element description from the dictionary file. Repeating Occurrence (protected) This field indicates the occurrence of a repeating data element for elements with a repeat value greater than 1. Element Type (protected) A 2-position alphanumeric field that specifies the editing format of the data contained in this data element. Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for Sterling Gentran:Structure only include: CM CY DD JD J8 MM PD PJ PM = = = = = = = = = Date format = MMDDYYYY Date format = YYYYMMDD Date format = DDMMYY Date format = Julian YYDDD Date format = Julian YYYYDDD Date format = MMDDYY Date format = Packed DDMMYY Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD Date format = Packed MMDDYY IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 135 The Databank Subsystem Data Element Display Screen EDIM261 PY = Date format = Packed YYMMDD Pn = Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions Sn = Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions YY = Date format = YYMMDD ZD = Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY ZJ = Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD ZM = Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY ZY = Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include: AN CD DT D8 FS ID Nn R Rn = = = = = = = = = string type – alphanumeric Date format = DDMMYYYY Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD Date format = YYYYMMDD Fixed string – alphanumeric – pad with spaces Identifier type – element has code list Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point Decimal where n indicates the maximum number of decimal positions TM = Time format = HHMM T6 = Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds T8 = Time format = HHMMSSHS, where HS = hundredths of a second Minimum Length (protected) Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. Maximum Length (protected) Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard. Composite Code Definition (protected) Displays the composite code layout for codes if available. Element Data (protected) A 100-position alphanumeric field that contains the first 100 characters of the data element as found in the EDI databank. Use the PF2 key to toggle between the character and hexadecimal display modes. 4 - 136 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 Purpose The Document Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for a single document. This screen displays information differently, depending on the document. Therefore, the details for this screen have been split into two subsections: one section of the screen is displayed for outbound documents and the second section of the screen is displayed for inbound documents. How to Access Access the Document Status Detail screen in either of these two ways: • Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF5. • On the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Document Status Detail (outbound) screen for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM265 __________ DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL Partner ID . . : VENDOR – 1 Appl. Data ID : POVFILE User Reference : PONUMBER-001 Orig. BD Run # : Databank Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Loaded . . . . : Mapped . . . . : 00000001 00000001 IA00000002 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Division: 000 Network: I/O: Databank: Acknowledge Status: Mapping Status: DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Outbound GENTRAN N 00 Test/Prod: Prod User Dup. Ind.: Character Count: 000001600 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Doc IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF5=Trans 4 - 137 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 Relationship Mode EDIM265 __________ DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL User . . . . . : YOUR-COMPANY Appl. Data ID : POFILE User Reference : PONUMBER-001 Orig. DB Run # : Databank Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Loaded . . . . : Mapped . . . . : 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner: VENDOR-1 Division: 000 00000011 00000032 OA00000033 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 XXX Network: I/O: Outbound Databank: GENTRAN Mapping Status: 00 12:00 12:00 DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : XXX Test/Prod: Prod User Dup. Ind.: Y Character Count: 000005000 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Trans Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Transfers to the Databank Document Display (EDIM264). The application records for the current document are displayed. PF4=Doc Returns to the Document Status screen. PF5=Trans Switches to the Transaction Status Detail screen for the document. From the Transaction Status Detail screen you can view EDI related status and control information for the document. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 138 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 The Databank Subsystem Partner ID (User) (protected) Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) associated with the document. Qual (Partner) (protected) Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Appl. Data ID (protected) A 12-character alphanumeric field that identifies application data. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile used to process the document displayed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information on division access. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Orig BD Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the transaction. Network (protected) Displays the network as defined on the Partner ID that was used to process this document. Databank Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the document was last processed. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the document. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Reference Tag (protected) Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the document. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 139 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 Databank (protected) Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Reported Status (protected) Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound documents. This value indicates whether Application Databank Inquiry report (EDID551) was run. Valid values are: Y Reported N Not reported Space Not reported Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the document. Valid values are: A Accepted I Indeterminate N Not required O Overdue acknowledgment R Rejected U Manually Acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment Loaded (protected) Displays the date and time the document was loaded on to the databank. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Mapping Status (protected) Displays the current Mapping Status for the document. 00 No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the document. One or more requirement or relational condition errors were detected. One or more unknown or unexpected segment errors were detected. An inbound document could not be translated. 04 08 12 Mapped (protected) Displays the date and time the document was last mapped. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this document will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Mapper-1 Path Maintenance (EDIM83D) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on the Outbound Application Databank Maintenance (EDIM863) screen will be used determine 4 - 140 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265 The Databank Subsystem if the document should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Update (protected) Displays the last online update action which was performed against the document. D Deleted E Edited R Reset (for reprocessing) Test/Prod (protected) Displays the test/production status of the document. This value is defined in the partner profile that was used to process the document. For outbound documents this value is used to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope. Update User ID (protected) Displays the three initials of the user which performed the update. User Dup. Ind (protected) Identifies whether this document is a duplicate of a document already on the databank. The duplicate check is based on the Partner and User Reference values. N No, is not a duplicate Y Yes, is a duplicate Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters in the document. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 141 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 Purpose The Document Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for a document on the databank. How to Access Access the Document Status Detail screen in either of these two ways: • Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF5. • On the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Document Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/ Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM265 __________ DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL Partner ID . . : VENDOR-1 Appl. Data ID : INVFILE User Reference : INV01 Orig. BD Run # : Databank Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Edited . . . . : Mapped . . . . : Output . . . . : XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual: Division: 000 00000015 00000015 IA00000031 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 12:00 I/O: Databank: Acknowledge Status: Mapping Status: DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Inbound GENTRAN N 04 Test/Prod: Prod Envelope: Prod User Dup. Ind.: Y Character Count: 000001440 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data 4 - 142 PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Trans IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 The Databank Subsystem Relationship Mode EDIM265 __________ DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL User . . . . . : YOUR-COMPANY Appl. Data ID : INVFILE User Reference : INV01 Orig. DB Run # : Databank Run # : Reference Tag : Reported Status: Edited . . . . : Mapped . . . . : Output . . . . : 00000046 00000046 IA00000021 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 06/01/2011 12:00 12:00 12:00 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner: VENDOR-1 Division: 000 I/O: Databank: Acknowledge Status: Mapping Status: DBK Retention Days: Update . . . . : Update User ID : Inbound GENTRAN A 00 Test/Prod: Test Envelope: Prod User Dup. Ind.: Y Character Count: 000001600 Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Trans Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF2=Data Transfers to the Databank Document Display (EDIM264). The application records for the current document are displayed. PF4=Doc Returns to the Document Status screen. PF5=Trans Switches to the Transaction Status Detail screen for the document being viewed. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 143 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 Partner ID (User) (protected) Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) associated with the document. Qual (Partner) (protected) Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Appl. Data ID (protected) A 12-character alphanumeric field that displays identification for the application data. Division (protected) Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the document displayed. See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on division access. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Orig BD Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the transaction. Databank Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling Gentran:Basic, at the time the document was last processed. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the document. Reference Tag (protected) Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the document.I/O This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Reported Status (protected) Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound documents. This value indicates whether Application Databank Inquiry report (EDID551) was run. Valid values are: Y Reported N Not reported Space (Blank) Not reported 4 - 144 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 The Databank Subsystem Databank (protected) Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Edited (protected) Displays the date and time the document was processed by the Inbound Editor. Acknowledge Status (protected) Displays the current acknowledgment status for the document. Valid values are: A Accepted I Indeterminate N Not Required O Overdue acknowledgment R Rejected U Manually Acknowledged W Waiting acknowledgment Mapped (protected) Displays the date and time the document was last mapped. Mapping Status (protected) Displays the status that resulted from the inbound Mapper for the document. Valid values are: 00 No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the document. One or more requirement or relational condition errors were detected. One or more unknown or unexpected segment errors were detected. An inbound document could not be translated. 04 08 12 DBK Retention Days Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only. A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this document will remain on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Mapper-2 Path Maintenance (EDIM84K) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field on the Inbound Application Databank Maintenance (EDIM866) screen will be used determine if the document should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process. Output (protected) Displays the date and time the document was extracted or written to the application file from the inbound application databank for processing by the user application. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 145 The Databank Subsystem Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265 Update (protected) Displays the last online update action which was performed against the document. Valid values are: D Deleted E Edited R Reset for reprocessing Test/Prod (protected) Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner profile that was used to process the transaction. Update User ID (protected) Displays the initials of the user that performed the update. Envelope (protected) Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is determined from the interchange envelope that was received with the transaction from your trading partner. User Dup. Ind (protected) Identifies whether this document is a duplicate of a document already on the databank. The duplicate check is based on the Partner and User Reference values. Valid values are: N No, is not a duplicate Y Yes, is a duplicate Character Count (protected) Displays the number of characters in the document. 4 - 146 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Display Screen EDIM264 The Databank Subsystem Document Display Screen EDIM264 Purpose The Document Display screen is used to view the data detail for all records for a document. The first 75 characters of data for each record are displayed. How to Access Access the Document Display screen in either of the following two ways: • Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF2. • In the Document Status Detail screen, press PF2. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Document Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode Select EDIM264 __________ DOCUMENT DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner ID . . : Qual : Name . . . . . : User Reference : PONUMBER-002 I/O . . . . . : Outbound Databank : Gentran Search : ______________ A Record _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002003010295IBM INC. 4600 LAKEHURST COURT _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002002010295IBM INC. 4600 LAKEHURST COURT _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0020050000500EACH0129999CAT-286-12-20 286/12MHZ/20 MEG _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0020050000400EACH0109999CAT-286-10-10 286/10MHZ/10 MEG _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002008000002 _ _ _ _ _ _ END OF RECORDS FOR DOCUMENT Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Record PF6=Search PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF14=Dtl IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 147 The Databank Subsystem Document Display Screen EDIM264 Relationship Mode Select EDIM264 __________ DOCUMENT DISPLAY XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 User . . . . . : Partner : Name . . . . . : User Reference : PONUMBER-001 I/O . . . . . : Outbound Databank : Gentran Search : ______________ A Record _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001001010295SIBM 4600 LAKEHURST COURT _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#################################################### _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55 PURCHASE ORDER INSTRUCTIONS _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55 _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55ALL ITEMS MUST BE SENT BY REQUESTED SHIP DATE _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55ENTIRE ORDER IS SUBJECT TO CANCELLATION _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55 _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55NO SUBSTITUTION OF ITEMS W/O PRIOR BUYER APPR _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55 _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#################################################### _ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0010050000500EACH0129999CAT-286-12-20 286/12MHZ/20 MEG Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Record PF6=Search PF14=Dtl Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Record Display screen for the record selected Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the record for which you want to view, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 4 - 148 PF4=Doc Returns to the Document Status screen. PF5=Record The Record function key is used to select an application record from the record data displayed. PF6=Search The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to search for the specified value in the EDI data records. PF14=Dtl Displays the Document Status Detail screen for the document displayed. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Document Display Screen EDIM264 The Databank Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner ID (User) (protected) Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) associated with the document. Qual (Partner) (protected) Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). Name (protected) Displays the name that was defined to the Partner ID using Partner Maintenance. Search A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record. User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” for more information. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Realtime Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 149 The Databank Subsystem Document Display Screen EDIM264 A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected record, and then press PF5. For example, if you want to view the Record Display screen for a particular record on the Document Display screen, type S in the A field for the record you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions you can perform for the Document Display screen. Record (protected) Displays up to the first 75 characters of data as found in the record. The complete record can be viewed from the Record Display screen. 4 - 150 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Record Display Screen EDIM266 The Databank Subsystem Record Display Screen EDIM266 Purpose The Record Display screen is used to view a record selected from a document. How to Access Access the Record Display screen by typing S to select the desired record on the Document Display screen and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Record Display screen. Select EDIM266 __________ RECORD DISPLAY Application Data ID : POFILE Record ID . . . . . : 001 I/O . . . . . . . .: OUTBOUND Fld A Seq Description _ 010 VENDOR NUMBER (SORT KEY) _ 020 PO NUMBER (SORT KEY) _ 030 RECORD TYPE (SORT KEY) _ 040 PO DATE _ 050 BILL TO NAME _ 060 BILL TO ADDRESS _ 070 BILL TO CITY _ 080 BILL TO STATE _ 090 BILL TO ZIP _ 100 VENDOR NAME Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd XXX Databank: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Gentran Field Data VENDOR-1 PONUMBER-001 001 110190 IBM INC. 4600 LAKEHURST COURT DUBLIN OH 43017 XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY PF3=Exit PF4=Doc PF5=Field Screen Actions The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Record Display screen. The following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions. To perform this action ... View the Field Display screen for the field selected Associated with this screen action ... Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the field sequence number for which you want to view, and then press PF5. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 151 The Databank Subsystem Record Display Screen EDIM266 Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Doc Returns to the Document Status screen. PF5=Field The Field function key is used to select an application data field from the record data displayed and view the field on the Field Display screen. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Application Data ID (protected) A 12-character alphanumeric field that displays the Application Data ID. Record ID (protected) Displays the record ID for the record as defined in the Application file. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank A (Action Code) A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected field sequence number, and then press PF5. 4 - 152 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Record Display Screen EDIM266 The Databank Subsystem For example, if you want to view the Field Display screen for a particular field, type S in the A field for the field sequence number you want to view. Then, press PF5. See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid functions that you can perform for the Record Display screen. Fld Seq (protected) Displays the field sequence number of the field within the record. Description (protected) Displays information about the field as defined in the Application file. Field Data (protected) Displays up to the first 31 characters of data as found in the record's field. The complete field can be viewed from the Field Display screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 153 The Databank Subsystem Field Display Screen EDIM267 Field Display Screen EDIM267 Purpose The Field Display screen enables you to review field information and edit the field data, as necessary. How to Access Access the Field Display screen by typing S to select the desired record on the Record Display screen and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Field Display screen. EDIM267 __________ I/O . . . . . . FIELD DISPLAY . . : OUTBOUND Application Data ID : POFILE Field Description : BILL TO ZIP Field Sequence . . . : 090 Field Type . . . . . : AN Field Position . . . : 00107 Field Length . . . . : 05 Field Data . . . . . . XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Databank: Gentran 43019_______________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Record PF10=Updt Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 4 - 154 PF4=Record The Record function key is used to select an application record from the record data displayed. PF10=Updt Updates the field data value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Field Display Screen EDIM267 The Databank Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. I/O (protected) This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are: Inbound Inbound documents only Outbound Outbound documents only Databank (protected) Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are: Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank Application Data ID (protected) A 12-character alphanumeric identifier for the application data. Field Description (protected) Displays information about the field as defined in the application file. Field Sequence Displays the sequence number of the field in the record. Field Type (protected) Displays the editing format of the data contained in this data element. Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for Sterling Gentran:Structure only include: CM CY DD JD J8 MM PD PJ = = = = = = = = Date format = MMDDYYYY Date format = YYYYMMDD Date format = DDMMYY Date format = Julian YYDDD Date format = Julian YYYYDDD Date format = MMDDYY Date format = Packed DDMMYY Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 155 The Databank Subsystem PM PY Pn Sn YY ZD ZJ ZM ZY Field Display Screen EDIM267 = = = = = = = = = Date format = Packed MMDDYY Date format = Packed YYMMDD Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions Date format = YYMMDD Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include: AN CD DT D8 FS ID Nn R Rn TM T6 T8 = = = = = = = = = = = = string type – alphanumeric Date format = DDMMYYYY Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD Date format = YYYYMMDD Fixed string – alphanumeric – pad with spaces Identifier type – element has code list Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point Decimal where n indicates the maximum number of decimal positions Time format = HHMM Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds Time format = HHMMSSss, where ss = hundreds of seconds Field Position (protected) Displays the offset of the field from the start of the record. The record starts at one. Field Length (protected) Displays the fixed length of the field. Field Data Displays up to 100 characters (two lines of 50 each) for the field's data value. To edit the field value, type over the existing value with the new value and press PF10 to update Sterling Gentran. 4 - 156 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270 Purpose The Change Audit Status Detail screen is used to provide detailed information for an update that has been applied to a reference on the Change Audit File for a selected Profile ID. How to Access Access the Change Audit Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired change audit record on the Change Audit Status screen and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following examples illustrate the Change Audit Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. Partner/Qualifier Mode EDIM270 CHANGE AUDIT STATUS DETAIL Partner ID . . User Reference Appl Data ID Databank . . . : : : : Update Update Update Update : Edit : 06/01/2011 : : XXX . . . . Online Applied User ID Description VENDOR-1 PONUMBER-001 POFILE Outbound Application XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Qual : Databank Run # : 12:00 Bypass : Reason : : BILL TO ZIP Before . . . . : 43017 After . . . . : 43069 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Chg Aud IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Next DB 4 - 157 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270 Relationship Mode EDIM270 __________ CHANGE AUDIT STATUS DETAIL User . . . . . User Reference Appl Data ID Databank . . . : : : : Update Update Update Update : Edit : 06/01/2011 : : XXX . . . . Online Applied User ID Description YOUR-COMPANY PONUMBER-001 POFILE Outbound Application XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Partner : VENDOR-1 Databank Run # : Bypass : Reason : 12:00 : BILL TO ZIP Before . . . . : 43017 After . . . . : 43069 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Chg Aud PF6=Next DB Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Chg Aud Displays the Change Audit Status screen for the Partner ID described in detail. PF6=Next DB Displays Change Audit information for the next databank of Partner ID. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Fields in which you must enter a value contain the statement (required) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, and then press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 4 - 158 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270 The Databank Subsystem Partner ID (User) Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) associated with the update. Qual (Partner) (protected) Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode). User Reference (protected) Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document. See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information. Appl Data ID (protected) A 12-character alphanumeric field entered to restrict the list to one Application Data ID for listing documents. Env. Ref. ID (EDI data only) (protected) Identifies the interchange envelope reference for the interchange. Databank (protected) This field is used to indicate to which databank changes occurred. Valid values are: Outbound Application/Gentran Outbound EDI/Gentran Inbound EDI/Gentran Inbound Application/Gentran Outbound Application/Realtime Outbound EDI/Realtime Inbound EDI/Realtime Inbound Application/Realtime Databank Run # (protected) Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling Gentran:Basic. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the document. Update (protected) Displays the update. Valid values are: Delete Edit Manual Ack Reset Network IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 4 - 159 The Databank Subsystem Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270 Bypass (protected) Indicates whether the transaction was bypassed or not. Valid values are: N Not bypassed (applied) Y Yes, was bypassed (See Reason on screen) P Was partially applied (See Reason on screen) Update Online (protected) Displays the date the update was generated in the online system by a user. The format is MM/DD/YY HH:MM. Reason (protected) If the update was bypassed, a descriptive reason of 20-characters is displayed in this field. Update Applied (protected) Displays the date the update was applied to the User Reference in the batch environment. The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM. Update User ID (protected) Displays the three initials of the user ID that performed the update. Displays only after editing application data Description (protected) This field provides information about the field that was edited. Before (protected) This field displays the text before it was edited. After (protected) This field displays the text after it was edited. 4 - 160 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Chapter 5 The Administration Subsystem Overview This chapter contains the following topics related to the Administration subsystem. Topic Page Before You Begin ........................................................................... ....................................... 5-4 Administrative Main Menu ............................................................EDIM210 ....................... 5-7 Security Maintenance Menu...........................................................EDIM200 ..................... 5-10 User ID Directory ...........................................................................EDIM203 ..................... 5-12 User ID Maintenance Screen..........................................................EDIM201 ..................... 5-15 User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products ..........................EDIM202 ..................... 5-23 Message Maintenance Menu ..........................................................EDIM211 ..................... 5-25 Message Directory..........................................................................EDIM212 ..................... 5-27 Message Maintenance Screen.........................................................EDIM213 ..................... 5-30 Error Rejection Maintenance Screen..............................................EDIM214 ..................... 5-35 Configuration Directory .................................................................EDIM230 ..................... 5-38 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-40 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-43 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-47 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-50 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-53 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-55 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-58 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-61 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-64 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-66 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-69 Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-71 Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen...................................................EDIM220/EDIM22A... 5-73 Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen ..................................................EDIM221/EDIM22B ... 5-77 Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen...................................................EDIM222 ..................... 5-82 Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen...................................................EDIM223/EDIM22D... 5-85 Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen...................................................EDIM224/EDIM22E ... 5-89 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-1 The Administration Subsystem Overview Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen...................................................EDIM225/EDIM22F.... 5-94 Partner Migration Menu .................................................................EDIY100...................... 5-98 User Selection Screen.....................................................................EDIY200.................... 5-101 User Maintenance Screen ...............................................................EDIY500.................... 5-103 Partner Selection Screen.................................................................EDIY300.................... 5-106 Relationship Maintenance Screen ..................................................EDIY400.................... 5-109 Data Translation Table Directory Screen........................................EDIY600.................... 5-112 Data Table Migration Selection Screen ..........................................EDIY610.................... 5-115 Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen ....................................EDIY620.................... 5-117 Upload Process Maintenance..........................................................EDIM235 ................... 5-120 Separator Main Menu .....................................................................EDIM934 ................... 5-123 Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen ...........................EDIM935 ................... 5-125 Priority Options Directory Screen ..................................................EDIM936 ................... 5-132 Priority Options Maintenance Screen.............................................EDIM937 ................... 5-135 Change Audit Main Menu ..............................................................EDIM209 ................... 5-140 Partner Change Audit Directory .....................................................EDIM070 ................... 5-143 Partner Change Audit Status...........................................................EDIM071 ................... 5-146 Partner Change Audit Detail...........................................................EDIM073 ................... 5-151 XREF Change Audit Directory .....................................................EDIM074 ................... 5-155 XREF Change Audit Status ............................................................EDIM075 ................... 5-157 XREF Change Audit Detail............................................................EDIM076 ................... 5-160 PARTREL Change Audit Directory ...............................................EDIM077 ................... 5-162 PARTREL Change Audit Status .....................................................EDIM078 ................... 5-164 PARTREL Change Audit Detail .....................................................EDIM079 ................... 5-167 Standards Change Audit Directory.................................................EDIM181 ................... 5-170 Standards Change Audit Status ......................................................EDIM182 ................... 5-172 Standards Change Audit Detail ......................................................EDIM183 ................... 5-176 Application Change Audit Directory..............................................EDIM560 ................... 5-179 Application Change Audit Status ...................................................EDIM561 ................... 5-182 Application Change Audit Detail ...................................................EDIM562 ................... 5-185 Transaction Change Audit Directory..............................................EDIM520 ................... 5-188 Transaction Change Audit Status ...................................................EDIM521 ................... 5-191 Transaction Change Audit Detail ...................................................EDIM523 ................... 5-194 Code Table Change Audit Directory ..............................................EDIM587 ................... 5-197 Code Table Change Audit Status....................................................EDIM588 ................... 5-200 Code Table Change Audit Detail....................................................EDIM589 ................... 5-203 Security Change Audit Directory ...................................................EDIM204 ................... 5-206 Security Change Audit Status.........................................................EDIM205 ................... 5-208 Security Change Audit Detail.........................................................EDIM206 ................... 5-211 Error Message Change Audit Directory .........................................EDIM215 ................... 5-213 5-2 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Overview The Administration Subsystem Error Message Change Audit Status...............................................EDIM216 ................... 5-215 Error Message Change Audit Detail...............................................EDIM217 ................... 5-218 Configuration Change Audit Directory ..........................................EDIM232 ................... 5-221 Configuration Change Audit Status................................................EDIM233 ................... 5-223 Configuration Change Audit Detail................................................EDIM234 ................... 5-226 Global Parameter Change Audit Directory ....................................EDIM226 ................... 5-228 Global Parameter Change Audit Status ..........................................EDIM227 ................... 5-230 Global Parameter Change Audit Detail ..........................................EDIM228 ................... 5-233 Separator Change Audit Directory .................................................EDIM938 ................... 5-235 Separator Change Audit Status.......................................................EDIM939 ................... 5-238 Separator Change Audit Detail.......................................................EDIM940 ................... 5-243 Message Center Job Summary .......................................................EDIM245 ................... 5-246 Message Center Job Detail .............................................................EDIM246 ................... 5-250 Message Center Report Display .....................................................EDIM247 ................... 5-253 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-3 The Administration Subsystem Before You Begin Before You Begin What Is in This Chapter? This chapter defines the menu and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Administration subsystem. The chapter is divided into different sections relating to a particular screen. Each section contains the following reference information: • The purpose of the screen • Instructions on how to access the screen • An example of the screen • Description of screen actions, when applicable • A list of valid function keys and a description of each key • A list of fields on the screen with valid values, as well as a description of each field Administration Subsystem Jump Codes A jump code is a 1- to 10-position alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. Use the jump code to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another, while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible through a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. You can jump between screens without having to navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens: Step 1: Press Home. The cursor moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the right of the screen number. Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter. Note: If the cursor moves to the Jump Code field, and then you decide not to enter a jump code after all, press Tab to return to the next entry field on the screen. 5-4 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Before You Begin The Administration Subsystem The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Administration subsystem menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Screen Screen Title Number Sterling Gentran Main Menu EDIM001 Administrative Main Menu EDIM210 Jump Codes Numeric Alphabetic 0.0 BSC 0 MAIN 4.0 ADM 4 Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200 4.1 SEC User ID Directory EDIM203 4.1.1 SEC.UDIR User ID Maintenance EDIM201 4.1.2 SEC.UDEF SEC.USER Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211 4.2 MSG Message Directory EDIM212 4.2.1 MSG.DIR Message Maintenance EDIM213 4.2.2 MSG.MAINT Error Rejection Maintenance EDIM214 4.2.3 MSG.REJ Configuration Directory EDIM230 4.3 CFG Global Parameter Maintenance EDIM220 4.4 GBL (Relationship Conversion) Partner Migration Menu EDIY100 4.5 PCNV User Selection EDIY200 4.5.1 PCNV.USER User Maintenance EDIY500 4.5.2 PCNV.UMNT Partner Selection EDIY300 4.5.3 PCNV.PART Relationship Maintenance EDIY400 4.5.4 PCNV.REVW Data Translation Table Directory EDIY600 4.5.5 PCNV.TDIR Data Table Migration Selection EDIY610 4.5.6 PCNV.TSEL Data Table Migration Maintenance EDIY620 4.5.7 PCNV.TMNT Upload Processing EDIM235 4.6 UPLD Change Audit Main Menu EDIM209 4.8 CHAD Partner Change Audit Directory EDIM070 4.8.1 CHAD.PDIR Partner Change Audit Status EDIM071 4.8.1.2 CHAD.STAP XREF Change Audit Directory EDIM074 4.8.2 CHAD.XDIR XREF Change Audit Status EDIM075 4.8.2.1 CHAD.STAX PARTREL Change Audit Directory EDIM077 4.8.2 CHAD.RDIR PARTREL Change Audit Status EDIM078 4.8.2.1 CHAD.STAR Standards Change Audit Directory EDIM181 4.8.3 CHAD.SDIR Standards Change Audit Status EDIM182 4.8.3.1 CHAD.STAS IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-5 The Administration Subsystem Before You Begin Screen Jump Codes Screen Title Number Numeric Alphabetic Application Change Audit Directory EDIM560 4.8.4 CHAD.ADIR Application Change Audit Status EDIM561 4.8.4.1 CHAD.STAA Transaction Change Audit Directory EDIM520 4.8.5 CHAD.TDIR Transaction Change Audit Status EDIM521 4.8.5.2 CHAD.STAT Code Table Change Audit Directory EDIM587 4.8.6 CHAD.CDIR Code Table Change Audit Status EDIM588 4.8.6.1 CHAD.STAC Security Change Audit Directory EDIM204 4.8.7 CHAD.XDIR Security Change Audit Status EDIM205 4.8.7.1 CHAD.STAX Error Message Change Audit Directory EDIM215 4.8.8 CHAD.EDIR Error Message Change Audit Status EDIM216 4.8.8.1 CHAD.STAE System Configuration CA Directory EDIM232 4.8.9 CHAD.YDIR System Configuration CA Status EDIM233 4.8.9.1 CHAD.STAY Global Parameter CA Directory EDIM226 4.8.10 CHAD.GDIR Global Parameter CA Status EDIM227 4.8.10.1 CHAD.STAG Separator Change Audit Directory EDIM938 4.8.11 CHAD.ZDIR Separator Change Audit Status EDIM939 4.8.11.1 CHAD.STAZ Message Center Job Summary EDIM245 4.9 MC See Appendix A for a complete list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic jump codes and their associated screens. 5-6 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Administrative Main Menu EDIM210 The Administration Subsystem Administrative Main Menu EDIM210 Purpose The Administrative Main Menu (EDIM210) isolates system administrative functions into one area by including nine menu selections from which to choose. These selections enable you control system options, such as security, processing, configuration, and conversion. How to Access Access the Administrative Main Menu in either of these two ways: • From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 4 to select Administrative Main Menu and press Enter. • Type 4.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Administrative Main Menu. EDIM210 4.0_______ ADMINISTRATIVE MAIN MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ Enter PF1=Help 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Security Maintenance Menu Message Maintenance Menu Configuration Directory Global Parameter Maintenance Relationship Conversion (N/A) Upload Process Maintenance Separator Menu Change Audit Menu Message Center Job Summary PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-7 The Administration Subsystem Administrative Main Menu EDIM210 Menu Options Menu Option Description 1. Security Maintenance Menu Enables you to create a series of controls to manage users’ access to Sterling Gentran:Basic online features. 2. Message Maintenance Menu Enables you to display and modify Error message definitions. 3. Configuration Directory Enables you to display and modify System Configuration settings. 4. Global Parameter Maintenance Enables you to display and modify global parameter options. 5. Relationship Conversion Enables you to access the partner migration tools to convert to the partner Relationship mode. See Chapter 7, “Migrating to Relationship Processing Mode,” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for more information. 6. Upload Process Maintenance Enables you to upload partners, maps, application data, and code tables. 7. Separator Menu Enables you to access the Separator setup screens that provide the capability to separate inbound EDI data. 8. Change Audit Menu Enables you to view the change audit records that were created when partner, standards, or mapping files were changed. 9. Message Center Job Summary Enables you to view reports that have been saved in the Message Center. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. 5-8 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Administrative Main Menu EDIM210 The Administration Subsystem Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7,8, or 9), and press Enter to perform the selected function. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5-9 The Administration Subsystem Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200 Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200 Purpose The Security Maintenance Menu (EDIM200) contains two menu selections from which to choose to perform security file maintenance. These selections provide the ability to modify privileges of a user's profile. How to Access Access the Security Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways: • On the Administrative Main Menu, type 1 in the Selection field to select Security Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 4.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Security Maintenance Menu. EDIM200 4.1_______ SECURITY MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ Enter PF1=Help 1. User Id Directory 2. User Id Maintenance PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff 5 - 10 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200 The Administration Subsystem Menu Options The Security Maintenance Menu displays two selections that you use to perform User ID security maintenance. Menu Option Description 1. User ID Directory Lists all currently defined User IDs. This method of access would generally be used when the User ID is unknown. 2. User ID Maintenance Enables you to add or update User ID security information, such as subsystem access and authority levels by subsystem; or delete a User ID. This method of access would generally be used when the User ID is known, or a new User ID is being added to the Security file. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump and press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value, and the press Enter to move to the selected screen. Valid values are: 1 = 2 = Display the User ID Directory listing all the User IDs currently defined in your Security file. Display the User ID Maintenance screen where User IDs can be added, updated, or deleted. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 11 The Administration Subsystem User ID Directory EDIM203 User ID Directory EDIM203 Purpose The User ID Directory (EDIM203) lists all the User IDs that currently exist in your security file. Sterling Gentran displays all Users IDs (ten at a time) in alphabetical, and then numerical order. From this list, you can select a User ID to view and/or change security profile details currently assigned. How to Access Access the User ID Directory in either of these two ways: • Type 1 to select User ID Directory from the Security Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 4.1.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the User ID Directory screen. Select EDIM203 4.1.1_____ USER ID DIRECTORY Starting User Id: A User Id Name _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ADMIN AWM CEC DDD DAVID DIANA DLHUMM GAINS HILL HELEN FIRST LAST ANNA MILFORD CHRISTOPHER CHARLES DIANA DIXON ROBERT DAVIS DIANA DESALES DENNIS HUMMERY DALE GAINS LARRY HILLS HELEN WAGNER TO SELECT USER ENTER AN Enter PF1=Help PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 5 - 12 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 ________ S BESIDE THE ID PF3=Exit Initials Division XXX AWM CEC DDD RCD DDZ DLH DEG LDH HCW 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 PF5=Id Maint IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Directory EDIM203 The Administration Subsystem Screen Actions Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... View the security information for a user on the User ID screen. Select Do this ... Type S in the A field next to the User ID that you want to view, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=ID Maint After one User ID is selected by entering S in the A field next to the selected User ID, press PF5 to branch to the User ID Maintenance screen for the User ID selected. This screen displays security information (i.e., user name, password, subsystem access, authority levels by subsystem) currently on file for the selected User ID. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump and press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Starting User ID An 8-position alphanumeric field used to specify the User portion of a User/Partner ID from which viewing begins. Type the appropriate User ID. You can type a partial User ID in this field and the system displays up to 10 User IDs starting with the nearest User ID match. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a User ID. Type S in this field to make a selection, and press the PF5 key to display the User ID Maintenance screen. User ID (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the user identifier. A user enters a user identification and password to logon to the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. The User ID is the key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 13 The Administration Subsystem User ID Directory EDIM203 and authority levels the user is permitted to access. The User ID is also called the Logon ID. Name (protected) Displays the user name associated with the User ID. This field may include the given and surname of the user. Initials (protected) A 3-position alphanumeric field that displays up to three letters or initials associated with the user name or User ID. These initials are displayed on the top of each menu and screen when displayed, and are used to identify which user performed the most recent maintenance on a particular record. Currently, there is no system validation of other User IDs to determine if initials have been assigned to another user. Division (protected) A 3-position alphanumeric field that displays a user-specified code identifying the division. Division is used by the Sterling Gentran online system to limit the user’s access to various subsystems, such as Trading Partner and Mapping, to only those records for the specified division code. The EDI coordinator may be assigned a division of 000 to access ALL records, regardless of the Division coded on the partner profile. Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record, and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records. See the sub-topic “Field Descriptions” in the “User ID Maintenance Screen” section (next page) for more information on Division access. 5 - 14 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 Purpose The User ID Maintenance-1 (EDIM201) screen enables you to add, display, change, and delete the security information for a specified User ID. This screen also allows you to set indicators to permit and restrict user access to all Sterling Gentran:Basic online subsystems, and to determine the level of access to each subsystem. This screen also lists the date that the security information was last updated or added for the User ID, and the User ID of the user who performed the maintenance. How to Access Access the User ID Maintenance screen in any one of the following ways: • Type 2 to select User ID Maintenance from the Security Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 4.1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. • Type S to select the desired User ID on the User ID Directory screen and press PF5. Screen Example The following example illustrates the User ID Maintenance screen. EDIM201 4.1.2_______ USER ID MAINTENANCE-1 User ID.... XXXXX____ Password.. ___________ Division.. Last Name.. XXXXX_____________________ Last Update Date..: 06/01/11 User..: Options Partner Maintenance Standards Maintenance Databank Maintenance Mapping Integration Administrative Maintenance Security Maintenance Message Maintenance Configuration File Maintenance Global Parameter Maintenance Enter PF1=Help XXX First.. 06/01/2011 12:00:00 01A Initials.. XXXXXX________ XXX MI.. X XXX Access Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Y (Y/N) Authority Level 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3/4/5/6) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) 1 (1/2/3) PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF5=More Opts PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide PF6=Nxt User 5 - 15 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 Function Key Descriptions To display security maintenance details for another User ID, type the User ID over the ID currently displayed, and press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays security information for the new User ID requested. Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Branches to the User ID Directory screen. This screen lists all User IDs. PF5=More Opts Displays Add-on product security options. PF6=Nxt User Displays security information for the next consecutive User ID. The sort sequence is alphabetic, then numeric. PF9=Add To add a new User ID to the Security file, type the new User ID (typeover displayed data, if necessary), name, security access and authority level information for each Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem, and press PF9. A confirmation message is displayed to ensure the password was typed in accurately. Retype the password, and press PF9 to confirm the add. Sterling Gentran refreshes the screen and displays the newly added User ID, and a message confirming the addition. Note: If you access the User ID Maintenance screen directly from the Security Maintenance Selection Menu, the field is blank. To add a new user, type the new profile information, and press PF9. If there is a profile currently displayed and you would like to add a new profile, type over the profile shown, and press PF9. The Last Update Date and User field shows when this addition was made and by whom. 5 - 16 PF10=Updt To update security information for a User ID that currently exists, type the changed information over the existing security data, and press PF10. A confirmation message is displayed if the password was changed. Retype the password and press PF10 to confirm the update. Sterling Gentran refreshes the screen and displays the updated security information for the User ID, and a message confirming the update. The Last Update Date field displays the current date. PF11=Del To delete a User ID from the Security file, display the selected User ID, and press PF11. Sterling Gentran displays a message prompting you to confirm by pressing PF11 again, or cancel the deletion by pressing PF12. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 The Administration Subsystem Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump and press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. User ID An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define the user identification. The User ID is the key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems and authority levels the user is permitted. The User ID is sometimes called the Logon ID. To provide additional security, the User ID is encrypted when it is saved on the Security file. Password An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define a user's password. Passwords require a minimum of four and maximum of eight characters in length. The required length is an installation option defined on the configuration file. The user can change their password on the Sterling Gentran:Basic logon screen. Sterling Gentran will issue a confirmation message after adding or updating a password. To provide additional security, a password is encrypted after saving it on the Security file and will not display on the screen when typed. For users with security Level 1, you control the password display by setting the Security Password Suppress flag on System Configuration Record 0 On-Line options. See the topic “Configuration Maintenance Screen Part 2 On-Line Options- Record Type 0,” later in this chapter for more information. Division A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define a user-specific division code. The division is used in conjunction with the partner profile. When a division is specified for a User ID, that user may only access information for records having the same division code. The System Administrator or EDI Coordinator should maintain a division of 000 to access all trading partner records. Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record, and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records. The following matrix illustrates when you can and cannot access a particular object, based on your division in your User ID. (An object refers to a trading partner, maps, or databank records.) This matrix shows that if your division is defined as 000, then you can access any object. If the object contains blanks, then any user can access that object. The 010 or 020 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 17 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 rows and columns below are merely given as examples, provided to illustrate that you can access an object only if your division and the object’s division are the same. Division of Object Division (in User ID) (blanks) 000 010 020 etc. (blanks) Access Access Access Access Access 000 No access Access No access No access No access 010 No access Access Access No access No access 020 No access Access No access Access No access etc. No access Access No access No access Access Initials A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define up to three characters for the user's initials. The user’s initials are displayed at the top of each menu and screen when displayed, and are used to identify which user performed the most recent maintenance on a particular record. Currently, there is no system validation of other User IDs to determine if these initials have been assigned to another user. Last Name A 30-position alphanumeric field used to define the user’s full surname. First A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the user’s full given name. MI A 1-position alphabetic field used to define the initial (first letter) of the user's middle name. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the last date that security file maintenance was performed for the specified User ID. This field displays the date that the User ID was first added, or the date the User ID was last updated. This date does not reflect the date for password changes (by the user via the Sterling Gentran:Basic logon screen). Date format is MM/DD/YY. User (protected) Displays up to three letters or initials of the user who added, or last updated the security information for the User ID currently displayed. Options (protected) Displays a list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems to enable restriction of each subsystem individually. Access (Y/N) A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate user access rights to the various Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems (listed to the right of the Authority Level field). The Access field is used in conjunction with the Authority Level field to build Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem security for each User ID. Access to the Databank feature is controlled through 5 - 18 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 The Administration Subsystem the use of the self-contained security system. Gentran allows you to define users with their own privileges. The following general security rules apply for data access. These rules are further restricted by the Databank Security Authority Levels described below. • If a user has access to an EDI Transaction or Application Document level directory record, the corresponding data can be viewed (subject to the authority levels described below). • At the EDI Interchange and Group level, a user is allowed to view the corresponding EDI data if: all documents within the Interchange or Functional Group have the same division (this must match the User IDs security division or the directory record would not be displayed), or the User ID has a system administrator security division (000). Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record, and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records. See the “Field Descriptions” section in this topic for more information on Division access. This may restrict users in a divisional structure or where document/transaction division is based on document type. Users in this type of environment may be required to access the EDI related information by switching from the Application Document Status to the EDI Document Status. Following are valid values for all subsystems: Y = N = Caution: Yes, grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem. When you specify the Y value in this field, the field is used in conjunction with the Authority Level field to build Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem security for each User ID. No, do not grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem. By entering the value N is this field, you deny the user the capability to access the subsystem. The default value is N. When specifying the N value, the default value for the Authority Level field is 3, and the subsystem is not displayed as an option on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. This is commonly used when restricting access to the security subsystem. Typically, access to the Security Maintenance subsystem is reserved for use by a System Administrator/EDI coordinator. Access to this subsystem at authority Level 1 enables you to see the passwords assigned to each user. Other users can view only their own password. Authority Level A 1-position numeric field used to set inquiry and update rights to the various Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems (listed immediately to the right of this field) that the specified user might access. The Authority Level field is used in conjunction with the Access field to build Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem security for each User ID. To support the required security for the Databank subsystem, the security access level allowed for the databank is from 1 – 6. These levels of security identify the following areas as requiring security: Directory Record Viewing, Directory Record Update Access, Data Viewing, and Data Editing. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 19 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 Valid values for Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Plus, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Gentran:Control are: 1 Update rights granted, including the right to change the Update Allowed field for any of the Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems. The Update Allowed field designates whether or not a user having an authority Level 2 is locked from changing applications such as Standards versions, transaction maps, the Application ID, tables, and the partner profile. This is an unrestricted security level. Note: If you have authority Level 1, you can add and update users. Sterling Gentran will display all passwords to you on the User ID Maintenance screen. Caution: = To protect the integrity of applications, such as Standards versions, transaction maps, the Application Data ID, tables, and the partner profile, authority Level 1 can be reserved for use by only the system administrator. You can also set the Update Allowed flag to N (do not allow changes to these locked applications) to prohibit system modifications after establishing a file or parameter setup. Specifying either Y or N in the Update Allowed flag provides the applicable authority to users maintaining authority Level 2. 2 = Limited update rights granted, may make additions throughout Sterling Gentran:Basic, and changes and deletions to those applications in Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems having an Update Allowed flag set to Y. If you have authority Level 2, you can both add and update users. Note: Sterling Gentran will display only your password on the User ID Maintenance screen. 3 = Display-only rights granted; no file maintenance is permitted. The default value is 3. If you have authority Level 3, you cannot add or update users. Your own password will display on the User ID Maintenance screen, but other users’ passwords will not display. If the Access field has the Y value, you MUST type a value in this field. If the Access field has the N value, this field value defaults to 3 (although it has no meaning because access to that subsystem is completely restricted). Note: Authority Level 3 for Sterling Gentran:Realtime prevents access to any of the Realtime System Maintenance screens. 5 - 20 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 The Administration Subsystem Valid Values for Databank Maintenance and Realtime Databank Maintenance are: Note: Levels 1, 2, and 3 are the same as those of the base Sterling Gentran:Basic System. 4 = Limited update rights granted, including the right to change the Update Allowed field for any of the Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems. The Update Allowed field designates whether or not a user having an Authority Level 2 is locked from changing applications, such as Standards versions, transaction maps, the Application ID, tables, and the partner profile. View and update rights for databank are not available. This is an unrestricted security level. 5 = Limited update rights granted; may make additions throughout Sterling Gentran:Basic, and changes and deletions to those applications in Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems having an Update Allowed flag set to Y. Viewing rights for databank are available. 6 = Display-only rights granted for system and databank; no file maintenance (adding, updating, or deleting) is permitted. The default value is 3. Valid Values for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are: 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = This level has access to all System Option and Extended System Management options, and can view/update all data in Exception Management, Exception Inquiry, and Tracking Management. View and update rights available in Exception Management, Exception Inquiry, and Tracking Management. No access to System Options or Extended System Management. View and update rights available in Exception Inquiry and Tracking Management. Viewing rights available in Exception Inquiry and Tracking Management with no update. Security Set-up Access to the Databank Maintenance feature is controlled through the use of the self-contained security system. Sterling Gentran allows you to define users with their own privileges. The following general security rules apply for data access. These rules are further restricted by the Databank Security Access Levels described below. • If a user has access to an EDI Transaction or Application Document level directory record, the corresponding data can be viewed (subject to the access levels). IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 21 The Administration Subsystem • User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201 At the EDI Interchange and Group level, a user is allowed to view the corresponding EDI data if: • all documents within the Interchange or Functional Group have the same division (this must match the User IDs security division or the directory record would not be displayed). OR • the User ID has a system administrator security division (000). See the “Field Descriptions” section in this topic for more information on Division access. This may restrict users in a divisional structure or where document/transaction division is based on document type. Users in this type of environment may be required to access the EDI related information by switching from the Application Document Status to the EDI Document Status. To support the required security for the Databank subsystem, the security access levels allowed for the databank are from 1 – 6. These levels of security identify the following areas as requiring security: • • • • Directory Record Viewing Directory Record Update Access Data Viewing Data Editing The following table illustrates the access combinations that are supported and the access levels which are required for each combination. Required Access Code 5 - 22 Directory Data View Update View Update 1 Y Y Y Y 2 Y N Y Y 3 Y Y Y N 4 Y Y N N 5 Y N Y N 6 Y N N N IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products EDIM202 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products EDIM202 Purpose The User ID Maintenance-2 (EDIM202) screen allows you to update security flags for Sterling Gentran:Plus, Sterling Gentran:Control, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, Sterling Gentran:Realtime Databank Maintenance, and Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint. How to Access Access the User ID Maintenance-2 screen from User ID Maintenance-1 (EDIM201) screen by pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the User ID Maintenance screen. EDIM202 __________ USER ID MAINTENANCE-2 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 User Id..... Last Update Date..: User..: Options Gentran:Plus Gentran:Control Gentran:Realtime Realtime Databank Maintenance Gentran:Viewpoint Recipient Enter PF1=Help Access _ (Y/N) _ (Y/N) _ (Y/N) _ (Y/N) _ (Y/N) __________ Authority Level _ (1/2/3) _ (1/2/3) _ (1/2/3) _ (1/2/3/4/5/6) _ (1/2/3/4) (optional) PF3=Exit PF4=Prev PF10=Updt Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev Returns to the User ID Maintenance – 1 screen (EDIM201). PF10=Updt Applies the updates to security record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 23 The Administration Subsystem User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products EDIM202 Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. User ID (protected) An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define the user identification. The User ID is the key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems and authority levels the user is permitted access. The User ID is sometimes called the Logon ID. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the last date that security file maintenance was performed for the User ID. User (protected) Displays up to three letters or initials of the user who added, or last updated the security information for the User ID currently displayed. Access A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate user access rights to the various Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems.Valid values are: Y = N = Yes, grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem. No, do not grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem. See the previous topic, “User ID Maintenance Screen,” for a more detailed explanation of Access usage. Authority Level A 1-position numeric field used to set inquiry and update rights to the various Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems that the specified user may access. See the previous topic, “User ID Maintenance Screen,” for a more detailed explanation of Access usage. Recipient (optional) A 10-position field used to limit the access of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Inquiry subsystem to the specified recipient ID. If not specified, all recipient IDs will have access. 5 - 24 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211 The Administration Subsystem Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211 Purpose The Message Maintenance Menu (EDIM211) contains three menu options that you can use to perform error message file maintenance. How to Access Access the Message Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways: • From the Administrative Main Menu, type 2 to select Message Maintenance Menu and press Enter. • Type 4.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Message Maintenance Menu. EDIM211 4.2_______ MESSAGE MAINTENANCE MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Message Directory 2. Message Maintenance 3. Error Rejection Maintenance Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF15=Logoff Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 25 The Administration Subsystem Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211 Menu Options Menu Option Description 1 Message Directory Lists all currently defined error message records. 2 Message Maintenance Enables you to display and modify error message definitions. 3 Error Rejection Maintenance Enables you to display and modify error rejection settings on error message records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Selection This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press Enter to perform the selected function. 5 - 26 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Message Directory EDIM212 The Administration Subsystem Message Directory EDIM212 Purpose The Message Directory (EDIM212) displays a list of error messages. Messages display sequentially, starting with the first message on file. This screen enables you to search for records by providing scrolling ability and the ability to specify searching criteria. You can narrow the scope of records displayed by specifying a record type, error type, and/or direction. How to Access Access the Message Directory in either of these two ways: • From the Message Maintenance Menu, type 1 to select Message Directory and press Enter. • Type 4.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Message Directory screen. Select EDIM212 4.2.1_____ MESSAGE DIRECTORY Starting Message Number....: Language Code..............: Record Type................: Error Type.................: Direction..................: XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 00000 EN_ _ _ _ A Message Rec Sev T E X T Number Ty _ 00000 G I *---- GENTRAN:BASIC VERSION 6.6 06/01/2011 _ 00001 G I VERSION CHANGED WHILE READING TRANSACTION RECORDS. _ 00002 G I INDICATED INVALID KEY ENCOUNTERED WHILE REWRITING VE _ 00003 G I TRANSACTION RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION. _ 00004 G I SEGMENT RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION. _ 00005 G I ELEMENT ACTIVITY RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION _ 00006 G I SEGMENT ELEMENT RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION. _ 00007 G I ELEMENT DICTIONARY RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION. _ 00008 G I LENGTHEN DICTIONARY TABLE - PROGRAM PROBLEM - CONTAC TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE MESSAGE # AND PRESS THE PF5 KEY Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF5=Maint PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 27 The Administration Subsystem Message Directory EDIM212 Screen Actions Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... View the Message Maintenance Select Do this ... To select a Message to view or maintain, type S next to the Message Number you want to view on the Message Directory screen, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Maint Pass control to the (EDIM213) Message Maintenance screen with key information for item selected by Action Code. Field Descriptions Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement (protected) next to the field name in the documentation. Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Starting Message Number A 5-position numeric field used to specify a message to locate from the list of records. Language Code A 2-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to specify the language for the error message. Currently, EN (English) is the only value available. Record Type A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to specify the record type for the error message. Valid values are: G U 5 - 28 = = Sterling Gentran User IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Message Directory EDIM212 The Administration Subsystem Error Type A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to specify the Sterling Gentran:Basic process, subsystem, or add-on product that uses this error message. Valid values are: D E G M P S V = = = = = = = Databank Editor General Mapping Sterling Gentran:Plus Sterling Gentran:Structure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Direction A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to specify the process direction for which the error message is valid. Valid values are: B I O space = = = = message is used in both inbound and outbound processes message is used in inbound processes only message is used in outbound processes only message is not used in either inbound or outbound process A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select an error message. Type S next to the selected Message Number, then press the PF5 key to display the Message Maintenance screen. Message Number (protected) Displays the error message number. Rec Ty (protected) Displays the Record Type. This is used to identify owner of the errors, Sterling Gentran or User. Sev (protected) Displays the severity level assigned to the error message to help you identify critical errors versus warnings. Valid values are: I W E S F T Z = = = = = = = Informational message Warning only Error Severe error Fatal error Trace (program) Initialize (file) Text (protected) Provides a description of the error. This is the text that is printed on error reports when error is encountered. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 29 The Administration Subsystem Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 Purpose The Message Maintenance (EDIM213) screen provides the ability to display and update error messages. If you access this screen from the Message Directory, the selected record displays. If you access this screen from the Message Maintenance Menu, you can specify the message to display by entering a message number, record type, and language code. How to Access Access the Message Maintenance screen using any one of the following methods: • From the Message Maintenance Menu, type 2 to select Message Maintenance and press Enter. • Type 4.2.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. • Type S to select the desired message number from the Message Directory screen and press PF5. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Message Maintenance screen. EDIM213 4.2.2_____ Message Number ..: Record Type .....: Language Code ...: Return Code 1 ...: Return Code 2 ...: Print Flag ......: Print User Area .: Rejection - In ..: Rejection - Out .: MESSAGE MAINTENANCE 00001 G EN_ 00 00 Y N _ _ XXX Error Type ......: Direction .......: Severity ........: 06/01/2011 12:00:00 G (E/D/G/M/P/S/V) _ (I/O/B/Space) I (I/W/E/S/F/T/Z) (Y/N) (Y/N) (A/D/P/space) (A/D/P/space) Text Part 1 .....: VERSION_CHANGED_WHILE_READING_TRANSACTION_RECORDS.________ Text Part 2 .....: __________________________________________________________ User Area .......: __________________________________________________________ Note Codes ......: ASCX12 CONTRL Enter PF1=Help 5 - 30 Int Grp Trn Seg Elem PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del Last Update Date: Last Update Time: Last Update User: 00/00/00 00:00:00 SCI PF6=Next Msg IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 The Administration Subsystem Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Accesses the Message Directory (EDIM212). PF6=Next Msg Displays the next error message. PF9=Add Adds a user error message. After typing the appropriate information for a new record, press PF9 to add the data to the system. Note: Sterling Gentran error messages cannot be added. PF10=Updt Updates the error message. To update an error message, type the new information over the existing message data and press PF10. PF11=Del Deletes the error message. To delete an error message, display the message you want to delete, and press PF11. The system prompts you to confirm (press PF11 again) or cancel (press PF12). Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Message Number (required) The 5-position number to identify the error message. Record Type (required) A 1-position alphabetic field containing the record type to identify the owner of the error message. Valid values are: G U = = Sterling Gentran User Language Code (required) A 3-position alphabetic field to identify the language that was used to enter ‘Text,’ based on EDIFACT #3453 Language Code (ISO639-1988). Currently, EN (English) is the only value available. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 31 The Administration Subsystem Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 Error Type Displays the error type to identify the Sterling Gentran process, subsystem, or Add-on product that uses this error message. This field cannot be modified for Sterling Gentran messages. Valid values are: D E G M P S V = = = = = = = Databank Editor General Mapping Sterling Gentran:Plus Sterling Gentran:Structure Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Return Code 1 A 2-position numeric value to be passed to the operating system when this error occurs to control processing. Used in conjunction with Direction = I or blank (inbound or not used). Note: A Return Code value greater than 15 is treated as a fatal error. Direction Displays the direction to identify the process direction for which the error message is valid. This field cannot be modified for Sterling Gentran messages. Valid values are: B I O space = = = = message is used in both inbound and outbound processes message is used in inbound processes only message is used in outbound processes only message is not used in either inbound or outbound process Return Code 2 A 2-position numeric value to be passed to the operating system when this error occurs during the outbound process to control processing. Used in conjunction with Direction = O (outbound). Note: A Return Code value greater than 15 is treated as a fatal error. Severity Used to help identify the level of severity, such as critical errors or warnings to aid in return code setting. Valid values are: I W E S F T Z 5 - 32 = = = = = = = Informational message Warning only Error Severe error Fatal error Trace (program) Initialize (file) IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 The Administration Subsystem Print Flag A 1-position field that enables you to indicate whether the error message is printed on the error report. Valid values are: Y = N = Yes, print this message on report if error occurs. This is the default value. Do not print this message except when using detail reporting. Print User Area A 1-position field that enables you to indicate whether the User Area is printed on the error report along with the error message. Valid values are Y = N = Yes, print user area after error message text. This is the default value. Do not print user area on error reports Rejection – In A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this error is encountered inbound. Valid values are: A P D space = = = = Always reject for all partners Read the partner profile to determine rejection read global partner record to determine rejection Do not reject on the error message Rejection – Out A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this error is encountered outbound. Valid values are: A P D space = = = = Always reject for all partners Read the partner profile to determine rejection read global partner record to determine rejection Do not reject on the error message Text Part 1 Contains information for the error – first 58 characters Text Part 2 Contains information for the error – second 58 characters User Area A 58-position field to allow the user to store additional information. This field could be used to provide instructions to respond to the error message. This field is printed on the error report if Print User Area = ‘Y.’ Note Codes – ASCX12 (protected) A 3-byte numeric values used during acknowledgment generation for reporting compliance errors. Interchange, Group, Transaction, Segment, and Element note codes are displayed. These values are used in the 997 acknowledgment that can be optionally generated in the inbound process for ANSI transactions. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 33 The Administration Subsystem Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213 Note Codes – CONTRL (protected) A 3-byte numeric values used during acknowledgment generation for reporting compliance errors. Interchange, Group, Transaction, Segment, and Element note codes are displayed. These values are used in the CONTRL acknowledgment that can be optionally generated in the inbound process for EDIFACT messages. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Last Update Time (protected) Displays the time that this record was last updated. Last Update User (protected) Displays the initials for the user that last updated this record. 5 - 34 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214 The Administration Subsystem Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214 Purpose The Error Rejection Maintenance (EDIM214) screen displays only compliance messages that are available for error rejection. Messages on this screen display sequentially, starting with the first compliance message on file. You can limit the display to only display inbound or outbound messages. Parameters, for both inbound and outbound, are available on this screen to enable you to specify error rejection requirements. Note: To view a complete list of messages, access the Message Directory. How to Access Access the Error Rejection Maintenance screen in either of these two ways: • From the Message Maintenance Menu type 3 to select Error Rejection Maintenance and press Enter. • Type 4.2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Error Rejection Maintenance screen. Update EDIM214 4.2.3_____ A _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ERROR REJECTION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Direction..................: _ (I/O/B) Starting Message Number....: _____ Message Dir Rej Rej T E X T Number In Out 00012 B _ _ INPUT TRANSACTION FILE EMPTY - PROGRAM TERMINATED. 00020 O _ P FOUND INDICATED SEGMENT ID. EXPECTING TRANSMISSION H 00021 B _ _ DATA ELEMENT SEPARATOR MISSING. TRANSMISSION OR EL 00022 B _ _ SEGMENT TERMINATOR MISSING. TRANSMISSION OR SEGMENT 00023 B _ _ ICS SUBMIT DATE ERROR. 00024 B _ _ ICS SUBMIT TIME ERROR. 00025 B _ _ ICS INTERCHANGE CONTROL NUMBER NOT NUMERIC. 00026 B _ _ ICS CONTROL STANDARDS IDENTIFIER NOT IN ACCEPTABLE C 00032 B _ _ MONTH GREATER THAN 12 OR LESS THAN 1 IN DATE INPUT. 00033 B P P DATE FIELD NOT NUMERIC. 00034 B _ _ DAY GREATER THAN 31 OR LESS THAN 1 IN DATE INPUT. 00035 B _ _ MONTH INDICATED DOES NOT HAVE 31 DAYS. TO UPDATE, TYPE "U" BESIDE THE MESSAGE # Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 35 The Administration Subsystem Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214 Screen Actions Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... Change error rejection flags for error message Update Do this ... Type U in the A field next to the error message for which you want to change, change the error rejection flags, and then press Enter. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Direction A 1-position alphabetic field to restrict the error message displayed on screen. Valid values are: B I O = = = message is used in both inbound and outbound processes message is used in inbound processes only message is used in outbound processes only Starting Message Number A 5-position numeric field that specifies the starting point for viewing error messages. Message Number (protected) Displays the error message number. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to update rejection fields on the Error Message file. After changes are entered, type U next to the error number, and press Enter to apply the changes. 5 - 36 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214 The Administration Subsystem Dir (protected) Displays the direction to identify the process direction for which the error message is valid. Valid values are: B I O space = = = = message is used in both inbound and outbound processes message is used in inbound processes only message is used in outbound processes only message is not used in either inbound or outbound process Rej In A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this error is encountered inbound. Valid values are: A D P space = = = = always reject for all partners read global partner record to determine rejection read specific partner record to determine rejection do not reject on the error message Rej Out A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this error is encountered outbound. Valid values are: A D P space = = = = always reject for all partners read global partner record to determine rejection read specific partner record to determine rejection do not reject on the error message Note: A value of spaces will be changed to either D or P when an error rejection record is entered on the Error Rejection screen. The D value results when error rejection is added to the default Partner ID, while error rejection on a Partner ID will produce a P value. See the topic “Error Rejection Screen” in Chapter 2, “The Partner Subsystem,” for more information. Text (protected) Displays information about the error – first 58 characters only. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 37 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Directory EDIM230 Configuration Directory EDIM230 Purpose The Configuration Directory (EDIM230) lists the records available in the Configuration file. How to Access Access the Configuration Directory screen in either of these two ways: • From the Administrative Main Menu, type 3 to select Configuration Directory and press Enter. • Type 4.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Directory screen. Select EDIM230 4.3_______ CONFIGURATION DIRECTORY A Record Type Description _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ T 0 1 2 Clear Key Processing Options On-Line Processing Options Additional On-Line Processing Options Databank Processing Options TO SELECT, TYPE AN "S" BESIDE CONFIG RECORD TYPE Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd 5 - 38 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 PF5=Id Maint IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Directory EDIM230 The Administration Subsystem Screen Actions Associated with this screen action ... To perform this action ... View the Configuration Maintenance screen for a config record selected on the Configuration Directory screen Select Do this ... To select a Configuration record to view or maintain, type S next to the Configuration record you want to view on the Configuration Directory screen, and then press PF5. Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=ID Maint Pass control to the Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen with key information for the item selected by Action Code. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. A (Action Code) A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a config record. Type S next to the selected config record, then press the PF5 key to display the Configuration Maintenance screen. Record Type (protected) A 10-position alphabetic field that displays the record type for the configuration file. Description (protected) A 61-position alphabetic field that displays information about the configuration record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 39 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Part 1 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the first panel in a series of three panels for the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update configuration options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A (Action Code) field to select the appropriate configuration record and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen (panel 1 of 3). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE On-Line Options - Record Type 0 Panel 1 of 3 Program Image..................: Security Password Min Length...: Security Password Suppress.....: Security Exit Program..........: User Jump Code Table...........: Jump Code Display Switch.......: Save Last Key Used.............: Disable Synchpoint.(VSE).......: Year 2000 Value................: Language Code..................: Log Max Search.................: EDI_______ 04________ Y_________ __________ EDIJUMP___ 1_________ 0_________ 0_________ 50________ EN________ 3000______ Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Time: 00:00:00 PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Any 3 Digits/Characters Valid Values - 01 To 08 Y=Yes N=No 1=Numeric 0=Saved 0=No DEFAULT = 50 Default = EN 1 - 4 digits 2=Alphabetic 1=Not Saved 1=Yes User: SCI PF5=More Opts PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir 5 - 40 Displays the Configuration Directory screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem PF5=More Opts Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 2. PF6=Nxt Cnfg Displays the next record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update record the configuration Record that currently exists, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Program Image A 3-byte alphanumeric field that contains the program image identification used to implement the multiple program image feature of Sterling Gentran:Basic. This feature enables you to specify alternate three characters that identify online programs to Sterling Gentran. Use this feature if your installation requirement is for online programs to begin with specific characters, or if you need to install two unique versions of the online system (e.g., one test and one production) in the CICS region. Security Password Min Length A 2-byte numeric field that identifies the minimum length to which a password to the Sterling Gentran:Basic system can be set. The default value is 04. Security Password Suppress A 1-byte alphanumeric flag that indicates whether to hide the user password on the Security Maintenance (EDIM201) screen for users with security authorization of Level 1. Valid values are: Y = Suppress the display of the password on the screen N = Do not suppress the display of the password on the screen Security Exit Program An 8-byte alphanumeric field that identifies a user-written exit program that bypasses the Sterling Gentran:Basic signon screen. This exit should provide the signon ID from an external security system. For more information about how to use Security Exit programs, see “Using the User Security Facility” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques,” in this guide. Note: A sample program (EDIXSEC) is present in the UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product. User Jump Code Table An 8-byte alphanumeric field that identifies a user-defined jump codes table. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 41 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Jump Code Display Switch A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to display either the numeric or alphabetic values for the jump codes in the upper left corner of most Sterling Gentran screens. Valid values are the following: space = 1 = 2 = Display numeric jump codes Display numeric jump codes Display alphabetic jump codes Save Last Key Used A 1-byte alphanumeric flag that enables you to indicate if ‘key’ information is to be saved when navigating through the online system. Valid values are: 0 = 1 = Saves key information. When jumping out and back to a screen you can return to the previously displayed record. This is the default value. Does not save key information. Screens do not return to the previously displayed record. Disable Synchpoint (VSE only) A 1-byte flag that enables you to activate the Synchpoint Rollback feature of CICS. Valid values are: 1 0 = = Synchpoint Rollback is active Synchpoint Rollback is not active Year 2000 Value A 2-byte numeric field used to specify the cut-off year to be used when converting 2-digit year (YY) values into 4-digit values (YYYY). Any 2-digit year that is less than or equal to this value is assigned YY=20. Otherwise, the conversion date is set to YY=19. Example With a Year 2000 value of 50, the input date of 07/01/99 is converted to 07/01/1999 because 99 is greater than 50. An input date of 07/01/05 is converted to 07/01/2005 because 5 is less than 50. Language Code A 2-byte alphabetic field that contains the language code to indicate the language used in user text fields.This field contains values based on the EDIFACT element #3453 Language Code from ISO639-1988. Currently, the value EN (English) is the only language supported. Log Max Search A 1 – 4 position numeric field that limits the number of records that will be read to satisfy the search criteria for online displays. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 42 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Part 2 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the second panel in a series of three panels for the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update configuration options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 from Configuration Maintenance screen – 1. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen (panel 2 of 3). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX On-Line Options - RECORD TYPE 0 PANEL 2 OF 3 Interchange Version............: Group Version..................: Transaction Version............: Trading Profile Mode...........: Multiple Envelope Enabled......: Concurrency Enabled............: CICS Applid for Concurrency....: Message Center Enabled.........: Message Center Cutoff Limit....: N_________ N_________ N_________ P_________ N_________ N_________ __________ N_________ 001000____ N=No N=No N=No P=PART/QUAL N=No N=No Time: 00:00:00 User: SCI Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help PF3=Exit PF4=Prev PF10=Updt N=No 6 digits 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Y=Yes Y=Yes Y=Yes R=RELATION Y=Yes Y=Yes M=MIX Y=Yes PF5=More Opts PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 1. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 43 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 PF5=More OptionsDisplays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 3. PF6=Nxt Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Interchange Version (Outbound Only) A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate whether to use version to read partner records. Version is part of the partner key for interchange records. Valid values are: N = Y = Use spaces in place of version for reading partner interchange records. Use version for reading interchange records. Group Version A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether to use the Version as part of the partner key for group records. Valid Values are: N = Y = Do not use the Version as part of key for reading partner group records. Use the Version as part of key for reading partner group records. Note: A ‘Y’ activates the following three global parameters: GROUP VERSION GROUP VERSION ERROR REJECTION GROUP VERSION SPLIT See Appendix A in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for additional details on global parameters. Transaction Version A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether to use the Version as part of the partner key for transaction records. Valid Values are: 5 - 44 N = Y = Do not use the Version as part of key for reading partner transaction records. Use the Version as part of key for reading partner transaction records. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Note: A ‘Y’ activates the following three global parameters: TRANSACTION VERSION TRANSACTION VERSION ERROR REJECTION TRANSACTION VERSION SPLIT See Appendix A of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for additional details on global parameters. Trading Profile Mode A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to choose how trading partner key information is stored on partner profile and the databanks. Valid values are: P R M = = = Use Partner/Qualifier mode Use Relationship mode Use Partner/Qualifier mode for the partner and use Relationship mode for databanking Multiple Envelope Enabled A 1-byte field that activates the Multiple Envelope feature. This feature allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values are: N Y = = Do not use the Multiple Envelope feature. Use the Multiple Envelope feature. See the topic “Multiple Envelopes” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques” for more information. Concurrency Enabled A 1-byte alphabetic field that activates the Concurrency feature. This feature allows multiple jobs to update the partner control and databank files at the same time and improve processing throughput. Valid values are: N Y = = Do not use the Concurrency feature. Use the Concurrency feature. CICS Applid For Concurrency If the Concurrency feature is enabled, this 8-byte alphabetic field will contain the Applid of the CICS region that will own and update the partner control files and the databank files. Message Center Enabled A 1-byte alphabetic field that activates the Message Center feature. This feature is used to monitor the results of batch jobs from an online environment. Valid values are: N Y = = Do not use the Message Center feature. Use the Message Center feature. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 45 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 See the topic “Message Center” in Chapter 8, “Implementing Sterling Gentran:Basic” of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for more information. Message Center Cutoff Limit If the Message Center feature is enabled, this 6-byte numeric field will contain the large report cutoff limit. This cutoff limit is used to ensure that large reports do not overwhelm the capacity of the Message Center files. The default value is 001000. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 46 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Part 3 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the third panel in a series of three panels for the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update configuration options to meet your requirements. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for more information. How to Access Access this screen from the Configuration Maintenance screen – 2 by pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen (panel 3 of 3). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE ON-LINE OPTIONS - RECORD TYPE 0 PANEL 3 OF 3 Partner Help Enabled...........: Standards Help Enabled.........: Databank Help Enabled..........: Security Help Enabled..........: Mapping Help Enabled...........: Error Message Help Enabled.....: Global Parameter Help Enabled..: Config Help Enabled............: Gentran:Plus Help Enabled......: Gentran:Control Help Enabled...: Gentran:Realtime Help Enabled..: Gentran:Viewpoint Help Enabled.: 1_________ 0_________ 0_________ 1_________ 0_________ 1_________ 1_________ 1_________ 0_________ 0_________ 0_________ 0_________ Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Time: 00:00:00 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev PF10=Updt 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not 0=Not XXX Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 06/01/2011 12:00:00 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active 1=Active User: SCI PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev Displays the previous Configuration Maintenance screen – 2. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 47 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 PF6=Nxt Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Partner Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Partner subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Standards Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for Standards subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Databank Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for Databank subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Security Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Security subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Mapping Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Mapping subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active Error Message Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Error Message subsystem. Valid values are: 0 = Not Active 1 = Active 5 - 48 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Global Parameter subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Config Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Configuration subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Gentran:Plus Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Sterling Gentran:Plus subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Gentran:Control Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Sterling Gentran:Control subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Gentran:Realtime Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Gentran:Viewpoint Help Enabled A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level Help for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint subsystem. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Not Active Active Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 49 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Part 1 / Additional Online Options – Record Type 1 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the first of two panels for the online report processing options, type 1. These configuration records enable you to set and update additional online options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to Additional Online Options and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 1 screen (panel 1 of 2). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Additional Online Options - Record Type 1 Panel 1 of 2 User ID for Background Tasks...: Batch Submit Exit..............: Change Audit: Partner.........: Change Audit: Standards.......: Change Audit: Application.....: Change Audit: Transaction.....: Change Audit: Code Tables.....: Change Audit: Security........: Change Audit: Error Message...: Change Audit: Configuration...: Change Audit: Global Parameter: Change Audit: Separator.......: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help __________ __________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Y_________ Time: 00:00:00 PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled Y=Enabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled N=Disabled User: SCI F5=More Opts PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 5 - 50 PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF5=More Opts Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen–2. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. User ID for Background Tasks An 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background tasks in Sterling Gentran:Basic. The background task, EDIP (used for submitting batch reports), is not affiliated with a terminal and, therefore, does not have a signon ID. This field allows you to specify a security ID to use with this transactions. Valid values are any valid User ID in your system. For more information about how to use a User ID for Background Tasks, see “Configuring JCL Submission and User Security” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques,” in this guide. Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and any special resources that may be needed for the online batch initiator process. Batch Submit Exit An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The online batch initiator (EDIBOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader. For more information about how to use a Batch Submit Exit, see “Configuring JCL Submission and User Security” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques,” in this guide. Note: A sample program (EDIBXIT) is present in the UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product. Change Audit: Partner Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Partner subsystem. Change Audit: Standards Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Standards subsystem. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 51 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Change Audit: Application Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Application subsystem. Change Audit: Transaction Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Transaction subsystem. Change Audit: Code Tables Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Code Tables subsystem. Change Audit: Security Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Security subsystem. Change Audit: Error Message Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Error Message subsystem. Change Audit: Configuration Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Configuration subsystem. Change Audit: Global Parameter Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Global Parameter subsystem. Change Audit: Separator Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Separator subsystem. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 52 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Part 2 / Additional Online Options – Record Type 1 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the second of two panels for the additional online options, type 1. How to Access Access this screen by pressing PF5 from Configuration Maintenance screen - 1. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 1 screen (panel 2 of 2). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Additional Online Options - Record Type 1 Panel 2 of 2 Change Audit: Change Audit: Change Audit: Plus:Remote.....: Plus:Profile....: Plus:Network....: Change Audit: Change Audit: RTE/CTL :OCF....: Realtime:Request: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help For future use For future use For future use Y_________ Y_________ Time: 00:00:00 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev PF10=Updt Y=Enabled Y=Enabled N=Disabled N=Disabled User: SCI PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 1. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data and press PF10. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 53 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Change Audit: Plus:Remote For future use. Change Audit: Plus:Profile For future use. Change Audit: Plus:Network For future use. Change Audit: RTE/CTL:OCF Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Online Control file. Note: If Sterling Gentran:Realtime is not installed, input to this field is prohibited and CA Not Installed will display. Change Audit: Realtime:Request Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Request file. Note: If Sterling Gentran:Realtime is not installed, input to this field is prohibited and CA Not Installed will display. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 54 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Databank Options – Record Type 2 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the databank options, type 2 configuration record enables you to set and update databank options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to Data Processing Options and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 2 screen (panel 1 of 1). EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE Databank Options - Record Type 2 0360______ EDID______ F_________ F_________ F_________ F_________ __________ __________ F=Full F=Full F=Full F=Full Enable Ack Overdue.............: __________ Y=Yes Enter PF1=Help 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Panel 1 of 1 Databank Manager Scan Interval.: Databank Manager Transaction ID: Outbound Application Usage.....: Outbound EDI Usage.............: Inbound EDI Usage..............: Inbound Application Usage......: Databank Error User Exit PGM...: Databank Error User Exit Data..: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 XXX Time: 00:00:00 D=Directory D=Directory D=Directory D=Directory N=None N=None N=None N=None N=No User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data and press PF10. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 55 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Databank Manager Scan Interval A 4-byte numeric field that identifies the frequency with which the Databank Manager activates and scans for functions to complete. The default value is 0360. Databank Manager Transaction ID A 4-byte alphanumeric field that identifies the Transaction ID used to start the Databank Manager programs. Keep this name consistent with any changes made to the Sterling Gentran:Basic system image. The default value is EDID. Outbound Application Usage A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the outbound Application databank is to be used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are: F D N = = = Full (directory and message store) Directory only None Outbound EDI Usage A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the outbound EDI databank is to be used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are: F = Full (directory and message store) D = Directory only N = None Inbound EDI Usage A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the inbound EDI databank is to be used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are: F D N = = = Full (directory and message store) Directory only None Inbound Application Usage A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the inbound Application databank is to be used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are: F D N = = = Full (directory and message store) Directory only None Databank Error User Exit Pgm An 8-byte alphanumeric field that contains the name of a user-written CICS program to be called when a serious databank error occurs. 5 - 56 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Databank Error User Exit Data A 20-byte alphanumeric field that contains a text string that is passed to the user exit program. Enable Ack Overdue A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether the Acknowledgment Overdue file will be created when EDID510 (Acknowledgment Reconciliation) or EDID515 (Realtime Acknowledgment Reconciliation) process in Monitor mode. The default is N. Valid values are: Y N = = Create acknowledgment overdue file Do not create acknowledgment overdue file Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 57 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Sterling Gentran:Plus Options – Record Type 3 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Plus, type 3 configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Plus options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 3 screen. EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE GENTRAN:Plus Options Record Type 3 CONNECT Product Installed......: CONNECT Version Level..........: CONNECT Release Level..........: CONNECT Maintenance Level......: Friendly Mailbox Name..........: CONNECT System Image...........: Communication Directory Order..: User ID Security Flag..........: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Panel 1 of 1 CE________ 00________ 00________ 00________ MAILBOX4__ CM________ L_________ U_________ Time: 00:00:00 CE=Connect:Enterprise R=Remote ID L=List Name N=None G=GENTRAN ID U=User ID User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 5 - 58 PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 PF10=Updt The Administration Subsystem To update the configuration record, type the changed information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. CONNECT Product Installed A 2-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate which CONNECT communication product has been installed. Valid values are: CE = IBM® Sterling Connect:Enterprise® is installed CONNECT Version Level A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the version level of the CONNECT communication product that has been installed. CONNECT Release Level A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the release level of the CONNECT communication product that has been installed. CONNECT Maintenance Level A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the maintenance level of the CONNECT communication product that has been installed. Friendly Mailbox Name An 8-byte alphanumeric field that enables you to indicate the symbolic name to be used when interfacing with the CONNECT communication product. CONNECT System Image (optional) A 2-byte alphanumeric field that enables you to indicate the system image to be used when interfacing with the CONNECT communication product. The default value is CM. Communication Directory Order (optional) A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate the default sequence to be used for the initial display of the Communication Directory (EDIM404). Valid values are: R L = = Displays screen in remote ID sequence Displays screen in list name sequence User ID Security Flag (optional) A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate the type of security to be used when interfacing with the CONNECT communication product. Valid values are: N G = = No security. This is the default value. The Sterling Gentran User ID and password that were entered on the Logon (EDIM000) screen are used. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 59 The Administration Subsystem U = Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The first time a Sterling Gentran:Plus screen is invoked, the Communications Security (EDIM40V) screen will display to request a user specified User ID and password. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 60 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options – Record Type 4 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, type 4 configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 4 screen. EDIM231 CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE GENTRAN:Viewpoint Options - Record Type 4 Exception Mgmt Installed.............: Exception Mgmt Version No............: Exception Mgmt Partner Def...........: Tracking Mgmt Installed..............: Tracking Mgmt Version No.............: Tracking Mgmt Partner Def............: Tracking Mgmt Find Lmt...............: Tracking Mgmt Search Lmt.............: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Panel 1 of 1 Y_________ 6.6_______ N_________ N_________ __________ N_________ 000100____ 010000____ Time: 00:00:00 Y=Installed N=Not Installed Y=Yes N=No Y=Installed N=Not Installed Y=Yes N=No User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data and press PF10. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 61 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Exception Mgmt Installed A 1-byte flag indicating if Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is active. Valid values are: Y N = = Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is active. Feature is not active. Exception Mgmt Version No. A 5 digit number that indicates the Exception Management version number in the format n.nnn (e.g., 6.6). Exception Mgmt Partner Def A 1-byte flag indicating the default value for partner values. This option can be used to control the initial amount of capture information for Exception Management, by partner, without updating the field in the partner profiles. Valid values are: Y = N = The default partner value is YES. Blank partner values indicate that Exception Management IS enabled for the partner. The default partner value is NO. Blank partner values indicate that Exception Management IS NOT enabled for the partner. Tracking Mgmt Installed A 1-byte flag indicating whether or not the Viewpoint Tracking Management option has been implemented with Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are: Y N = = Tracking Management is active. Tracking Management is not available. Tracking Mgmt Version No. A 5-digit number that indicates the Tracking Management version number in the format n.nnn (e.g., 6.6). Tracking Mgmt Partner Def A 1-byte flag indicating the default value for partner values. This option can be used to control the initial amount of capture information for Tracking Management, by partner, without updating the field in the partner profiles. Valid values are: 5 - 62 Y = N = The default partner value is YES. Blank partner values indicate that Tracking Management IS enabled for the partner. The default partner value is NO. Blank partner values indicate that Tracking Management IS NOT enabled for the partner. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Tracking Mgmt Find Lmt A 1 – 6 position number to limit the number of items, that satisfy the search criteria, to be displayed by the Query Request Search function. This field is only required by the Tracking Management feature. Tracking Mgmt Search Lmt A 1 – 6 position number to specify the maximum number of items the search function evaluates, for items matching the search criteria. This field is only required by the Tracking Management feature. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 63 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Sterling Gentran:Structure Options – Record Type 7 Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Structure, type 7 configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Structure options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 7 screen. EDIM231 CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE GENTRAN:Structure Options - Record Type 7 XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Panel 1 of 1 Structure System Identifier....: __________ __________ ____ Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Time: 00:00:00 User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Next Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. 5 - 64 PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record on the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Structure System Identifier A 24-position alphabetic field containing the product and release information. Also, this field information will display on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 65 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Sterling Gentran:Realtime Options – Record Type B Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime, type B configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Realtime options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field corresponding to the configuration record, Sterling Gentran:Realtime Processing Options, and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type B screen. EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Gentran:Realtime Options - Record Type B Panel 1 of 1 Realtime System Identifier.....: GENTRAN:RE ALTIME_6.6 Syncpoint Rollback Switch......: User ID for Background tasks...: Batch Submit Exit..............: Asynchronous Reporting.........: 0_________ __________ __________ 0_________ Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Time: 00:00:00 0=Enable 1=Disable 0=Enable 1=Disable User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir 5 - 66 Displays the Configuration Directory screen. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Realtime System Identifier A 30-position alphabetic field identifying the version of Sterling Gentran:Realtime installed on the system. Also, the information in this field displays on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen. Syncpoint Rollback Switch A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Syncpoint Rollback command in the Sterling Gentran:Realtime gateways. When a Realtime process encounters an error, the gateway that started the process will issue a Syncpoint Rollback command that will back out all recoverable resources. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Enable the Rollback operation. This is the default value. Disable the Rollback operation. User ID for Background tasks An 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background tasks in Sterling Gentran:Realtime. Some primary background tasks, such as EDII (online scanner initiator) and EDIB (online batch initiator) are not affiliated with a terminal and, therefore, do not have a signon ID. This field allows you to specify a security ID to use with these types of tasks. Valid values include any valid User ID in your system. Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and any special resources that may be needed for the online batch initiator process. Batch Submit Exit An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The online batch initiator (EDIEOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling Gentran:Realtime system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader. Note: A sample program (EDISUBXT) is present in the UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 67 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Asynchronous Reporting A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Asynchronous Reporting subsystem in Sterling Gentran:Realtime. When you enable this switch, the Asynchronous Reporting subsystem uses background tasks (EDIQ transaction) to perform the actual writes to the reporting subsystem files (EDIRRC and EDIRRD). All programs that create reports will use the background task to perform the updates. When you disable the switch, the actual writes are performed in the program which creates the report. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Enable asynchronous reporting Disable asynchronous reporting. This is the default value. Note: Using the asynchronous process will improve the performance of the translation and utility programs by removing the waits for I/O that are performed when the programs are writing the reports. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. 5 - 68 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Sterling Gentran:Control Options – Record Type E Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Control, type E configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Control options to meet your requirements. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field beside the configuration record, Sterling Gentran:Control Processing Option, and pressing PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type E screen. EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Gentran:Control Options - Record Type E Panel 1 of 1 Control System Identifier......: Syncpoint Rollback Switch......: User ID for Background tasks...: Batch Submit Exit..............: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help GENTRAN:CO NTROL_6.6_ __________ __________ __________ __________ 0=Enable Time: 00:00:00 1=Disable User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir Displays the Configuration Directory screen. PF6=Next Cnfg Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 69 The Administration Subsystem PF10=Updt Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Control System Identifier A 20-position alphabetic field identifying the version of Sterling Gentran:Control installed on the system. The information in this field will display on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen. Syncpoint Rollback Switch A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Syncpoint Rollback command in the Sterling Gentran:Control gateways. When a Control process encounters an error, the gateway that started the process will issue a Syncpoint Rollback command that will back out all recoverable resources. Valid values are: 0 1 = = Enable the Rollback operation. This is the default value. Disable the Rollback operation. User ID for Background tasks A 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background tasks in Sterling Gentran:Control. Some primary background tasks in Control, such as EDII (online scanner initiator) and EDIB (online batch initiator) are not affiliated with a terminal and, therefore, do not have a signon ID. This field allows you to specify a security ID to use with these types of tasks. Valid values include any valid User ID in your system. Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and any special resources that may be needed for the online batch initiator process. Batch Submit Exit An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The online batch initiator (EDIEOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling Gentran:Control system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader. Note: A sample program (EDISUBXT) is present in the UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. 5 - 70 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 71 The Administration Subsystem Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 Clear Options – Record Type T Purpose The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the clear key options, type T configuration record enables you to apply a message, as you deem appropriate, that is specific to the Clear=Exit feature. How to Access Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by typing S in the A field beside the configuration record, Clear Key Processing Options, and press PF5. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type T screen. EDIM231 __________ CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 GENTRAN:Clear Key Options Record Type T Panel 1 of 1 Clear Message..................: Last Update Date: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help PAUSE_=_EX IT_PC_KYBD Time: 00:00:00 User: SCI PF3=Exit PF4=Dir PF10=Updt PF6=Nxt Cnfg Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Dir 5 - 72 Displays the Configuration Directory. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231 The Administration Subsystem PF6=Next Cnfg Display next sequential record on the Configuration file. PF10=Updt To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Clear Message A 20-position alphabetic message to be displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen if Clear=Exit feature is enabled. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 73 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 1 (EDIM220/EDIM22A) screens are used to display and update general processing and databank options global parameter records. If you access these screens from the Administrative Main Menu (EDIM210) or by using the jump code, the inbound global parameter record will display. How to Access 1. 2. Access the Global Parameter Maint-1 screens in either of these two ways: • From the Administrative Main Menu, type 4 to select Global Parameter Maintenance and press Enter. • Type 4.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Perform one of the following: To display global parameters for inbound, type I in the Inbound/Outbound field and press Enter. OR To display global parameters for outbound, Type O in the Inbound/Outbound field and press Enter. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 1 screens for both inbound and outbound data. Inbound EDIM220 4.4_______ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-1 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** General Processing Options: ICS Tables.................: Code Check.................: Error Report...............: Output Message.............: N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y = = = = ICS Tables On N = ICS Tables Off Code Check On N = Code Check Off Always Generate Error Report Message On N = Message Off N F D D Y F D D = = = = Use Partner For Databank Level Full D = Directory Only N = None Directory N = None Directory N = None Databank Options: Partner Databank...........: EDI Databank Interchange...: EDI Databank Group.........: EDI Databank Transaction...: Last Update Date..: 02/09/00 Enter PF1=Help 5 - 74 Time..: 15:12:41 PF3=Exit PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A The Administration Subsystem Outbound EDIM22A 4.4_______ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-1 O XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** OUTBOUND *** General Processing Options: ICS Tables.................: N Code Check.................: Y Error Report...............: Y Y = ICS Tables On N = ICS Tables Off Y = Code Check On N = Code Check Off Y = Always Generate Error Report Databank Options: Partner Databank...........: EDI Databank Interchange...: EDI Databank Group.........: EDI Databank Transaction...: Last Update Date..: 05/11/00 Enter PF1=Help N F D D Y F D D = = = = Use Partner For Databank Level Full D = Directory Only N = None Directory N = None Directory N = None Time..: 14:12:07 PF3=Exit PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF5=Next GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are: I O = = Inbound Outbound IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 75 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A General Processing Options ICS Tables A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the format of ICS/ICE envelopes to be accepted by the Editors. The global parameter equivalents are ICS TABLES ON / ICS TABLES OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Only accept the new format. This is the default value. Accept both formats Code Check A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Editors should perform code verification. The global parameter equivalents are CODE CHECK ON / CODE CHECK OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Perform code validation. This is the default value. Do not validate codes Error Report A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an error report if no errors are detected. The global parameter equivalents is ERROR REPORT ALWAYS. Valid values are: Y = Always generate an error report N = Only generate a report if an error is detected. This is the default value. Output Message (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to write error messages to the output file. The global parameter equivalents are OUTPUT MESSAGE ON / OUTPUT MESSAGE OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Write error messages to the output file. This is the default value. Do not write error messages to the output file. Databank Options Partner Databank A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the partner profile to determine databank level. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL. Valid values are: Y N = = Use the partner profile to determine the databank level. Do not use the partner profile to determine the databank level. This is the default value. Each of the following three databank levels (interchange, group, and transaction) are independently controlled by the appropriate global parameter. If you activate any of the following three global parameter settings, databanking can be performed for all partners at the indicated level, regardless of the PARTNER DATABANK parameter or the settings for any individual partner. However, you can perform databanking with any combination of levels. EDI Databank Interchange A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be used for Interchange processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/ OUTBOUND EDI INTERCHANGE FULL, INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI 5 - 76 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A The Administration Subsystem INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI INTERCHANGE NONE. Valid values are: F = D N = = For each Interchange, directory and message store entries are generated. For each Interchange, directory entries are generated. Databank feature is not used at Interchange level. This is the default value. EDI Databank Group A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be used for Group processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/ OUTBOUND EDI GROUP DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI GROUP NONE. Valid values are: D N = = For each Group, directory entries are generated. Databank feature is not used at Group level.This is the default value. EDI Databank Transaction A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be used for Transaction processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/ OUTBOUND EDI TRANSACTION DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI TRANSACTION NONE. Valid values are: D N = = For each transaction, directory entries are generated. Databank feature is not used at the transaction level. This is the default value. Last Update Date (protected) Displays the date that this record was last updated. Time (protected) Displays the time that this record was last updated. User (protected) Displays the initials for the user that last updated this record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 77 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 2 (EDIM221/EDIM22B) screens are used to display and update the partner processing options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound data. How to Access Access the Global Parameter Maint-2 screens by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-1 screen. Note: No jump codes are associated with these screens. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 2 screens for both inbound and outbound data. Inbound EDIM221 __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-2 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** Partner Processing Options: Verify Interchange.........: Verify Group...............: Verify Transaction.........: Interchange Version........: N N N _ Group Version..............: _ Partner Sequence Error.....: N BG Partner.................: Y Last Update Date..: 07/14/03 Enter PF1=Help 5 - 78 Y Y Y A F A F C N Y = = = = = = = = = = Verify Interchange Partner ID Verify Group ID Verify Transaction ID Always Interchange Interchange Blank = None Always Group Group Blank = None Chronological, I = Incremental None Verify Comm ID and Password Time..: 14:53:44 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B The Administration Subsystem Outbound EDIM22B __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-2 O XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** OUTBOUND *** Partner Processing Options: Verify Interchange.........: Verify Group...............: Verify Transaction.........: Interchange Version........: N N N _ Group Version..............: _ Last Update Date..: 07/14/03 Enter PF1=Help Y Y Y A F A F = = = = = = = Verify Interchange Partner ID Verify Group ID Verify Transaction ID Always Interchange Interchange Blank = None Always Group Group Blank = None Time..: 14:55:04 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-1 screen. PF5=Next GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen for inbound or the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen for outbound. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound (protected) This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are: I O = = Inbound Outbound IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 79 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B Partner Processing Options Verify Interchange A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Interchange IDs against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER INTERCHANGE and VERIFY PARTNER INTERCHANGE OFF. Valid values are: Y = N = Validate the Interchange Sender (inbound) and Receiver (outbound) IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence. A partner must exist in the partner profile (Control record). Do not verify the partner at Interchange level. This is the default value. Verify Group A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Group ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER GROUP and VERIFY PARTNER GROUP OFF. Valid values are: Y = N = Validate the Group Sender (inbound) and Receiver (outbound) IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence. A Group information record for this partner must exist in the partner profile for this Functional Group ID. Do not verify the partner at Group level. This is the default value. Verify Transaction A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Transaction ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION and VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION OFF. Valid values are: Y = N = Validate the Transaction Sender (inbound) and Receiver (outbound) IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence. A transaction record for this partner must exist in the partner profile for this transaction set. Do not verify the partner at transaction level. This is the default value. Interchange Version A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether processing is to override the version sent on the control envelope and use the version defined in the partner profile instead. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS INTERCHANGE and PARTNER VERSION INTERCHANGE. Valid values are: A = F = space = 5 - 80 Always use the version on the partner control record for compliance checking. The Version Use field on the Partner Control record is to be used to determine the version to be used. If Version Use = A – always use the partner version. If Version Use = I – always use the input version. If Version Use = D – use the partner version only if the input version is not available on the standards table. Always use the version on the Interchange envelope.This is the default value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B The Administration Subsystem Group Version A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether processing is to override the version sent on the Group envelope and use the version defined in the partner profile instead. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP and PARTNER VERSION GROUP. Valid values are: A = F = space = Always use the version on the partner Group record for compliance checking. The Version Use field on the Partner Group record is to be used to determine the version to be used. If Version Use = A – always use the partner version. If Version Use = I – always use the input version. If Version Use = D – use the partner version only if the input version is not available on the standards table. Always use the version on the Group envelope.This is the default value. Partner Sequence Error (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to verify incoming control numbers against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – CHRONOLOGICAL, PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR-INCREMENTAL, and PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – OFF. Valid values are: C = I = N = The Inbound Editor checks the previous control number received against the current control number at the Interchange, Group, and transaction level. If the current control number is not greater than the previous control number received, an error message is generated. The current control number is stored on the partner record. The Inbound Editor checks the previous control number received against the current control number at the Interchange, Group, and transaction level. If the current control number is not exactly one (1) greater than the previous control number received, an error message is generated. The current control number is stored on the partner record. Do not perform control number verification. This is the default value. BG Partner (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate how the Inbound Editor is to control what the communication ID and password contains on BG segments surrounding acknowledgments. If the BG PASSWORD on the incoming document (BG02) does not match the BG-PASSWORD field on the partner control record then an error is generated. The global parameter equivalent is BG PARTNER YES. Valid values are: Y N = = Verify CommID and Password from BG against partner profile. Do not verify CommID and Password. This is the default value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 81 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B Last Update Date Displays the last date the record was updated. Time Displays the last time the record was updated. User Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record. 5 - 82 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222 Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 3 (EDIM222) screen is used to display and update partner lookup options on the global parameter records for inbound data only. How to Access Access the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Example The following example illustrates of the Global Parameter Maintenance 3 screen for inbound data only. EDIM222 __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-3 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** Partner Lookup Options (Inbound Only): Partner Xref...............: 0 ISA Processing Sequence....: 0 BG Processing Sequence.....: 0 GS Sender Lookup...........: 0 GS Receiver Lookup.........: 0 Last Update Date..: 02/09/00 Enter PF1=Help 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 = = = = = = = = = = Default 1 = No Xref 2 = Xref First Sender ID Only Sender ID/Author 2 = Author/Sender ID Sender ID Only Sender ID/COMMID 2 = COMMID/Sender ID Sender Qual Blank Sender Qual Interchg Receiver Qual Blank Receiver Qual Interchg Use Unresolved Intchg Qual For Receiver Time..: 15:12:41 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen. PF5=Next GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 83 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222 Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound (protected) This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. This field displays the value I for inbound. Partner Lookup Options Partner X-Ref (Inbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate how the Partner X-Ref file is to be processed by the Inbound Editor. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER XREF FIRST and NO PARTNER XREF. Valid values are: 0 = 1 = 2 = Read partner profile first. Most partners have been set up using their EDI IDs but some were set up using X-Ref file. This is the default value. Never use X-Ref file. All partners have been set up using their EDI IDs Read the X-Ref file first. Most or all partners are set up using X-Ref. ISA Processing Sequence (Inbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the order of partner lookup for ISA envelopes. The global parameter equivalents are ISA SENDER ID/AUTHORIZATION and ISA AUTHORIZATION/SENDER ID. Valid values are: 0 1 = = 2 = Use Sender ID only.This is the default value. All or a majority of trading partners that use the ISA Interchange are set up on the partner profile using Sender ID. If the authorization information qualifier contains a 01 then the authorization information is used as a second look-up should Sender ID not be found on the partner profile. All or a majority of trading partners that use the ISA Interchange and have an Authorization Info. Qualifier of 01 is set up on the partner profile using Authorization Information. BG Processing Sequence (Inbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the order of partner lookup for BG envelopes. The global parameter equivalents are: BG SENDER ID/COMMID BG COMMID/SENDER ID Valid values are: 0 1 5 - 84 = = Use the Sender ID only. This is the default value. All or a majority of trading partners that use the BG Interchange are set up on the partner profile using Sender ID. If Sender ID is not found then try COMMID. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222 2 = The Administration Subsystem All or a majority of trading partners that use the BG Interchange are set up on the partner profile using COMMID. If COMMID is not found then try the Sender ID. GS Sender Lookup (Inbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag to control what group Qualifier is contained in the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are: GS SENDER QUALIFIER SPACES GS SENDER QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE Valid values are: 0 = 1 = Use the Partner ID/Qualifier of spaces when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the Sender ID. Use the Interchange Qualifier for the group Partner ID/Qualifier when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the Sender ID. Note: If spaces are used, the interchange Qualifier is selected from the Qualifier associated with the partner name on the partner file, NOT the Qualifer contained on the EDI envelope. GS Receiver Lookup (Inbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag to control what the group Qualifier is to be for the GS Receiver Partner lookup. The global parameter equivalents are: GS RECEIVER QUALIFIER SPACES GS RECEIVER QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE Valid values are: 0 = 1 = 2 = Use the Partner ID/Qualifier of spaces when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the Receiver ID. Use the interchange Qualifier for the group Partner ID Qualifier when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the Receiver ID. Use the unresolved Interchange Qualifier for the Receiver ID lookup. The global parameter equivalent is GS RECEIVER QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE/UN. Note: If spaces are used, the interchange Qualifier is selected from the Qualifier associated with the partner name on the partner file, NOT the Qualifer contained on the EDI envelope. Last Update Date Displays the last date the record was updated. Time Displays the last time the record was updated. User Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 85 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 4 (EDIM223/EDIM22D) screens are is used to display and update rejection and data separation options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound data. How to Access Access the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen for inbound or the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen for outbound. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 4 screen for both inbound and outbound data. Inbound EDIM223 __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-4 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** Rejection Processing Options: Partner Error Rejection....: N Y = Use Partner Error Rejection Data Separation Options: Directed Output Files......: Y. Y = Use Partner Data Separation Split By Partner...........: Y Y = Use Sender ID For Data Separation Transaction Test/Prod......: N Y = Use Test/Prod For Trans Data Separation Receiver Processing Options: Verify Receiver Interchange: N Y = Verify Interchange Receiver ID Verify Receiver Group......: N Y = Verify Group Receiver ID Last Update Date..: 05/09/04 Enter PF1=Help 5 - 86 Time..: 15:12:41 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D The Administration Subsystem Outbound EDIM22D __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-4 O XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** OUTBOUND *** Rejection Processing Options: Partner Error Rejection....: N Y = Use Partner Error Rejection Data Separation Options: Directed Output Files......: N Last Update Date..: 07/14/03 Enter PF1=Help Y = Use Partner Data Separation Time..: 14:55:04 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen for inbound or the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen for outbound. PF5=Next GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound (protected) This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are: I O = = Inbound Outbound IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 87 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D Rejection Processing Options Partner Error Rejection A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Partner Error Rejection feature is to be utilized. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER ERROR CONTROL. Valid values are: Y N = = Use partner error rejection Error rejection is not active. This is the default value. Data Separation Options Directed Output Files A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Data Separation feature is to be used. The global parameter equivalent is DIRECTED OUTPUT FILES. Valid values are: Y = N = Instructs the Editors to use the Data Separation feature of the partner profile to determine which split file is to receive this document. Data Separation feature is not active. This is the default value. Split by Partner (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Inbound Editor should use the Receiver ID (default value) or Sender ID when reading the partner profile to determine which split file is to receive the document. Used with Directed Output files. The global parameter equivalent is SENDER ID FOR DATA SEPARATION. Valid values are: Y N = = Use the Sender ID for data separation. Use the Receiver ID for data separation. This is the default value. Transaction Test/Prod (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that the transaction partner data separation records were set up by using the optional Test Production field. The global parameter equivalent is TRANSACTION TEST/PRODUCTION SPLIT. Valid values are: 5 - 88 Y = N = The Editor uses the test/production status from the transaction partner profile record as part of the key when looking up the transaction level data separation record. If no record is found, the Editor performs a second transaction lookup without the test/ production field. Partner data separation records were set up without test/ production. This is the default value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D The Administration Subsystem Receiver Processing Options Verify Receiver Interchange A one-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Interchange Receiver ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY RECEIVER INTERCHANGE and VERIFY RECEIVER INTERCHANGE OFF. Valid values are: Y = N = Validate the Interchange Receiver IDs (inbound) by checking the partner profile for their existence. A partner must exist in the Partner Profile (control record). Do not verify the Receiver IDs at the Interchange level. This is the default value. Verify Receiver Group A one-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Group Receiver ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY RECEIVER GROUP and VERIFY RECEIVER GROUP OFF. Valid values are: Y = N = Validate the Group Receiver IDs (inbound) by checking the partner profile for their existence. Do not verify the Group Receiver IDs. This is the default value. Last Update Date Displays the last date the record was updated. Time Displays the last time the record was updated. User Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 89 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 5 (EDIM224/EDIM22E) screens are used to display and update Acknowledgment and Wrapping options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound data. How to Access Access the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 5 screen for both inbound and outbound data. Inbound EDIM224 __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-5 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** Acknowledgment Options: Acknowledge Interchange....: Acknowledge Group..........: Acknowledge Transaction....: Acknowledge Errors.........: Partner Acknowledgment.....: Use CNTL for Acks..........: Generate A2 Record.........: Generate TCR...............: Last Update Date..: 02/09/00 Enter PF1=Help 5 - 90 N N N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y = = = = = = = = Always Acknowledge Interchange Always Acknowledge Group Always Acknowledge Transaction Always Acknowledge Errors Use Partner To Generate Acknowledgment Use CNTL for Acknowledgments Generate A2 Acceptance Generate TCR for Acknowledgment Time..: 15:12:41 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt User..: XXX PF5=Next GBL IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E The Administration Subsystem Outbound EDIM22E __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-5 O XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** OUTBOUND *** Wrapping: Wrapping Level.............: 0 Last Update Date..: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help 0 = Int 1 = Grp Time..: 00:00:00 PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt 2 = Trn 3 = Seg 4 = All User..: SCI PF5=Next GBL Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen. PF5=Next GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-6 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound (protected) This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are: I O = = Inbound Outbound IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 91 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E Acknowledgment Options Acknowledge Interchange (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an Interchange level acknowledgment when an ISA, ICS, or UNB Interchange is received inbound. The global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE INTERCHANGE ON and ACKNOWLEDGE INTERCHANGE OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Generate an Interchange level acknowledgment. Do not generate an Interchange level acknowledgment. This is the default value. Acknowledge Group (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a Group level acknowledgment when a GS or UNG Group envelope is received inbound. The global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE GROUP ON and ACKNOWLEDGE GROUP OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Generate a Group level acknowledgment. Do not generate a Group level acknowledgment. This is the default value. Acknowledge Transaction (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a transaction level acknowledgment when an ST or UNH transaction envelope is received inbound. The global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSACTION ON and ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSACTION OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Generate a transaction level acknowledgment. Do not generate a transaction level acknowledgment. This is the default value. Acknowledge Errors (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an acknowledgment when an error is detected in any data segments. The global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE ERRORS ON and ACKNOWLEDGE ERRORS OFF. Valid values are: Y N = = Generate an acknowledgment if an error is detected. Do not generate an acknowledgment on error detection. This is the default value. Note: If errors occur and this global parameter is set to Y, acknowledgments will be generated even if the ACKNOWLEDGE GROUP AND ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSACTION parameters of set to OFF. Partner Acknowledgment (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag to instruct the Inbound Editor to look at the partner profile for information on acknowledgment generation. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. Valid values are: Y N 5 - 92 = = Use the partner profile to determine acknowledgment generation. Do not use the partner profile for acknowledgment generation. This is the default value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E The Administration Subsystem Note: If any of the four global acknowledgement previously listed settings are activated, ALL partners will be acknowledged at the indicated level, regardless of the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT parameter or the settings for any individual partner. Use CNTL for Acks (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate to the Inbound Editor to use CNTL records when building acknowledgments. The acknowledgments need to go through the envelope generation process before being processed outbound. The global parameter equivalent is USE CNTL FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Valid values are: Y = Create acknowledgments with CNTL records. See the topic “Outbound Envelope Generation” in Chapter 3 in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for information. N = Generate envelopes for acknowledgments. This is the default value. Generate A2 Record (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that an A2 segment is to be generated for each accepted transaction. The global parameter equivalent is GENERATE A2 ACCEPTANCE. Valid values are: Y = N = An A2 segment is generated for accepted transactions and an A1 is generated for rejected transactions if Acknowledge Errors is active. A1/A2 acknowledgments are not generated. This is the default value. Generate TCR (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a TCR (user defined transmission) record for acknowledgments being created by the Inbound Editor. The global parameter equivalent is GENERATE TCR FOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT. Valid values are: Y = N = Generate a TCR record with the acknowledgment if a $TCR record for the user is found on the partner profile. Do not generate a TCR record. This is the default value. Wrapping Options Wrapping Level (Outbound Only) A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the wrapping level for outbound documents. The global parameter equivalents are COMPRESS TRANSMISSION, COMPRESS GROUP, COMPRESS TRANSACTION, COMPRESS SEGMENT, and COMPRESS ALL. Valid values are: 0 = 1 = Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position one. Each consecutive segment within that Interchange begins immediately following the terminator of the previous segment. This is the default value. Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position one. Each Group envelope begins on a new record in position IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 93 The Administration Subsystem 2 = 3 = 4 = Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E one. Each consecutive segment within that Group begins immediately following the terminator of the previous segment. Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position one. Each Group envelope begins on a new record in position one. Each transaction envelope begins on a new record in position one. Each consecutive segment within that transaction begins immediately following the terminator of the previous segment. Do not perform wrapping. Each segment begins on a new record in position one. The first Interchange envelope begins on the first record in position one. Each consecutive segment begins immediately following the terminator of the previous segment. Last Update Date Displays the last date the record was updated. Time Displays the last time the record was updated. User Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record. 5 - 94 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F Purpose The Global Parameter Maint 6 (EDIM225/EDIM22F) screens are used to display and update EDIFACT/TRADACOMS and add-on product options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound data. How to Access Access the Global Parameter Maint-6 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen. Note: No jump code is associated with this screen. Screen Examples The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance-6 screen for both inbound and outbound data. Inbound EDIM225 __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-6 I XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** INBOUND *** EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options: Use STX Qualifier............: N Error Rejection..............: N Y = ON N = OFF T = Tradacoms Y = Non-Tradacoms N = Not Active Add On Product Options: Examiner Tracking............: N Last Update Date..: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Y = ON Time..: 00:00:00 N = OFF User..: XXX PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 95 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F Outbound EDIM22F __________ Inbound/Outbound: GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-6 O XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 *** OUTBOUND *** EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options: Use STX Qualifier............: N Y = ON N = OFF Delete Optional Blanks.......: N Delete All Blanks............: N Y = Optional Blanks Removed Y = All Blanks Removed Add On Product Options: Viewpoint Track Output Files.: N Plus Will Assign Batch #.....: N Last Update Date..: 00/00/00 Enter PF1=Help Y = ON Y = ON Time..: 00:00:00 N = OFF N = OFF User..: XXX PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL PF10=Updt Function Key Descriptions Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit, PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1. PF4=Prev GBL Displays the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen. PF10=Updt Updates the changed global parameter records. Field Descriptions Jump Code A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen. To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you want to jump. Then, press Enter. See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes. Inbound/Outbound (protected) This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are: I O 5 - 96 = = Inbound Outbound IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F The Administration Subsystem EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options Use STX Qualifier A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the first two positions of the sender control number (SNRF) as a Qualifier. The global parameter equivalent is USE STX QUALIFIER. Valid values are: Y = N = Use the first two positions of the sender control number as the Qualifier for the partner lookup. Do not active this feature. This is the default value. Error Rejection (Inbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the Partner Error Rejection feature for TRADACOMS documents. If an error occurs, the error that generated the message, as well as the entire Interchange is rejected. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER ERROR CONTROL – TRADACOMS. Valid values are: Y N = = T = Use the partner error rejection for non-TRADACOMS. Do not activate error rejection for TRADACOMS. This is the default value. Use partner error rejection for TRADACOMS. Delete Optional Blanks (Outbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to remove optional elements that contain spaces. The global parameter equivalent is DELETE OPTIONAL BLANK ELEMENTS. Valid values are: Y N = = Remove blank optional elements Do not activate the feature. This is the default value. Delete All Blanks (Outbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to remove all elements that contain spaces. The global parameter equivalent is DELETE ALL BLANK ELEMENTS. Valid values are: Y = space = Remove all blank elements Do not activate this feature. This is the default value. Add On Product Options Examiner Tracking (Inbound Only) Not used. Viewpoint Track Output Files (Outbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to write Viewpoint User Tracking records to the output file. The global parameter equivalent is TRACK OUTPUT FILES. Valid values are: Y N = Write Tracking records to output file for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint = Feature is not active. This is the default value. IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 97 The Administration Subsystem Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F Plus Will Assign Batch # (Outbound Only) A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that the outbound Editor is not to assign the communications batch number for the $$ADD card. A batch number is assigned during the STOUTL – Add process. The global parameter equivalent is PLUS ASSIGNS BATCH NUMBER. Valid values are: Y N = = Assign a batch number by STOUTL-Add Outbound Editor assigns a batch number. This is the default value. Last Update Date Displays the last date the record was updated. Time Displays the last time the record was updated. User Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record. 5 - 98 IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide Partner Migration Menu EDIY100 The Administration Subsystem Partner Migration Menu EDIY100 Purpose The Partner Migration Menu (EDIY100) contains seven menu options that you can use to identify, and then migrate partner profiles from Partner/Qualifier mode to Relationship mode. See Chapter 7, “Migrating to Relationship Processing Mode,” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for more information. How to Access Access the Partner Migration Menu in either of the following ways: • From the Administrative Main Menu, type 5 in the Selection field to select Relationship Conversion and press Enter. • Type 4.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter. Menu Example The following example illustrates the Partner Migration Menu. EDIY100 4.5_______ PARTNER MIGRATION MENU XXX 06/01/2011 12:00:00 Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or press the PF3 key to Exit. _ 1. Enter PF1=Help User Selection 2. User Maintenance 3. Partner Selection 4. Relationship Maintenance 5. Data Translation Table Directory 6. Data Table Migration Selection 7. Data Table Migration Maintenance PF3=Exit IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide 5 - 99 The Administration Subsystem Partner Migration Menu EDIY100 Menu Options The following table describes the options on the Partner Migration Menu. Menu Option Description 1. User Selection Lists Partner IDs for the user portion of user/partner relationships. 2. User Maintenance Enables you to maintain the Partners IDs previously identified as users. 3. Partner Selection Lists Partner IDs for the partner portion of user/partner relationships. 4. Relationship Maintenance Enables you to maintain previously identified user/partner relationships. 5. Data Translation Table Directory Enables you to review partner-specific data translation tables. 6. Data Table Migration Selection Enables you to update partner information for partnerspecific d